Drive method of el display panel

ABSTRACT

In order to charge and discharge parasitic capacitance of a source signal line sufficiently and program a predetermined current value into a pixel transistor, it is necessary to output a relatively large current from the source driver circuit.  
     However, if such a large current is passed through the source signal line, the value of this current is programmed into the pixel, causing a larger than desired current to flow through an EL element  15.    
     For example, if a 10 times larger current is used for programming, a 10 times larger current flows through the EL element  15 , and thus the EL element  15  illuminates 10 times more brightly. To obtain predetermined emission brightness, the time during which the current flows through the EL element can be reduced to 1/10 of one frame (1 F). This way, the parasitic capacitance of the source signal line can be charged and discharged sufficiently and the predetermined emission brightness can be obtained.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present invention relates to a self-luminous display panel such asan EL display panel which employs organic or inorganicelectroluminescent (EL) elements. Also, it relates to an informationdisplay apparatus and the like which employ the EL display panel, adrive method for the EL display panel, and the drive circuit for the ELdisplay panel.

BACKGROUND ART

Generally, active-matrix display apparatus display images by arranging alarge number of pixels in a matrix and controlling the light intensityof each pixel according to a video signal. For example, if liquidcrystals are used as an electrochemical substance, the transmittance ofeach pixel changes according to a voltage written into the pixel. Evenwith active-matrix display apparatus which employ an organicelectroluminescent (EL) material as an electrochemical substance, thebasic operation is the same as in the case of using liquid crystals.

In a liquid crystal display panel, each pixel works as a shutter, andimages are displayed as a backlight is blocked off and revealed by thepixels or shutters. An organic EL display panel is of a self-luminoustype in which each pixel has a light-emitting element. Consequently, theself-luminous type display panel such as an organic EL display panel hasthe advantages of being more viewable than liquid crystal displaypanels, requiring no backlighting, having high response speed, etc.

Brightness of each light-emitting element (pixel) in an organic ELdisplay panel is controlled by an amount of current. That is, organic ELdisplay panels differ greatly from liquid crystal display panels in thatlight-emitting elements are driven or controlled by current.

A construction of organic EL display panels can be either asimple-matrix type or active-matrix type. It is difficult to implement alarge high-resolution display panel of the former type although theformer type is simple in structure and inexpensive. The latter typeallows a large high-resolution display panel to be implemented, butinvolves a problem that it is a technically difficult control method andis relatively expensive. Currently, active-matrix type display panelsare developed intensively. In the active-matrix type display panel,current flowing through the light-emitting elements provided in eachpixel is controlled by thin-film transistors (transistors) installed inthe pixels.

Such an organic EL display panel of an active-matrix type is disclosedin Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 8-234683. An equivalent circuit for onepixel of the display panel is shown in FIG. 62. A pixel 16 consists ofan EL element 15 which is a light-emitting element, a first transistor11 a, a second transistor 11 b, and a storage capacitance 19. Thelight-emitting element 15 is an organic electroluminescent (EL) element.According to the present invention, the transistor 11 a which supplies(controls) current to the EL element 15 is referred to as a drivertransistor 11. A transistor, such as the transistor 11 b shown in FIG.62, which operates as a switch is referred to as a switching transistor11.

The organic EL element 15, in many cases, may be referred to as an OLED(organic light-emitting diode) because of its rectification. In FIG. 62or the like, a diode symbol is used for the light-emitting element OLED15.

Incidentally, the light-emitting element 15 according to the presentinvention is not limited to an OLED. It may be of any type as long asits brightness is controlled by the amount of current flowing throughthe element 15. Examples include an inorganic EL element, a whitelight-emitting diode consisting of a semiconductor, a typicallight-emitting diode, and a light-emitting transistor. Rectification isnot necessarily required of the light-emitting element 15. Bidirectionaldiodes are also available. While the reference numeral 15 is describedas an EL element, it is sometimes used as the meaning of an EL film oran EL structure.

In the example of FIG. 62, a source terminal (S) of the P-channeltransistor 11 a is designated as Vdd (power supply potential) and acathode of the EL element 15 is connected to ground potential (Vk). Onthe other hand, an anode is connected to a drain terminal (D) of thetransistor 11 b. Besides, a gate terminal of the P-channel transistor 11a is connected to a gate signal line 17 a, a source terminal isconnected to a source signal line 18, and a drain terminal is connectedto the storage capacitance 19 and a gate terminal (G) of the P-channeltransistor 11 a.

Incidentally, although it is stated herein that the transistor elements11 a which supply current used to drive the EL elements 15 are p-channeltransistors, this is not restrictive and they may be n-channeltransistors. Of course, the transistors 11 may be bipolar transistors,FETs, or MOSFETs. The board 71 is not limited to a glass substrate andmay be a silicon substrate or metal substrate.

To drive the pixel 16, a video signal which represents brightnessinformation is first applied to the source signal line 18 with the gatesignal line 17 a selected. Then, the transistor 11 a conducts, thestorage capacitance 19 is charged or discharged, and gate potential ofthe transistor 11 b matches the potential of the video signal. When thegate signal line 17 a is deselected, the transistor 11 a is turned offand the transistor 11 b is cut off electrically from the source signalline 18. The gate potential of the transistor 11 a is maintained stablyby the storage capacitance 19. Current delivered to the light-emittingelement 15 via the transistor 11 a depends on gate-source voltage Vgs ofthe transistor 11 a and the light-emitting element 15 continues to emitlight at an intensity which corresponds to the amount of currentsupplied via the transistor 11 a.

Organic EL display panels are made of low-temperature polysilicontransistor arrays. However, since organic EL elements use current toemit light, there has been a problem that variations in thecharacteristics of the transistors will cause display irregularities.

DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION

In view of the above problems with conventional EL elements, an objectof the present invention is to provide a drive method of an EL displayapparatus which can achieve more uniform display than conventionalmethods even if there are variations in characteristics of pixeltransistors and which causes blurred moving pictures less than theconventional methods.

To achieve the above object, a first invention of the present inventionis a drive method for an EL display panel, the EL display panelcomprising:

-   -   EL elements arranged in a matrix;    -   driver transistors which supply current to be passed through the        EL elements;    -   first switching elements placed in current paths of the EL        elements;    -   a gate driver circuit which turns on and off the first switching        elements for control; and    -   a source driver circuit which supplies programming current to        the driver transistors,    -   wherein the driver transistors are p-channel transistors,    -   unit transistors which generate the programming current in the        source driver circuit are n-channel transistors, and    -   the gate driver circuit turns off the first switching elements        at least two or more times during one frame period or one field        period.

A second invention of the present invention is a drive method for an ELdisplay panel, the EL display panel comprising:

-   -   EL elements arranged in a matrix;    -   driver transistors which supply current to be passed through the        EL elements;    -   first switching elements placed in current paths of the EL        elements;    -   a gate driver circuit which turns on and off the first switching        elements for control; and    -   a source driver circuit which supplies programming current to        the driver transistors,    -   wherein the driver transistors are p-channel transistors,    -   unit transistors which generate the programming current in the        source driver circuit are n-channel transistors, and    -   the gate driver circuit keeps the first switching elements off        for two horizontal scanning periods during one frame period or        one field period.

A third invention of the present invention is a drive method for an ELdisplay panel, the EL display panel comprising:

-   -   EL elements arranged in a matrix;    -   driver transistors which supply current to be passed through the        EL elements;    -   first switching elements placed in current paths of the EL        elements;    -   a gate driver circuit which turns on and off the first switching        elements for control; and    -   a source driver circuit which supplies programming current to        the driver transistors,    -   wherein the driver transistors are p-channel transistors,    -   unit transistors which generate the programming current in the        source driver circuit are n-channel transistors,    -   a period during which pixel row is selected and programmed with        current is constructed from a first period and second period,    -   a first current is applied during the first period,    -   a second current is applied during the second period,    -   the first current is larger than the second current, and    -   the source driver circuit outputs the first current during the        first period and outputs the first current during the second        period which comes after the first period.

A fourth invention of the present invention is the drive method for theEL display panel according to the first invention of the presentinvention, wherein the first switching elements are turned offperiodically during one frame period or one field period.

A fifth invention of the present invention is an EL display panel,comprising:

-   -   a source driver circuit which outputs programming current;    -   EL elements arranged in a matrix;    -   driver transistors which supply current to be passed through the        EL elements;    -   first switching elements placed in current paths of the EL        elements;    -   second switching elements which constitute paths used to        transmit programming current to the driver transistors;    -   a first gate driver circuit which turns on and off the first        switching elements for control;    -   a second gate driver circuit which turns on and off the second        switching elements for control;    -   a source driver circuit which supplies programming current to        the driver transistors,    -   wherein the driver transistors are p-channel transistors,    -   unit transistors which generate the programming current in the        source driver circuit are n-channel transistors,    -   the first gate driver circuit turns off the first switching        elements a number of times during one frame period or one field        period,    -   the first gate driver circuit is placed or formed on one side of        the display panel, and    -   the second gate driver circuit is placed or formed on another        side of the display panel.

A sixth invention of the present invention is the EL display panelaccording to the fifth invention of the present invention, wherein thegate driver circuits are formed in the same process as the drivertransistors and the source driver circuit is made of a semiconductorchip.

A seventh invention of the present invention is an EL display panel,comprising:

-   -   gate signal lines;    -   source signal lines;    -   a source driver circuit which outputs programming current;    -   a gate driver circuit;    -   EL elements arranged in a matrix;    -   driver transistors which supply current to be passed through the        EL elements;    -   first transistors placed in current paths of the EL elements;    -   second transistors which constitute paths used to transmit        programming current to the driver transistors; and    -   a source driver circuit which supplies programming current to        the driver transistors,    -   wherein the driver transistors are p-channel transistors,    -   unit transistors which generate the programming current in the        source driver circuit are n-channel transistors,    -   the source driver circuit outputs programming current to the        source signal lines,    -   the gate driver circuit is connected to the gate signal lines,    -   gate terminals of the second transistors are connected to the        gate signal lines,    -   source terminals of the second transistors are connected to the        source signal lines,    -   drain terminals of the second transistors are connected to drain        terminals of the driver transistors, and    -   the gate driver circuit selects a plurality of gate signal lines        and supplies the programming current to the driver transistors        of a plurality of pixels.

An eighth invention of the present invention is an EL display panel,comprising:

-   -   a display area consisting of I pixel rows (I is an integer        larger than 1) and J pixel columns (J is an integer larger than        1);    -   a source driver circuit which applies an image signal to source        signal lines in the display area;    -   a gate driver circuit which applies a turn-on voltage or        turn-off voltage to gate signal lines in the display area; and    -   a dummy pixel row formed outside the display area,    -   wherein EL elements are arranged in a matrix in the display area        and emit light based on the image signal from the source driver        circuit, and    -   the dummy pixel row either does not to emit light or emits light        not visible to the eye.

A ninth invention of the present invention is the EL display panelaccording to the seventh invention of the present invention,

-   -   wherein the gate driver circuit selects a plurality of pixel        rows at a time and applies the image signal from the source        driver circuit to the plurality of pixel rows; and    -   a dummy pixel row is selected when the first pixel row or I-th        pixel rows is selected.

A tenth invention of the present invention is the EL display panelaccording to the seventh invention of the present invention, wherein thegate driver circuit is constructed of p-channel transistors.

An eleventh invention of the present invention is an EL display panel,comprising:

-   -   EL elements arranged in a matrix;    -   driver transistors which supply current to be passed through the        EL elements;    -   first switching elements placed in current paths of the EL        elements;    -   a gate driver circuit which turns on and off the first switching        elements for control; and    -   a source driver circuit which supplies programming current to        the driver transistors,    -   wherein the driver transistors and the first switching elements        are p-channel transistors,    -   unit transistors which generate the programming current in the        source driver circuit are n-channel transistors, and    -   unit transistors which generate the programming current in the        source driver circuit are n-channel transistors.

A twelfth invention of the present invention is a drive method for an ELdisplay panel, comprising the steps of: supplying EL elements with acurrent which makes the EL elements emit light brighter than apredetermined brightness; and making the EL elements emit light for aperiod equal to 1/N of one frame period or one field period (N is largerthan 1).

A thirteenth invention of the present invention is the drive method forthe EL display panel according to the twelfth invention of the presentinvention, wherein the period equal to 1/N of a frame is divided into aplurality of periods.

A fourteenth invention of the present invention is a drive method for anEL display panel which uses a current to program currents to be passedthrough EL elements, comprising the steps of: making the EL elementsemit light brighter than a predetermined brightness; displaying adisplay area equal to 1/N (N>1) of an entire screen; and shifting thedisplay area of 1/N of the entire screen in sequence to display theentire screen.

A fifteenth invention of the present invention is an EL displayapparatus comprising an EL display panel having the EL display panel inturn comprising EL elements arranged in a matrix; driver transistorswhich supply current to be passed through the EL elements; firstswitching elements placed in current paths of the EL elements; and agate driver circuit which turns on and off the first switching elements,and a receiver.

One of the aspects of the present invention described herein includestwo operations. The first operation involves supplying drivertransistors 11 a of pixels 16 with current (drawn) from a current drivercircuit (IC) 14 and programming the driver transistors 11 a with apredetermined current. The second operation involves passing the currentprogrammed in the driver transistors 11 a through EL elements 15. Inthis way, by programming the driver transistors 11 a with a current andpassing the current through the EL elements 15, it is possible to passthe predetermined current which has been programmed, even if there arevariations in characteristics of the driver transistors 11 a. This makesit possible to achieve a uniform screen display. The current passedthrough each EL element 15 is driven intermittently by a transistor 11 dformed or placed between the EL element 15 and driver transistor 11 a.

Another aspect of the present invention is a method of performingcurrent programming by selecting the driver transistors 11 a of multiplepixel rows at a time. The selected pixel rows are scanned in sequence.For example, if a current of 1 μA is outputted from the current driver14 and two pixel rows are selected at a time, a current of 0.5 μA (=½)is programmed into each pixel row.

To do this, a dummy pixel row is formed at least along the top or bottomedge of the screen. The dummy pixel row is designed not to emit lighteven when programmed with current. The number of dummy pixel rows formedor disposed equals to the number of pixel rows selected simultaneouslyminus one.

Parasitic capacitance is present in source signal lines 18 to whichcurrent is outputted from the current driver 14. If the parasiticcapacitance cannot be charged and discharged sufficiently, it is potpossible to write a predetermined current into the pixels 16. To improvecharging and discharging, output current from the current driver 14should be increased. However, the current outputted from the currentdriver 14 is written into the driver transistors 11 a of the pixels 16.Thus, an increase in the output current from the current driver 14increases the current written into the driver transistors 11 a as well,resulting in a proportional increase in emission brightness of thepixels 15. Consequently, predetermined brightness is not available.

If the driver transistors 11 a of multiple pixel rows are selectedsimultaneously, the output current from the current driver 14 isprogrammed into the multiple pixel rows, being divided among them. Thismakes it possible to increase the current outputted from the currentdriver 14 and decrease the current written into the driver transistors11 a.

Another aspect of the present invention illuminates pixels 16intermittently. That is, intermittent screen display is provided.Intermittent screen display eliminates blurred moving pictures. Thisachieves proper movie display without residual images as in the case ofa CRT. Intermittent display can be achieved by controlling thetransistors 11 d placed or formed between the driver transistors 11 aand EL elements 15.

Incidentally, with the above configuration, if the pixel transistors areprogrammed, for example, with 10 times larger current (N=10), a 10 timeslarger current flows through the EL elements 15 and the EL elements 15emit 10 times brighter light. To obtain predetermined emissionbrightness, the time during which the current flows through the ELelements can be reduced to 1/10 of one frame (1 F). This way, theparasitic capacitance of the source signal lines can be charged anddischarged sufficiently and the predetermined emission brightness can beobtained. Since the pixels are programmed with N times larger current,the parasitic capacitance of the source signal lines can be charged anddischarged sufficiently. This allows accurate current programming,resulting in a uniform screen display. Also, current is passed throughthe EL element 15 only for a period of 1 F/N, but current is not passedduring the remaining period (1 F (N−1)/N). In this display condition,image data display and black display (non-illumination) are repeatedevery 1 F. This makes it possible to achieve proper movie displaywithout edge blur of images.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating operation of a displaypanel according to the present invention;

FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating operation of a displaypanel according to the present invention;

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a manufacturing method ofa display panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 8 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 9 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 10 is a sectional view of a display panel according to the presentinvention;

FIG. 11 is a sectional view of a display panel according to the presentinvention;

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 37 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 38 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 40 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 41 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 42 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 43 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 47 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 48 is a block diagram of a display apparatus according to thepresent invention;

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 50 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 51 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 54 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a cell phone according tothe present invention;

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a viewfinder according tothe present invention;

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a video camera accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a digital cameraaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a TV (monitor) accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 62 is a block diagram of a pixel in a conventional display panel;

FIG. 63 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 64 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 65 is a block diagram of a pixel in a display panel according tothe present invention;

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel accordingto the present invention;

FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a checking methodaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a checking methodaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a checking methodaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a checking methodaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a checking methodaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a checking methodaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a checking methodaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a power supply circuit ofa display apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a power supply circuit ofa display apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a power supply circuit ofa display apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a power supply circuit ofa display apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 98 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 99 is a schematic sectional view illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display apparatusaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 120 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 125 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 127 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 128 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 129 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 130 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 132 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 133 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 136 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 137 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 138 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 142 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 143 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 145 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 147 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 148 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 149 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 150 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 153 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 155 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 160 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 161 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 162 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 164 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay panel according to the present invention;

FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 171 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 174 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 176 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 177 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 178 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 180 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 181 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 182 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 183 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method of adisplay apparatus according to the present invention;

FIG. 184 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a source driver circuitaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 185 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a source driver circuitaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 186 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a source driver circuitaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a source driver circuitaccording to the present invention;

FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a source driver circuitaccording to the present invention; and

FIG. 189 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a source driver circuitaccording to the present invention.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS

-   11 Transistor (thin-film transistor)-   12 Gate driver IC (circuit)-   14 Source driver IC (circuit)-   15 EL (element) (light-emitting element)-   16 Pixel-   17 Gate signal line-   18 Source signal line-   19 Storage capacitance (additional capacitor, additional    capacitance)-   50 Display screen-   51 Write pixel (row)-   52 Non-display pixel (non-display area, non-illuminated area)-   53 Display pixel (display area, illuminated area)-   61 Shift register-   62 Inverter-   63 Output buffer-   71 Array board (display panel)-   72 Laser irradiation range (laser spot)-   73 Positioning marker-   74 Glass substrate (array board)-   81 Control IC (circuit)-   82 Power supply IC (circuit)-   83 Printed board-   84 Flexible board-   85 Sealing lid-   86 Cathode wiring-   87 Anode wiring (Vdd)-   88 Data signal line-   89 Gate control signal line-   101 Bank (rib)-   102 Interlayer insulating film-   104 Contact connector-   105 Pixel electrode-   106 Cathode electrode-   107 Desiccant-   108 λ/4 plate-   109 Polarizing plate-   111 Thin encapsulation film-   281 Dummy pixel (row)-   341 Output stage circuit-   371 OR circuit-   401 Illumination control line-   471 Reverse bias line-   472 Gate potential control line-   561 Electronic regulator circuit-   562 SD (source-drain) short circuit of a transistor-   571 Antenna-   572 Key-   573 Casing-   574 Display panel-   581 Eye ring-   582 Magnifying lens-   583 Convex lens-   591 Supporting point (pivot point)-   592 Taking lens-   593 Storage section-   594 Switch-   601 Body-   602 Photographic section-   603 Shutter switch-   611 Mounting frame-   612 Leg-   613 Mount-   614 Fixed part-   631 Changeover switch-   681 Insulating film-   691 Diffraction grating-   721 Pixel aperture-   341 Output stage circuit-   991 Reference voltage circuit-   992 PC (data input means, control means)-   993 Input circuit (operational amplifier, switch, A/D converter)-   994 Transistor-   995 Operational amplifier-   996 Connection terminal-   997 Probe (connection means)-   941 Coil (transformer)-   942 Control circuit-   943 Diode-   944 Capacitor-   945 Resistor-   946 Transistor-   951 Switch-   952 Temperature sensor-   991 Liquid crystal display panel-   1001 Connector resin-   1002 Sealing resin-   1003 Dispersing agent-   1004 Polarizing plate (polarizing film, circular polarizing plate,    circular polarizing film)-   1011 Glass ring-   1021 Flexible board-   1022 Controller-   1023 Connector terminal-   1031 Serial data-   1032 Parallel video data-   1033 Gate driver circuit control data-   1051 Radiator plate (radiator film)-   1052 Hole (air hole, cooling hole)-   1061 Mounted part-   1062 Printed board-   1063 Cushioning member (cushioning bump)-   1111 Unit gate output circuit-   1381 Parasitic capacitance-   1431 Capacitor driver-   1433 Capacitor signal line-   1434 Coupling capacitor-   1461 Current output circuit-   1471 Output terminal-   1472 Parasitic capacitance-   1481 Inverter-   1511 Common signal line-   1512 Common driver circuit-   1841, 1842, 1843 Current source (transistor)-   1851 Switch (on/off means)-   1854 Current source (single unit)-   1853 Internal wiring-   1861 Electronic regulator (Current adjustment means)-   1891 Transistor group

MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION

Some parts of drawings herein are omitted and/or enlarged/reduced hereinfor ease of understanding and/or illustration. For example, in asectional view of a display panel shown in FIG. 11, a encapsulation film111 and the like are shown as being fairly thick. On the other hand, inFIG. 10, a sealing lid 85 is shown as being thin. Some parts areomitted. For example, although the display panel according to thepresent invention requires a polarizing plate of a phase film such as acircular polarizing plate to prevent reflection, the phase film isomitted in drawings herein. This also applies to the drawings below.Besides, the same or similar forms, materials, functions, or operationsare denoted by the same reference numbers or characters.

Incidentally, what is described with reference to drawings or the likecan be combined with other examples or the like even if not notedspecifically. For example, a touch panel or the like can be attached toa display panel in FIG. 8 to construct an information display apparatusor the like shown in FIGS. 57 to 61 and 102 etc. Also, a magnifying lens582 can be mounted to configure a view finder (see FIG. 58) used for avideo camera (see FIG. 59, etc.) or the like. Also, any of the drivemethods described with reference to FIG. 4, 15, 18, 21, 23, 27, 31, 35,39, 44, 52, 53, 55, 63, 67, 77, 78, 79, 80, 114, 116, 120, 122, 125,129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 136, 139, 140, 144, 145, 152, 164, or the likecan be applied to any display apparatus, display panel, or informationdisplay apparatus according to the present invention.

Also, thin-film transistors are cited herein as driver transistors 11and switching transistors 11 etc., this is not restrictive. Thin-filmdiodes (TFDs) or ring diodes may be used instead. Also, the presentinvention is not limited to thin-film elements, and transistors formedon silicon wafers may also be used. Needless to say, FETs, MOS-FETs, MOStransistors, or bipolar transistors may also be used. They arebasically, thin-film transistors. It goes without saying that thepresent invention may also use varistors, thyristors, ring diodes,photodiodes, phototransistors, or PLZT elements. That is, the switchingelement 11 and driving element 11 can be constructed by using any of theabove elements.

An EL panel according to the present invention will be described belowwith reference to drawings.

As shown in FIG. 10, an organic EL display panel consists of a glasssubstrate (array board) 71, transparent electrodes 105 formed as pixelelectrodes, at least one organic EL layer 15, and a metal electrode(reflective film) (cathode) 106, which are stacked one on top ofanother, where the organic functional layer consists of an electrontransport layer, light-emitting layer, positive hole transport layer,etc. The organic EL element 15 emits light when a positive voltage isapplied to the anode or transparent electrodes (pixel electrodes) 105and a negative voltage is applied to the cathode or metal electrode(reflective electrode) 106.

A large current flows through the wiring which supplies current to theanode or cathode (anode wiring 86 or cathode wiring 87). For example,current on the order of 100 A flows through an EL display apparatus witha 40-inch screen. Thus, the resistance values of the anode wiring andcathode wiring fabricated (formed) should be sufficiently low. To solvethis problem, according to the present invention, the anode wiring andthe like (wiring which supplies light-emitting current to the ELelements) are formed of thin film. Then, the thickness of the thin-filmwiring is increased by electro-plating it in multiple layers usingelectroless plating or electrolytic plating technologies.

Available plating metals include, for example, chromium, nickel, gold,copper, and aluminum as well as alloys and amalgam thereof. Also, copperfoil is affixed as wiring itself or to wiring, as required.Alternatively, copper paste or the like is screen-printed on wiring inmultiple layers to increase the thickness of the wiring and therebydecrease the wiring resistance. Also, a bonding technique may be used tobond wires composing the wiring. Also, if necessary, an insulating layermay be formed on the wiring and conductive layers may be stacked on thewiring to form a ground pattern, thereby forming a capacitor(capacitance) between the wiring and ground pattern.

Preferably, the metal electrode 106 is made of metal with a small workfunction, such as lithium, silver, aluminum, magnesium, indium, copper,or an alloy thereof. In particular, it is preferable to use, forexample, an Al—Li alloy. The transparent electrodes 105 may be made of,conductive materials with a large work function such as ITO, or gold andthe like. If gold is used as an electrode material, the electrodesbecome translucent. Incidentally, IZO or other material may be usedinstead of ITO. This also applies to other pixel electrodes 105.

Needless to say, the EL film 15 according to the present invention maybe formed not only by vapor deposition, but also by ink jetting. Thatis, the EL elements 15 according to the present invention may be formednot only of low molecular-weight material by a vapor deposition process,but also of high molecular-weight material by ink jetting and the like.Besides, they may be formed of screen printing or offset printing.

A desiccant 107 is placed in a space between the sealing lid 85 andarray board 71. This is because the organic EL film 15 is vulnerable tomoisture. With the EL film 15 shut off from the open air by the sealinglid 85, the desiccant 107 absorbs water penetrating a sealant andthereby prevents deterioration of the organic EL film 15.

Although the glass sealing lid 85 is used for sealing in FIG. 10, thefilm 111 (this may be a thin film, i.e., a thin encapsulation film) maybe used for sealing as shown in FIG. 11. The encapsulation film (thinencapsulation film) 111 may be, for example, an electrolytic capacitorfilm on which DLC (diamond-like carbon) is vapor-deposited. This filmfeatures extremely low moisture penetration (high moisture resistance).It is used as the encapsulation film 111. Preferably, the difference inthermal expansion coefficient between the sealing lid or encapsulationfilm 111 and array board 71 is 10% or less. A larger difference in thethermal expansion coefficient will cause the sealing lid 111 or the liketo peel off the array board 71. Also, it goes without saying that theencapsulation film 111 may be formed by DLC film or the likevapor-deposited directly on a surface of the electrode 106. Besides, thethin encapsulation film may be formed by laminating thin resin films andmetal films.

Desirably, film thickness of the thin film 111 is such that n·d is equalto or less than main emission wavelength λ of the EL element 15 (where nis the refraction factor of the thin film, or the sum of refractionfactors if two or more thin films are laminated (n·d of each thin filmis calculated); d is the film thickness of the thin film, or the sum ofrefraction factors if two or more thin films are laminated). Bysatisfying this condition, it is possible to more than double theefficiency of light extraction from the EL element 15 compared to when aglass substrate is used for sealing. Also, an alloy, mixture, orlaminate of aluminum and silver may be used.

A technique which uses an encapsulation film 111 for sealing instead ofa sealing lid 85 as described above is called thin film encapsulation.In the case of “underside extraction (see FIG. 10; light is extracted inthe direction of the arrow in FIG. 10)” in which light is extracted fromthe side of the board 71, thin film encapsulation involves forming an ELfilm and then forming an aluminum electrode which will serve as acathode on the EL film. Then, a resin layer is formed as a cushioninglayer on the aluminum layer. An organic material such as acrylic orepoxy may be used for a cushioning layer. Suitable film thickness isfrom 1 μm to 10 μm (both inclusive). More preferably, the film thicknessis from 2 μm to 6 μm (both inclusive). The encapsulation film 74 isformed on the cushioning film. Without the cushioning film, structure ofthe EL film would be deformed by stress, resulting in streaky defects.As described above, the encapsulation film 111 may be made, for example,of DLC (diamond-like carbon) or an electrolytic capacitor of a laminarstructure (structure consisting of thin dielectric films and aluminumfilms vapor-deposited alternately).

In the case of “topside extraction (see FIG. 11; light is extracted inthe direction of the arrow in FIG. 11)” in which light is extracted fromthe side of the EL layer 15, thin film encapsulation involves formingthe EL film 15 and then forming an Ag—Mg film 20 angstrom (inclusive) to300 angstrom thick on the EL film 15 to serve as a cathode (anode). Atransparent electrode such as ITO is formed on the film to reduceresistance. Then, a resin layer is formed as a cushioning layer on theelectrode film. An encapsulation film 111 is formed on the cushioningfilm.

Half the light produced by the organic EL layer 15 is reflected by thereflective film 106 and emitted through the array board 71. However, thereflective film 106 reflects extraneous light, resulting in glare, whichlowers display contrast. To deal with this situation, a λ/4 plate 108and polarizing plate (polarizing film) 109 are placed on the array board71. These are generally called circular polarizing plates (circularpolarizing sheets).

Incidentally, if the pixels are reflective electrodes, the lightproduced by the organic EL layer 15 is emitted upward. Thus, needless tosay, the phase plate 108 and polarizing plate 109 are placed on the sidefrom which light is emitted. Reflective pixels can be obtained by makingpixel electrodes 105 from aluminum, chromium, silver, or the like. Also,by providing projections (or projections and depressions) on a surfaceof the pixel electrodes 105, it is possible to increase an interfacewith the organic EL layer 15, and thereby increase the light-emittingarea, resulting in improved light-emission efficiency. Incidentally, thereflective film which serves as the cathode 106 (anode 105) is made as atransparent electrode. If reflectance can be reduced to 30% or less, nocircular polarizing plate is required. This is because glare is reducedgreatly. Light interference is reduced as well.

Glare can be reduced by the application of carbon-containing acrylicresin (black matrix (BM)), leaving pixel apertures uncoated. Any resinmay be used as long as it absorbs light. Light diffusing materials arealso available, including black metal such as hexavalent chromium;paint; thin film, thick film, or members with fine irregularities on asurface; titanium oxide; aluminum oxide; magnesium oxide; and opalglass. The materials do not necessarily need to be black or dark if theyare colored by a dye or pigment complementary to the color produced by alight-modulating layer 24.

The pixel electrodes 105 are formed of transparent electrodes (ITO). Theorganic EL film 15 is formed on the pixel electrodes 105. As an electricfield is applied to an EL element 15 pinched between the cathodeelectrode 106 and pixel electrode 105, the EL element 15 emits light.

A problem is that all the EL layers 15 to which the electric field isapplied emit light. Areas which are located under the pixel electrodes105 and in which the transistors 11 and gate signal lines 17 are formedare impervious to light (they are referred to as nontransparent areas).Even if the EL layers 15 in the nontransparent areas emit light, theemitted light is blocked. However, power is consumed if light isemitted. Thus, the larger the EL layers in the nontransparent areas, thelower the power efficiency.

To solve this problem, according to the present invention, an insulatingfilm 681 is formed in non-luminous areas as illustrated in FIG. 68. Theinsulating film 681 is formed on the pixel electrodes 105. Also, theinsulating film 681 is formed in the non-luminous areas. Thenon-luminous areas exist between the pixel electrodes 105 and EL layers15 as well as between the cathode 106 and EL layers 15. FIG. 68 shows aconfiguration in which the insulating film 681 is formed between thepixel electrodes 105 and EL layers 15.

FIG. 71 schematically shows the pixel electrodes 105 as viewed from thetop. The insulating film 681 is formed in the non-luminous areas. FIG.72 shows how the insulating film 681 is formed in areas other than pixelapertures 721.

The insulating film is, for example, a thin film of inorganic materialsuch as SiO₂, SiO, TiO₂, or Al₂O₃. Alternatively, it may be a thin orthick film of organic material such as acrylic resin or resist.Incidentally, the pixel electrodes in the nontransparent areas may beremoved by patterning. Also, needless to say, thin metal film and thelike forming the cathode may be removed by patterning.

As the insulating film 681 is formed or the electrodes of EL elements 15are removed by pattering, electric charges are not poured into the ELlayers 15. Consequently, the EL elements 15 in the non-luminous areas donot emit light. This results in improved power efficiency.

Incidentally, needless to say, pixel size may be varied among R, G, andB as illustrated in FIG. 73. Since the luminous efficiency of the ELelements 15 vary among R, G, and B, a good white balance can be achievedby varying the pixel aperture ratio (pixel size) among R, G, and B asillustrated in FIG. 73.

To increase the quantity of light emitted from the board 71 to theoutside, it is recommended to form a diffraction grating illustrated inFIG. 69. The light produced by the EL layers 15 is diffracted by thediffraction grating, reducing the amount of light reflected at the fullcritical angle. This increases the amount of light emitted from theboard 71, achieving a high-brightness display.

FIG. 69(a) shows an example in which a diffraction grating 691 is formedon pixel electrodes 105. Diffraction effect can be obtained bypatterning the pixel electrodes 105 or forming a diffraction gratingunder or on the pixel electrodes 105.

The shape of diffraction grating may be circular, triangular, serrated,rectangular, or sinusoidal. However, in terms of characteristics andefficiency, preferably the diffraction grating is sinusoidal.Preferably, the pitch of the diffraction grating is between 1 μm and 20μm (both inclusive). More preferably, it is between 2 μm and 10 μm (bothinclusive). Preferably, the height of the diffraction grating is between2 μm and 20 μm (both inclusive). More preferably, it is between 3 μm and10 μm (both inclusive) Also, preferably, the diffraction grating isthree-dimensional (dot-matrix) rather than linear (two-dimensional).This is because linear shape will cause polarization dependence.

FIG. 69(b) shows an example in which a diffraction grating 691 is formedon cathode electrodes 106. Diffraction effect can be obtained bypatterning the cathode electrode 106 or forming a diffraction gratingunder or on the cathode electrode 106.

FIG. 70 shows an example in which diffraction gratings 691 are formed oncathode electrodes 106 and pixel electrodes. The diffraction gratings691 a and 691 b can be formed to be two-dimensional (linear) and theformation direction of the diffraction gratings 691 a and 691 b can beconfigured to be orthogonal to each other. Of course, needless to say,one or both of the diffraction gratings 691 a and 691 b may bethree-dimensional.

Preferably, LDD (low doped drain) structure is used for the transistors11. The EL elements will be described herein taking organic EL elements(known by various abbreviations including OEL, PEL, PLED, OLED) 15 as anexample, but this is not restrictive and inorganic EL elements may beused as well.

An organic EL display panel of active-matrix type must satisfy twoconditions that:

-   1. it is capable of selecting a specific pixel and give necessary    information and-   2. it is capable of passing current through the EL element    throughout one frame period.

To satisfy the two conditions, in a conventional organic EL pixelconfiguration shown in FIG. 62, a switching transistor is used as afirst transistor 11 b to select the pixel and a driver transistor isused as a second transistor 11 a to supply current to an EL element (ELfilm) 15.

To display a gradation using this configuration, a voltage correspondingto the gradation must be applied the gate of the driver transistor 11 a.Consequently, variations in a turn-on current of the driver transistor11 a appear directly in display.

The turn-on current of a transistor is extremely uniform if thetransistor is monocrystalline (ex. a transistor formed on a siliconsubstrate). However, in the case of a low-temperature polycrystallinetransistor formed on an inexpensive glass substrate by low-temperaturepolysilicon technology at a temperature not higher than 450, itsthreshold varies in a range of ±0.2 V to 0.5 V. The turn-on currentflowing through the driver transistor 11 a varies accordingly, causingdisplay irregularities. The irregularities are caused not only byvariations in the threshold voltage, but also by mobility of thetransistor and thickness of a gate insulating film. Characteristics alsochange due to degradation of the transistor 11.

Variations in the characteristics of the transistor is not limited tolow-temperature polysilicon technologies, and can occur in transistorsformed on semiconductor films grown in solid-phase (CGS) byhigh-temperature polysilicon technology at a process temperature of 450degrees (centigrade) or higher. Besides, the phenomenon can occur inorganic transistors and amorphous silicon transistors. Description willbe given herein mainly of transistors produced by the low-temperaturepolysilicon technology.

In a method which displays gradations by the application of voltage asshown in FIG. 62, device characteristics must be controlled strictly toobtain a uniform display. However, current low-temperaturepolycrystalline polysilicon transistors or the like cannot satisfy aspecification which prescribes that variations be kept within apredetermined range.

Each pixel structure in an EL display panel according to the presentinvention comprises four transistors 11 and an EL element as shownconcretely in FIG. 1. Pixel electrodes are configured to overlap with asource signal line. Specifically, the pixel electrodes 105 are formed onan insulating film or planarized acrylic film formed on the sourcesignal line 18 for insulation. A structure in which pixel electrodesoverlap with at least part of the source signal line 18 is known as ahigh aperture (HA) structure. This reduces unnecessary lightinterference and allows proper light emission.

In this circuit, a single pixel contains four transistors 11. The gateof the transistor 11 a is connected to the source of the transistor 11b. The gates of the transistors 11 b and 11 c are connected to the gatesignal line 17 a. The drain of the transistor 11 b is connected to thesource of the transistor 11 c and source of the transistor lid. Thedrain of the transistor 11 c is connected to the source signal line 18.The gate of the transistor 11 d is connected to the gate signal line 17b and the drain of the transistor lid is connected to the anodeelectrode of the EL element 15.

Incidentally, the transistors 11 b and 11 c are examples of the secondswitching elements according to the present invention. On the otherhand, the transistor 11 d is an example of the first switching elementsaccording to the present invention.

As the gate signal line (a first scanning line) 17 a is activated (aturn-on voltage is applied), the driver transistor 11 a and switchingtransistor 11 c of the EL element 15 are turned on. At the same time,the current to be passed through the EL element 15 is delivered by thesource driver circuit 14. Also, the transistor 11 b turns on toshort-circuit the gate and drain of the transistor 11 a and the currentdelivered by the source driver circuit 14 is stored in a capacitor(storage capacitance, additional capacitance) 19 connected between thegate and source of the transistor 11 a (see FIG. 3(a)).

Nest, the gate signal line 17 a is deactivated (a turn-off voltage isapplied), a gate signal line 17 b is activated, and a current path isswitched to a path which includes the first transistor 11 a, atransistor 11 d connected to the EL element 15, and the EL element 15 todeliver the stored current to the EL element 15 (see FIG. 3(b)).

If the capacity of the capacitor 19 needed for a single pixel is Cs (pF)and an area (pixel size rather than an aperture ratio) occupied by thepixel is Sp (square μm), a condition 500/Sp≦Cs≦20000/Sp, and morepreferably a condition 1000/Sp≦Cs≦10000/Sp should be satisfied.Incidentally, since gate capacity of the transistor is small, Cs asreferred to here can be regarded as the capacity of the storagecapacitance (capacitor) 19 alone.

Preferably, the capacitors 19 are generally formed in non-display areasof pixels. Generally, for full-color organic EL 15, the organic ELlayers 15 are formed by masked vapor deposition using metal masks. Ifmasks are misaligned, there is a danger that the organic EL layers 15(15R, 15G, and 15B) of different colors may overlap. Thus, adjacentpixels of different colors must be separated 10μ or more by non-displayareas. These areas do not contribute to light-emission (non-luminousareas). Thus, by forming the storage capacitance 19 in these areas, itis possible to make effective use of the space in the pixels, providingan effective means of increasing an aperture ratio.

Incidentally, all the transistors in FIG. 1 are P-channel transistors.Compared to N-channel transistors, P-channel transistors have more orless lower mobility, but they are preferable because they are moreresistant to voltage and degradation. However, the EL element accordingto the present invention is not limited to P-channel transistors and thepresent invention may employ N-channel transistors alone. Also, thepresent invention may employ both N-channel and P-channel transistors.

In FIG. 1, preferably the transistors 11 c and 11 b are n-channeltransistors of the same polarity while the transistors 11 a and 11 d arep-channel transistors. Generally, p-channel transistors are morereliable than p-channel transistors. They feature reduced kink current,etc. The use of p-channel transistors for the transistors 11 a has goodeffects on the EL elements 15 which obtain desired luminous intensity bycontrolling current.

Optimally, P-channel transistors should be used for all the transistors11 composing pixels as well as for the built-in gate driver circuit 12.By composing an array solely of P-channel transistors, it is possible toreduce the number of masks to 5, resulting in low costs and high yields.

The current-driven pixel configurations in FIG. 1 and the like allowpixel defects to be checked electrically. A checking method according tothe present invention will be described below. FIGS. 87 and 88 areexplanatory diagrams illustrating the checking method according to thepresent invention. With the pixel configuration in FIG. 87 (the pixelconfiguration in Figure is cited as an example), programming current Iwis applied to the source signal line 18. The programming current Iwranges from 1 μA to 10 μA. The driver transistor 11 a operates in such away as to pass a predetermined programming current Iw. That is, thepotential at the gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 achanges. The potential at the gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor11 a required to pass the predetermined programming current Iw isdenoted by Vt.

For example, to pass the current Iw through the driver transistor 11 aof a pixel, the potential at its gate (G) terminal must be lower thanthe Vdd voltage by Vt2 (solid line in FIG. 88). To pass the current Iwthrough the driver transistor 11 a of another pixel, the potential atits gate terminal must be lower than the Vdd voltage by Vt1 (dotted linein FIG. 88). These values of Vt, which correspond to changes in thepotential of the source signal line 18, represent characteristics of thedriver transistors 11 a of the pixels 16.

That is, the potential at the gate terminal of the driver transistor 11a of the selected pixel 16 becomes the potential of the source signalline 18. Since the current passed by a driver transistor 11 a isdetermined by adjusting the potential at the gate terminal of the drivertransistor 11 a, it is possible to measure characteristics of the drivertransistor 11 a by looking at the potential at the gate terminal of thedriver transistor 11 a. Also, defects which occur in the pixel 16 causethe source signal line 18 to output an abnormal potential. Thus, defectsand the like can be detected.

Apply a turn-on voltage to one gate signal line 17 a by controlling thegate drive circuit 12. That is, select pixel rows one by one in sequence(a turn-off voltage is applied to the other gate signal lines 17 a).Also, set the source signal line 18 to pass the current Iw. As a turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a, the gate terminal ofthe driver transistor 11 a of the selected pixel 16 assumes the Vtvoltage required to pass the predetermined current Iw.

Apply a turn-off voltage to the gate signal line 17 b. The applicationof the turn-off voltage turns off the transistor 11 d, cutting off thedriver transistor 11 a and EL element 15 from each other. Thus, thechecking method according to the present invention can be applied evento an array board on which EL elements 15 are yet to be formed.

In this way, as the location of the gate signal line 17 a to which aturn-on voltage is applied is shifted in sequence in sync with ahorizontal scanning period (1 H), the potential of the source signalline 18 changes as illustrated in FIG. 89 (see also FIG. 88). Thechanges are outputted in sync with 1 H. Incidentally, the use of 1 H isnot strictly necessary because what goes on here is checking rather thanimage display. Thus, 1 H is used for ease of explanation to meanselecting one pixel row in sequence. Any fixed period may be usedinstead of 1 H. That is, 1 H is a period during which the pixel row tobe checked is selected.

In the checking system (checking device, checking method) according tothe present invention, it may be apparent that two or more pixel rowsmay be selected simultaneously. This is because pixel defects and thelike can be detected if an abnormal output is sent to the source signalline 18 even if two or more pixel rows are selected simultaneously. Thecurrent outputted from the pixel 16 being checked is a minute current onthe order of μA. If short-circuit defects or the like occur in the pixel16, an output at least on the order of mA is sent to the source signalline 18. Thus, two or more pixel rows can be selected and checkedsimultaneously. In extreme cases, all the pixel rows in the display area50 can be selected and checked at once. Also, half the screen 50 may bechecked at a time.

FIG. 90 is a block diagram of a checking circuit used to perform thechecking method according to the present invention. A probe 997 isconnected to an electrode terminal 996 of each source signal line 18 andthe programming current Iw is applied to the source signal line 18. Theprogramming current Iw can be changed or adjusted with a referencevoltage circuit 991. A reference voltage Va from the reference voltagegenerator circuit 991 is inputted in the plus terminal (positiveterminal) of an operational amplifier 995. The operational amplifier 995composes a constant-current circuit in conjunction with a transistor 994and resistor Rm.

The programming current Iw is set to between 1 μA and 10 μA. Basically,use the maximum current needed to drive the panel. Alternatively, asmall current not larger than 100 nA may be used for measurement toexamine black writing mode (during black display).

The reference voltage Va outputted by the reference voltage circuit 991is applied to the plus terminal (positive terminal) of the operationalamplifier 995. The plus terminal and minus terminal of the operationalamplifier are at the same potential, and thus the same current Iw(=Va/Rm) that flows through the source signal line 18 flows through thetransistor 994. Consequently, a constant current Iw flows through allthe source signal lines 18. The current Iw can be changed easily bychanging the reference voltage Va.

Incidentally, although it is stated herein that the same current Iw ispassed through all the source signal lines 18, this is not restrictive.For example, checks may be run by passing different constant currentsthrough adjacent source signal lines 18. Also, the method of connectingthe probe 997 to the electrode 996 is not limited to the one describedabove. For example, they may be bonded by an ACF technique. Also, goldbumps or nickel bumps may be used for the connection.

Also, in the checking method according to the present invention,although it is stated herein that constant current Iw is passed throughthe source signal lines 18, this is not restrictive. For example,current (alternating current) having a rectangular waveform may be usedfor the checking. It is also possible to use two modes in combination: afirst mode in which voltage is applied to source signal lines 18 todetect a short circuit between adjacent source signal lines 18 and asecond mode in which constant current is passed through source signallines 18 to detect pixel defects. It is also possible to performchecking by applying signals (voltage or current) to the cathodeelectrode and anode electrode of an EL element 15 and detecting ormeasuring the signals by a source signal line 18.

With the configuration in FIG. 90, since the constant current Iw flowsthrough the source signal lines 18, the voltage (current) waveform inFIG. 89 can be measured by shifting the gate signal lines 17 a insequence. The voltage waveform is converted from analog voltage(current) to a digital signal by an input circuit 993 (which consists ofa high-input-impedance operational amplifier, analog input-selectorswitch, AD (analog-digital) converter circuit, etc.) and the resultingsignal is captured into data collection means and control means such asa personal computer (PC) 992.

The source signal lines 18, through which minute current flows, are in ahigh-impedance state. To measure changes (or their absolute values) inthe potential of the source signal lines 18 properly in this state, ahigh-impedance circuit (a positive input terminal of an inputoperational amplifier consisting of a FET circuit) is connected to eachsource signal line 18. That is, the probes 997 are electricallyconnected with the positive input circuits of the input operationalamplifiers (not shown) of the respective input circuits 993.

A QCIF panel has 176×RGB=528 source signal lines 18. It is difficult toplace AD converters on all the source signal lines 18. Thus, amultiplexer type analog switch (not shown) is placed on the output sideof the input operational amplifier of each input circuit 993. An ADconverter is placed at the output of the analog switch and data from theAD converter is captured into the PC 992. In FIG. 90, the high-impedancecircuit, analog switch, etc. are described as being components of theinput circuit 993.

FIG. 91 is a timing chart of a circuit (checking circuit) which measuresthe potential (voltage or current) of source signal lines 18. FIG. 91(a)shows changes in the potential (voltage or current) of the source signallines 18, where the changes are synchronized with 1 H. FIG. 91(b) showsthe potentials of gate signal lines 17 b. It can be seen that thelocation of the gate signal line to which a turn-on voltage is appliedis shifted every pixel row. In sync with the pixel row selection, thetransistor 11 a of the selected pixel row operates and the potential ofthe source signal lines 18 (FIG. 91(a)) changes.

FIG. 91(c) shows a data capture signal to data input means 992 (thissignal can also be viewed as an analog switch changeover signal in theinput circuit 993). Data is captured into the data input means 992 on arising edge of the data capture signal.

The PC 992 evaluates/judges values of the captured data. Also, itaccumulates the values of the data. Based on obtained results, defectstate, defect locations, defect mode, faulty conditions, etc. of thearray or panel are detected or checked.

With the pixel configuration in FIG. 87, when a turn-on voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 a and a turn-off voltage is appliedto the gate signal line 17 b, a current path is formed as follows: theVdd terminal→between the source and drain of the transistor 11a→transistor 11 c→the source signal line 18.

If a short circuit (referred to as an SD short or channel short) occursbetween the source terminal S and drain terminal D of the transistor 11a, the Vdd voltage is outputted to the source signal line 18 (the SDshort in FIG. 92(a)). Thus, the SD short (pixel defects) of thetransistor 11 a can be detected electrically.

Also, if the gate signal line 17 a is broken, no path is formed for theprogramming current Iw, and thus the potential of the source signal line18 becomes close to ground potential (see a broken gate signal line inFIG. 92(b)). Thus, wire defects such as a break in the gate signal line17 a can be detected (checked). Of course, there is no output if asource signal line is broken, and consequently, the break in the sourcesignal line 18 can be detected.

Also, with a turn-off voltage applied to all the gate signal lines 17 a,if an unusual voltage is outputted to the source signal line 18, it canbe detected that the transistor 11 c or 11 b of some pixel 16 isdefective. Also, the signal outputted to the source signal line 18varies with whether the Vdd voltage (anode voltage) is applied or theVdd terminal is opened. This makes it possible to check and examinedefects in the pixel 16 in detail. Regarding the cathode electrode,since the signal outputted to the source signal line 18 varies againwith signal applications, it is possible to detect defects in the pixel16.

Needless to say, it is also possible to detect defects in a pixel 16 byapplying a signal to the source signal line 18 and detecting a signaloutputted to the cathode electrode, conversely. Again, pixel rows can bescanned by selecting them one by one with a turn-on voltage.

While the pixel row selected by the gate driver circuit 12 is shifted insequence, the potential of the source signal line 18 is measuredsequentially in sync with the shift operation. The display panel (arrayboard 71) can be checked when the above operation is repeated from topto bottom of the screen 50 (checks on one pixel column are completed).

As illustrated in FIG. 93(a), by measuring the signal line potential ofthe source signal line 18 of a pixel column (the pixels 16 connected toone source signal line 18), it is possible to detect a maximum voltageVtmax (the maximum value of the Vt of the driver transistor 11 a of apixel 16 (see FIG. 88)) and minimum voltage Vtmin (the minimum value ofthe Vt of the driver transistor 11 a of a pixel 16 (see FIG. 88)). Ifthe difference between the maximum voltage and minimum voltage is equalto or larger than a predetermined value, the measured/checked array orpanel is judged to be non-conforming.

As illustrated in FIG. 93(b), by measuring Vt distribution in an arrayor panel, it is possible to determine characteristic distribution of thetransistors 11 a. The standard deviation and average value of the Vt canbe calculated from the characteristic distribution. Also, when thestandard deviation or average value of the Vt falls outside apredetermined range, the measured/checked array or panel is judged to benon-conforming.

The checking method according to the present invention checks pixels 16by controlling the gate driver circuit 12, thereby applying a turn-onvoltage to at least one gate signal line 17 a, and thereby passingprogramming current through the source signal line 18.

Incidentally, although it has been stated in the above example that theVt outputted to the source signal line 18 is measured or checked byselecting pixel rows one by one, this is not restrictive. Two or morepixel rows may be selected simultaneously. It is also possible to checkodd-numbered pixels 16 in sequence first by selecting odd-numbered pixelrows in sequence and then check even-numbered pixels 16 in sequence byselecting even-numbered pixel rows in sequence. Pixel defects (brokengate signal lines, SD shorts, etc.) can also be detected in this way asillustrated in FIG. 92.

To speed up checking, a plurality of gate signal lines 18 can beselected, approximate defect locations and defect mode can be detected,and then a turn-on voltage can be applied to each gate signal line 17 ain a portion having defects in sequence to identify the defect locationsand defect state.

The checking method according to the present invention does not requirethat all the source signal lines 18 should be probed at once. Forexample, the checking method according to the present invention may beperformed by connecting probes 997 to the terminal electrodes 996 of theodd-numbered source signal lines 18 a with the even-numbered sourcesignal lines 18 b kept open, and then by connecting probes 997 to theterminal electrodes 996 of the even-numbered source signal lines 18 awith the odd-numbered source signal lines 18 b kept open.

Of course, every fourth pixel column may be probed by shifting insequence.

Incidentally, although the gate driver circuit 12 in FIG. 90 and thelike is a built in type (other than an external semiconductor chip),this is not restrictive. The gate driver IC 12 may be constructed of asemiconductor chip and mounted on the gate signal lines 17 using a COGprocess.

Although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 90 that voltage isapplied to the source signal lines 18 via the probes 997, this is notrestrictive. Once the source driver IC 14 has been mounted on the board71, constant current may be applied to the source signal lines 18 byoperating the source driver IC 14. Voltage changes caused by theconstant current are measured in the input circuits 993.

The checking system with the pixel configuration in FIG. 87 has beendescribed in the above example. However, the present invention is notlimited to this and the checking system according to the presentinvention can also be implemented with another pixel configuration (FIG.38 or the like).

As described above, the checking system (checking device, checkingmethod) according to the present invention relates to an EL displayapparatus or an array board 71 used in the EL display apparatus. Thechecking system performs checking by applying a selection voltage to agate signal line 17 a which selects a pixel 16 and thereby connectingthe driver transistor 11 a of the pixel to a source signal line 18.Also, by applying a signal such as a voltage (or current) to a terminal(signal line) such as a cathode or anode electrode which receivesexternal inputs, the checking system detects whether the signal isoutputted from the source signal line 18. Basically, it performschecking by applying a constant current to the source signal lines 18.Also, it selects and scans the gate signal lines 17 a in sequence.

Preferably, in the display panel, the source driver circuit 14 is notformed directly on the array board 71. This will ease checking.Preferably, checking is performed before sealing glass (sealing lid) isinstalled after EL elements 15 are formed on the array board 71. Thiswill reduce the cost of discarding non-conforming panels.

To facilitate understanding, the configuration of the EL element in FIG.1 will be described below with reference to FIG. 3. The EL elementaccording to the present invention is controlled using two timings. Thefirst timing is the one when required current values are stored. Turningon the transistor 11 b and transistor 11 c with this timing provides anequivalent circuit shown in FIG. 3(a). A predetermined current Iw isapplied from signal lines. This makes the gate and drain of thetransistor 11 a connected, allowing the current Iw to flow through thetransistor 11 a and transistor 11 c. Thus, the gate-source voltage ofthe transistor 11 a is such that allows I1 to flow.

The second timing is the one when the transistor 11 a and transistor 11c are closed and the transistor 11 d is opened. The equivalent circuitavailable at this time is shown in FIG. 3(b). The source-gate voltage ofthe transistor 11 a is maintained. In this case, since the transistor 11a always operates in a saturation region, the current Iw remainsconstant.

Display results of this operation are shown in FIG. 5. Specifically,reference numeral 51 a in FIG. 5(a) denotes a pixel (row) (write pixelrow) programmed with current at a certain time point in a display screen50. The pixel row 51 a is non-illuminated (non-display pixel (row)) asillustrated in FIG. 5(b). Other pixels (rows) are display pixels (rows)53 (current flows through the EL elements 15 of the non-pixels 53,causing the EL elements 15 to emit light).

In the pixel configuration in FIG. 1, the programming current Iw flowsthrough the source signal line 18 during current programming as shown inFIG. 3(a). The current Iw flows through the transistor 11 a and voltageis set (programmed) in the capacitor 19 in such a way as to maintain thecurrent Iw. At this time, the transistor 11 d is open (off).

During a period when the current flows through the EL element 15, thetransistors 11 c and 11 b turn off and the transistor 11 d turns on asshown in FIG. 3(b). Specifically, a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied tothe gate signal line 17 a, turning off the transistors 11 b and 11 c. Onthe other hand, a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signalline 17 b, turning on the transistor 11 d.

A timing chart is shown in FIG. 4. The subscripts in brackets in FIG. 4(e.g., (1)) indicate pixel row numbers. Specifically, a gate signal line17 a(1) denotes a gate signal line 17 a in a pixel row (1). Also, *H(where “*” is an arbitrary symbol or numeral and indicates a horizontalscanning line number) in the top row in FIG. 4 indicates a horizontalscanning period. Specifically, 1 H is a first horizontal scanningperiod. Incidentally, the items (1 H number, 1-H cycle, order of pixelrow numbers, etc.) described above are intended to facilitateexplanation and are not intended to be restrictive.

As can be seen from FIG. 4, in each selected pixel row (it is assumedthat the selection period is 1 H), when a turn-on voltage is applied tothe gate signal line 17 a, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 b. During this period, no current flows through the ELelement 15 (non-illuminated). In non-selected pixel rows, a turn-offvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a and a turn-on voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 b. During this period, a currentflows through the EL element 15 (illuminated).

Incidentally, the gate of the transistor 11 a and gate of the transistor11 c are connected to the same gate signal line 11 a. However, the gateof the transistor 11 a and gate of the transistor 11 c may be connectedto different gate signal lines 17 (see FIG. 32). Then, one pixel willhave three gate signal lines (gate signal lines 17 a, 17 b, and 17 c)(two gate signal lines 17 a and 17 b in the configuration in FIG. 1). Bycontrolling ON/OFF timing of the gate of the transistor 11 b and ON/OFFtiming of the gate of the transistor 11 c separately, it is possible tofurther reduce variations in the current value of the EL element 15 dueto variations in the transistor 11 a.

By sharing the gate signal line 17 a and gate signal line 17 b and usingdifferent conductivity types (N-channel and P-channel) for thetransistors 11 c and lid, it is possible to simplify the drive circuitand improve the aperture ratio of pixels.

With this configuration, a write paths from signal lines are turned offaccording to operation timing of the present invention That is, when apredetermined current is stored, an accurate current value is not storedin a capacitance (capacitor) between the source (S) and gate (G) of thetransistor 11 a if a current path is branched. By using differentconductivity types for the transistors 11 c and lid and controllingtheir thresholds, it is possible to ensure that when scanning lines areswitched, the transistor 11 d is turned on after the transistor 11 c isturned off.

Incidentally, although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 1 thatthe gate signal lines 17 a are controlled by the gate driver circuit 12a (an example of the second gate driver circuit according to the presentinvention) and that the gate signal lines 17 b are controlled by thegate driver circuit 12 b (an example of the first gate driver circuitaccording to the present invention), this is not restrictive and,needless to say, the gate signal lines 17 a and 17 b may be controlledby a single gate driver circuit 12. This also applies to the examplesdescribed below.

In that case, however, since the thresholds of the transistors must becontrolled accurately, it is necessary to pay attention to processes.The circuit described above can be implemented using four transistors atthe minimum, but even if more than four transistors including atransistor 11 e are cascaded for more accurate timing control or forreduction of mirror effect (described later), the principle of operationis the same. By adding the transistor 11 e, it is possible to deliverprogramming current to the EL element 15 more precisely via thetransistor 11 c.

Referring to FIG. 2, a predetermined voltage is applied to the gateterminal of transistor 11 e to put the transistor 11 e in a lowactivation state. This configuration makes it possible to pass minutecurrent from the driver transistor 11 a through the EL element 15accurately. Also, by controlling the voltage applied to the gateterminal of the transistor 11 e (applied to the gate signal line 11 f),it is possible to vary conditions of current output from the drivertransistor 11 a. Incidentally, the same voltage as the voltage appliedto the gate signal line 17 f is applied to the pixels in the displayarea. Of course, it is possible to form a gate driver circuit 12, whichdrives the gate signal line 17 f, and apply an ac signal to the gatesignal line 17 f by operating the gate driver circuit 12.

Incidentally, gate signal line 17 a, gate signal line 17 b, and gatesignal line 1 f may be driven by different gate driver circuits or by asingle gate driver circuit 12 as shown in FIG. 2. The other part of theconfiguration is the same as that shown in FIG. 1, and thus descriptionthereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, the pixel configuration is not limited to those shown inFIGS. 1 and 2. For example, pixels may be configured as shown in FIG.63. FIG. 63 lacks the switching element 11 d unlike the configuration inFIG. 1. Instead, a changeover switch 631 is formed or placed. The switch11 d in FIG. 1 functions to turn on and off (pass and shut off) thecurrent delivered from the driver transistor 11 a to the EL element 15.As also described in subsequent examples, the on/off control function ofthe transistor 11 d constitutes an important part of the presentinvention. The configuration in FIG. 63 achieves the on/off functionwithout using the transistor 11 d.

In FIG. 63, a terminal a of the changeover switch 631 is connected toanode voltage Vdd. Incidentally, the voltage applied to the terminal ais not limited to the anode voltage Vdd. It may be any voltage that canturn off the current flowing through the EL element 15.

A terminal b of the changeover switch 631 is connected to cathodevoltage (indicated as ground in FIG. 63). Incidentally, the voltageapplied to the terminal b is not limited to the cathode voltage. It maybe any voltage that can turn on the current flowing through the ELelement 15.

A terminal c of the changeover switch 631 is connected with a cathodeterminal of the EL element 15. Incidentally, the changeover switch 631may be of any type as long as it has a capability to turn on and off thecurrent flowing through the EL element 15. Thus, its installationlocation is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 63 and the switch maybe located anywhere on the path through which current is delivered tothe EL element 15. Also, the switch is not limited by its functionalityas long as the switch can turn on and off the current flowing throughthe EL element 15.

Also, the term “off” here does not mean a state in which no currentflows, but it means a state in which the current flowing through the ELelement 15 is reduced to below normal. The items mentioned above alsoapply to other configurations of the present invention.

The changeover switch 631 will require no explanation because it can beimplemented easily by a combination of P-channel and N-channeltransistors. For example, it can be implemented by two circuits ofanalog switches. Of course, the switch 631 can be constructed of onlyP-channel or N-channel transistors because it only turns off the currentflowing through the EL element 15.

When the switch 631 is connected to the terminal a, the Vdd voltage isapplied to the cathode terminal of the EL element 15. Thus, current doesnot flow through the EL element 15 regardless of the voltage state ofvoltage held by the gate terminal G of the driver transistor 11 a.Consequently, the EL element 15 is non-illuminated.

When the switch 631 is connected to the terminal b, the GND voltage isapplied to the cathode terminal of the EL element 15. Thus, currentflows through the EL element 15 according to the state of voltage heldby the gate terminal G of the driver transistor 11 a. Consequently, theEL element 15 is illuminated.

Thus, in the pixel configuration shown in FIG. 63, no switchingtransistor 11 d is formed between the driver transistor 11 a and the ELelement 15. However, it is possible to control the illumination of theEL element 15 by controlling the switch 631.

In the pixel configurations shown in FIGS. 1, 2, etc., one pixelcontains one driver transistor 11 a. However, the present invention isnot limited to this and one pixel may contain two or more drivertransistors 11 a. An example is shown in FIG. 64. In FIG. 63, one pixelcontains two driver transistors 11 a 1 and 11 a 2, whose gate terminalsare connected to a common capacitor 19. By using a plurality of drivertransistors 11 a, it is possible to reduce variations in programmingcurrent. The other part of the configuration is the same as those shownin FIG. 1 and the like, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 1 and 2, the current outputted by the driver transistor 11 a ispassed through the EL element 15 and turned on and off by the switchingelement 11 d formed between the driver transistor 11 a and the ELelement 15. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Forexample, another configuration is illustrated in FIG. 65.

In the example shown in FIG. 65, the current delivered to the EL element15 is controlled by the driver transistor 11 a. The current flowingthrough the EL element 15 is turned on and off by the switching element11 d placed between the Vdd terminal and EL element 15. Thus, accordingto the present invention, the switching element 11 d may be placedanywhere as long as it can control the current flowing through the ELelement 15.

Variations in the characteristics of the transistor 11 a are correlatedto the transistor size. To reduce the variations in the characteristics,preferably the channel length of the first transistor 11 a is from 5 μmto 100 μm (both inclusive). More preferably, it is from 10 μm to 50 μm(both inclusive). This is probably because a long channel length Lincreases grain boundaries contained in the channel, reducing electricfields, and thereby suppressing kink effect.

Preferably, the transistors 11 of the pixels are polysilicon transistorsformed by laser recrystallization (laser annealing) and the channeldirections of all the transistors coincide with the direction of laseremission. In particular, it is preferable that the direction of laseremission coincides with the formation direction of the source signallines 14. This will make the characteristics of the driver transistors11 a along the source signal lines 14 uniform and reduce amplitudefluctuations of the source signal lines 14 during current programming.Reduced amplitudes make it possible to perform current programmingaccurately.

An object of the present invention is to propose a circuit configurationin which variations in transistor characteristics do not affect display.Four or more transistors are required for that. When determining circuitconstants using transistor characteristics, it is difficult to determineappropriate circuit constants unless the characteristics of the fourtransistors are not consistent. Both thresholds of transistorcharacteristics and mobility of the transistors vary depending onwhether the channel direction is horizontal or vertical with respect tothe longitudinal axis of laser irradiation.

Incidentally, variations are more of the same in both cases. However,the mobility and average threshold vary between the horizontal directionand vertical direction. Thus, it is desirable that all the transistorsin a pixel have the same channel direction.

Also, if the capacitance value of the storage capacitance 19 is Cs andthe turn-off current value of the second transistor 11 b is Ioff,preferably the following equation is satisfied.3<Cs/Ioff<24

More preferably the following equation is satisfied.6<Cs/Ioff<18

By setting the turn-off current of the transistor 11 b to 5 pA or less,it is possible to reduce changes in the current flowing through the ELto 2% or less. This is because when leakage current increases, electriccharges stored between the gate and source (across the capacitor) cannotbe held for one field with no voltage applied. Thus, the larger thestorage capacity of the capacitor 19, the larger the permissible amountof the turn-off current. By satisfying the above equation, it ispossible to reduce fluctuations in current values between adjacentpixels to 2% or less.

Also, preferably transistors composing an active matrix are p-channelpolysilicon thin-film transistors and the transistor 11 b is a dual-gateor multi-gate transistor. More preferably, the transistor has three ormore gates. Unless the transistor 11 b has good turn-offcharacteristics, the capacitor 19 cannot hold electric charges. Thiswill cause excessive brightness resulting in a whitish screen.

As high an ON/OFF ratio as possible is required of the transistor 11 b,which acts as a source-drain switch for the transistor 11 a. By using adual-gate or multi-gate structure for the transistor 11 b, it ispossible to achieve a high ON/OFF ratio.

The semiconductor films composing the transistors 11 in the pixel 16 aregenerally formed by laser annealing in low-temperature polysilicontechnology. Variations in laser annealing conditions result invariations in transistor 11 characteristics. However, if thecharacteristics of the transistors 11 in the pixel 16 are consistent, itis possible to drive the pixel using current programming such as the oneshown in FIG. 1 so that a predetermined current will flow through the ELelement 15. This is an advantage lacked by voltage programming.Preferably the laser used is an excimer laser.

Incidentally, the formation of the semiconductor film of the transistor11 according to the present invention is not limited to the laserannealing method. The present invention may also use a heat annealingmethod and a method which involves solid-phase (CGS) growth. Besides,the present invention is not limited to the low-temperature polysilicontechnology and may use high-temperature polysilicon technology. Also,the semiconductor films may be formed by performing doping and diffusionon a silicon substrate. Also, the semiconductor films may be formed oforganic material.

The present invention moves a laser spot (laser irradiation range) 72 inparallel to the source signal line 18 as shown in FIG. 7. Also, thelaser spot 72 is moved in such a way as to align with one pixel row. Ofcourse, the number of pixel rows is not limited to one. For example,laser may be shot by treating RGB in FIG. 72 (three pixel columns inthis case) as a single pixel 16. Also, laser maybe directed at two ormore pixels at a time. Needless to say, moving laser irradiation rangesmay overlap (it is usual for moving laser irradiation ranges tooverlap).

Pixels are constructed in such a way that three pixels of RGB will forma square shape. Thus, each of the R, G, B pixels has oblong shape.Consequently, by performing annealing using an oblong laser spot 72, itis possible to eliminate variations in the characteristics of thetransistors 11 within each pixel. Also, the characteristics (mobility,Vt, S value, etc.) of the transistors 11 connected to the same sourcesignal line 18 can be made uniform (i.e., although the transistors 11connected to adjacent source signal lines 18 may differ incharacteristics, the characteristics of the transistors 11 connected tothe same source signal line can be made almost equal).

Generally, the laser spot 72 has a fixed length such as 10 inches. Sincethe laser spot 72 is moved, the panels must be placed in such a way thatthey can fit in a range in which the laser spot 72 can be moved (i.e.,in such a way that laser spots 72 will not overlap in the center of apanel's display area 50).

In the configuration shown in FIG. 7, three panels are placed lengthwisewithin the length of the laser spot 72. An annealing apparatus whichemits the laser spot 72 recognizes positioning markers 73 a and 73 b ona glass substrate 74 (automatic positioning based on patternrecognition) and moves the laser spot 72. The positioning markers 73 arerecognized by a pattern recognition apparatus. The annealing apparatus(not shown) recognizes the positioning markers 73 and determines thelocation of the pixel column (makes the laser irradiation range 72parallel to the source signal line 18). It emits the laser spot 72 insuch a way as to overlap with the location of each pixel column forsequential annealing.

Preferably, the laser annealing method (which involves emitting a linearlaser spot in parallel to the source signal line 18) described withreference to FIG. 7 is used for current programming of an organic ELdisplay panel, in particular. This is because the transistors 11 placedin the direction parallel to the source signal line have the samecharacteristics (the characteristics of the pixel transistors adjacentin the longitudinal direction are quite similar to each other). Thisreduces changes in the voltage level of the source signal lines when thepixels are driven by current, and thus reduces the chances ofinsufficient write current.

For example, in the case of white raster display, since almost the samecurrent is passed through the transistors 11 a in adjacent pixels, thecurrent outputted from the source driver IC 14 does not have significantamplitude changes. If the transistors 11 a in FIG. 1 have the samecharacteristics and the currents used for current programming of pixelshave the same value within the pixel column, the potential of the sourcesignal line 18 during the current programming is constant. Thus, nopotential fluctuation occurs in the source signal line 18. If thetransistors 11 a connected to the same source signal line 18 have almostthe same characteristics, there should be no significant potentialfluctuation in the source signal line 18. This is also true to othercurrent-programmable pixel configurations such as the one shown in FIG.38 (thus, it is preferable to use the manufacturing method shown in FIG.7).

A method which involves programming two or more pixel rowssimultaneously and which are described with reference to FIGS. 27, 30,etc. can achieve a uniform image display (because the method is notprone to display irregularities due mainly to variations in transistorcharacteristics). In the case of FIG. 27, etc., since a plurality ofpixel rows are selected simultaneously, if the transistors in adjacentpixel rows are uniform, irregularities in the characteristics of thetransistors placed in the lengthwise direction can be absorbed by thedriver circuit 14.

Incidentally, although an IC chip is illustrated in FIG. 7 as beingstacked on the source driver circuit 14, this is not restrictive and itgoes without saying that the source driver circuit 14 may be formed inthe same process as the pixel 16.

The present invention, in particular, ensures that a voltage thresholdVth2 of the driver transistor 11 b will not fall below a voltagethreshold Vth1 of the corresponding driver transistor 11 a in the pixel.For example, gate length L2 of the transistor 11 b is made longer thangate length L1 of the transistor 11 a so that Vth2 will not fall belowVth1 even if process parameters of these thin-film transistors change.This makes it possible to suppress subtle current leakage.

Incidentally, the items mentioned above also apply to pixelconfiguration of a current mirror shown in FIG. 38. The pixel in FIG. 38consists of a driver transistor 11 a through which a signal currentflows, a driver transistor 11 b which controls drive current flowingthrough a light-emitting element such as an EL element 15, a transistor11 c which connects or disconnects a pixel circuit and data line “data”by controlling a gate signal line 17 a 1, a switching transistor 11 dwhich shorts the gate and drain of the transistor 1 a during a writeperiod by controlling a gate signal line 17 a 2, a capacitance C19 whichholds gate-source voltage of the transistor 11 a after application ofvoltage, the EL element 15 serving as a light-emitting element, etc.

In FIG. 38, the transistors 11 c and lid are N-channel transistors andother transistors are P-channel transistors, but this is only exemplaryand are not restrictive. A capacitance Cs has its one end connected tothe gate of the transistor 11 a, and the other end to Vdd (power supplypotential), but it may be connected to any fixed potential instead ofVdd. The cathode (negative pole) of the EL element 15 is connected tothe ground potential.

Next, the EL display panel or EL display apparatus of the presentinvention will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram whichmainly illustrates a circuit of the EL display apparatus. Pixels 16 arearranged or formed in a matrix. Each pixel 16 is connected with a sourcedriver circuit 14 which outputs current for use in current programmingof the pixel. In an output stage of the source driver circuit 14 arecurrent mirror circuits (described later) corresponding to the bit countof a video signal. For example, if 64 gradations are used, 63 currentmirror circuits are formed on respective source signal lines so as toapply desired current to the source signal lines 18 when an appropriatenumber of current mirror circuits is selected.

Incidentally, the minimum output current of one current mirror circuitis from 10 nA to 50 nA (both inclusive). Preferably, the minimum outputcurrent of the current mirror circuit should be from 15 nA to 35 nA(both inclusive) to secure accuracy of the transistors composing thecurrent mirror circuit in the driver IC 14.

Besides, a precharge or discharge circuit is incorporated to charge ordischarge the source signal line 18 forcibly. Preferably, voltage(current) output values of the precharge or discharge circuit whichcharges or discharges the source signal line 18 forcibly can be setseparately for R, G, and B. This is because the thresholds of the ELelement 15 differ among R, G, and B.

Organic EL elements are known to have heavy temperature dependence(temperature characteristics). To adjust changes in emission brightnesscaused by the temperature characteristics, reference current is made inan analog fashion by adding nonlinear elements such as thermistors orposistors to the current mirror circuits to vary output current andadjusting the changes due to the temperature characteristics with thethermistors or the like.

According to the present invention, the source driver circuit 14 is madeof a semiconductor silicon chip and connected with a terminal on thesource signal line 18 of the board 71 by glass-on-chip (COG) technology.Metals such as chromium, copper, aluminum, and silver are used forwiring of signal lines such as the source signal lines 18. These metalsprovide low resistance with thin wiring width. If pixels are areflective type, preferably the wiring is formed of the same material asreflecting films simultaneously with the reflecting films. This willsimplify production processes.

The source driver circuit 14 can be mounted not only by the COGtechnology. It is also possible to mount the source driver circuit 14 bychip-on-film (COF) technology and connect it to the signal lines of thedisplay panel. Regarding the driver IC, it may be made of three chips byconstructing a power supply IC 82 separately.

On the other hand, the gate driver circuit 12 is formed bylow-temperature polysilicon technology. That is, it is formed in thesame process as the transistors in pixels. This is because the gatedriver circuit 12 has a simpler internal structure and lower operatingfrequency than the source driver circuit 14. Thus, it can be formedeasily even by low-temperature polysilicon technology and allows bezelwidth to be reduced. Of course, it is possible to construct the gatedriver circuit 12 from a silicon chip and mount it on the board 71 usingthe COG technology. Also, switching elements such as pixel transistorsas well as gate drivers may be formed by high-temperature polysilicontechnology or may be formed of an organic material (organictransistors).

The gate driver circuit 12 incorporates a shift register circuit 61 afor a gate signal line 17 a and a shift register circuit 61 b for a gatesignal line 17 b. The shift register circuits 61 are controlled bypositive-phase and negative-phase clock signals (CLKxP and CLKxN) and astart pulse (STx). Besides, it is preferable to add an enable (ENABL)signal which controls output and non-output from the gate signal lineand an up-down (UPDWN) signal which turns a shift direction upside down.Also, it is preferable to install an output terminal to ensure that thestart pulse is shifted by the shift register and is outputted.Incidentally, shift timings of the shift registers are controlled by acontrol signal from a control IC 81. Also, the gate driver circuit 12incorporates a level shift circuit which level-shifts external data. Italso incorporates a checking circuit.

Since the shift register circuits 61 have small buffer capacity, theycannot drive the gate signal lines 17 directly. Therefore, at least twoor more inverter circuits 62 are formed between each shift registercircuit 61 and an output gate 63 which drives the gate signal line 17.

The same applies to cases in which the source driver circuit 14 isformed on the board 71 by polysilicon technology such as low-temperaturepolysilicon technology. A plurality of inverter circuits are formedbetween an analog switching gate such as a transfer gate which drivesthe source signal line 18 and the shift register of the source drivercircuit 14. The following matters (shift register output and outputstages which drive signal lines (inverter circuits placed between outputstages such as output gates or transfer gates) are common to the gatedriver circuit and source driver circuit.

For example, although the output from the source driver circuit 14 isshown in FIG. 6 as being connected directly to the source signal line18, actually the output from the shift register of the source driver isconnected with multiple stages of inverter circuits, and the inverteroutputs are connected to analog switching gates such as transfer gates.

The inverter circuit 62 consists of a P-channel MOS transistor andN-channel MOS transistor. As described earlier, the shift registercircuit 61 of the gate driver circuit 12 has its output end connectedwith multiple stages of inverter circuits 62 and the final output isconnected to the output gate 63. Incidentally, the inverter circuit 62may be composed solely of P-channel MOS transistors or N-channel MOStransistors.

The shift register circuit 61 a of the gate driver circuit 12 controlscontrol signals for the gate signal lines 17 a while the shift registercircuit 61 b controls control signals for the gate signal lines 17 b. Anoutput buffer 63 is formed or placed in the output stage of the inverter62. Incidentally, the buffer and the like are formed on the array board71 using low-temperature polysilicon process technology.

As illustrated in FIG. 74, an output buffer circuit 341 a of the gatesignal line 17 a is larger than an output buffer circuit 341 b of thegate signal line 17 b. Preferably, wiring resistance of the gate signalline 17 a is lower than wiring resistance of the gate signal line 17 b.This is because by making a time constant of the gate signal line 17 asufficiently short, it is possible to improve accuracy of writingcurrent.

FIG. 111 is a block diagram of the gate driver circuit 12 according tothe present invention. Incidentally, the gate driver circuit 12 in FIG.6 is a CMOS type which uses both n-channel and p-channel transistors.The gate driver circuit 12 in FIG. 111 uses only p-channel transistors.Although only four stages are shown in FIG. 111 for ease of explanation,basically there are formed or disposed as many unit gate output circuits1111 as there are gate signal lines 17.

As illustrated in FIG. 111, the gate driver circuits 12 (12 a and 12 b)according to the present invention comprise signal terminals: four clockterminals (SCK0, SCK1, SCK2, and SCK3), one start terminal (data signalSSTA), and two inverting terminals (DIRA and DIRB which apply signals180 degrees out of phase with each other) which turn a shift directionupside down. They also comprise power supply terminals, including an Lpower supply terminal (VBB) and H power supply terminal (Vd).

Since only p-channel transistors are used for the gate driver circuits12 in FIG. 111, no level shifter circuit (circuit used to convert a lowvoltage logic signal into a high voltage logic signal) can beincorporated into the gate driver circuits 12. Thus, a level shiftercircuit is placed or formed in the power supply circuit (IC) 82 shown inFIG. 8 and the like.

If the pixels 16 are constructed of P-channel transistors, they willmatch well with the gate driver circuits 12 which employ P-channeltransistors shown in FIG. 111, etc. The P-channel transistors (thetransistors 11 b and 11 c and transistor 11 d in the configuration inFIG. 1) turn on when the voltage becomes low. On the other hand, thelower voltage serves as the selection voltage for the gate drivercircuits 12 as well. Gate drivers with P-channel achieve good matchingif the lower level is used as the selection level as can be seen from aconfiguration in FIG. 113. This is because the lower level cannot bemaintained for a long time. On the other hand, the higher voltage can bemaintained for a long time.

Also, by using P-channel for the driver transistors (transistor 11 a inFIG. 1) which supply current to the EL element 15, it is possible to usea solid electrode made of thin metal film as the cathode of the ELelements 15. Also, current can be passed from the anode potential Vdd tothe EL elements 15 in the forward direction. In view of the abovecircumstances, it is preferable that the transistors in the pixels 16and gate driver circuits 12 are P-channel. Thus, the use of P-channeltransistors as the transistors (driver transistors and itchingtransistors) in the pixels 16 and gate driver circuits 12 according tothe present invention is not merely a design matter.

The level shifter (LS) circuit may be formed directly on the array board71. That is, N-channel and P-channel transistors are used for the levelshifter (LS) circuit. A logic signal from a controller (not shown) isboosted by the level shifter circuit formed directly on the array board71 so that it will match the logic level of the gate driver circuits 12constructed from a P-channel transistor. The boosted logic voltage isapplied to the gate driver circuits 12.

For ease of explanation, the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 is employedin the example of the present invention. However, the technical idea ofthe present invention which involves the use of P-channel transistors asselection transistors (transistor 11 c in FIG. 1) of pixels 16 and forgate driver circuits 12 is not limited to the pixel configuration inFIG. 1. Needless to say, for example, it is also applicable to thecurrent-mirror pixel configuration illustrated in FIGS. 38 and 50 in thecase of current-driven pixel configuration. Also, it is applicable totwo transistors (selection transistor is transistor 11 b and drivertransistor is transistor 11 a) such as those illustrated in FIG. 62 inthe case of voltage-driven pixel configuration. Also, needless to say,it is applicable to the pixel configuration which employs fourtransistors (selection transistors 11 c and driver transistors 11 a) asillustrated in FIG. 51. The configuration of the gate driver circuits 12described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 113 is also applicable tocurrent-driven pixel configurations. Thus, the items described above orbelow are not limited to pixel configurations and the like.

Also, the configuration in which p-channel transistors are used asselection transistors of pixels 16 and for gate driver circuits is notlimited to organic EL or other self-luminous devices (display panels ordisplay apparatus) For example, it is also applicable to liquid crystaldisplay panels.

The inverting terminals (DIRA and DIRB) apply common signals to all theunit gate output circuits 1111. As can be seen from an equivalentcircuit diagram in FIG. 113, the inverting terminals (DIRA and DIRB) arefed signals of opposite polarity. To reverse the scan direction of theshift register, the polarity of the signal applied to the invertingterminals (DIRA and DIRB) is reversed.

Incidentally, the circuit configuration in FIG. 111 contains four clocksignal lines. Four is the optimum number according to the presentinvention. However, this is not restrictive and the present inventionmay use less than or more than four clock signal lines.

The clock signals (SCK0, SCK1, SCK2, and SCK3) are fed differentlybetween adjacent unit gate output circuits 1111. For example, in theunit gate output circuit 1111 a, OC is fed by the clock terminal SCK0while RST is fed by the clock terminal SCK2. This is also the case withthe unit gate output circuit 1111 c. However, in the unit gate outputcircuit 1111 b (the unit gate output circuit in the next stage) adjacentto the unit gate output circuit 1111 a, OC is fed by the clock terminalSCK1 while RST is fed by the clock terminal SCK3. In this way, everyother unit gate output circuit 1111 is fed by clock terminals in adifferent manner: OC is fed by SCK0 and RST is fed by SCK2, OC is fed bySCK1 and RST is fed by SCK3 in the next stage, OC is fed by SCK0 and RSTis fed by SCK2 in the next stage, and so on.

FIG. 113 shows a circuit configuration of the unit gate output circuit1111, which uses only P-channel transistors. FIG. 114 is a timing chartfor use to explain the circuit configuration of FIG. 113. FIG. 112 is atiming chart of multiple stages in FIG. 113. Thus, by understanding FIG.113, it is possible to understand overall operation. Rather than beingexplained in text, the operation can be understood with reference to thetiming chart in FIG. 114 in conjunction with the equivalent circuitdiagram in FIG. 113, and thus detailed description of transistoroperation will be omitted.

When driver circuits are built solely of P-channel transistors, it isbasically difficult to maintain the output voltage of the gate signallines 17 at an H level (Vd voltage in FIG. 113). It is also difficult tomaintain them at an L level (VBB voltage in FIG. 113) for a long periodof time, but they can be kept adequately at the H level for a shortperiod such as during selection of a pixel row. A signal fed to an INterminal and the SCK clock fed to the RST terminal invert the state ofn1 with respect to n2. Although n2 and n4 have potentials of the samepolarity, the SCK clock fed to the OC terminal lowers the potentiallevel of n4 further. In contrast, a Q terminal is kept at the L levelfor the same period (a turn-on voltage is output from the gate signalline 17). A signal outputted to an SQ terminal or the Q terminal istransferred to the unit gate output circuit 1111 in the next stage.

In the circuit configuration in FIGS. 111 and 113, by controlling the IN(INA and INb) terminals and the timings of signal application to clockterminals, it is possible to two modes using the same circuitconfiguration: a mode in which one gate signal line 17 is selected asshown in FIG. 165(a) and a mode in which two gate signal lines 17 areselected as shown in FIG. 165(b). In the selection-side gate drivercircuit 12 a, FIG. 165(a) shows a drive mode in which pixel rows areselected one (51 a) at a time (normal driving) shifting on a row-by-rowbasis. FIG. 165(b) shows a configuration in which two pixel rows areselected at a time. This drive mode corresponds to the driving forsimultaneous selection of multiple pixel rows (51 a and 51 b) describedwith reference to FIG. 24 etc. (configuration in which a dummy pixel rowis used). Two adjacent rows are selected at a time shifting on arow-by-row basis.

According to the drive method in FIG. 165(b), while the pixel row (51 a)holds final video, the pixel row 51 b is precharged. This makes thepixel 16 easier to write into. That is, the present invention can switchbetween two drive modes by manipulating signals applied to terminals.

Incidentally, although 165(b) shows a mode in which adjacent rows ofpixels are selected, it is also possible to select rows of pixels otherthan adjacent pixel rows as shown in FIG. 123. In the configurationshown in FIG. 113, pixel rows are controlled in sets of four. Out offour pixel rows, it is possible to determine whether to select one pixelrow or two consecutive pixel rows. The number of pixel rows in each setis restricted by the number of clocks (SCK), which is four in this case.If eight clocks (SCK) are used, pixel rows can be controlled in sets ofeight. Thus, as can be seen also from the configuration in FIG. 113,pixel rows can be selected as illustrated in FIG. 168.

In FIG. 168(a), one pixel row can be selected from a set of four pixelrows (whether to select one pixel row or no pixel row from a set of fourpixel rows depends on input state and shift state of IN data). In FIG.168(b), two pixel rows can be selected from a set of four pixel rows(whether to select two pixel rows or no pixel row from a set of fourpixel rows depends on input state and shift state of IN data) Accordingto the present invention, pixel rows equal in number as a clock countmake a set, and one pixel row or pixel rows no larger in number thanhalf the pixel rows in each set are selected (for example, two pixelrows (=4/2) are selected if four pixel rows make a set). Thus, there arealways non-selected pixel rows in each set of pixel rows.

When one pixel row is selected as shown in FIG. 165(a), the programmingcurrent Iw flows through one pixel 16 as illustrated in FIG. 167(a). Theprogramming current Iw is written into the pixel 16, being divided intotwo pixel rows as illustrated in FIG. 167(b). However, this is notrestrictive. For example, the same current may be passed through twoselected pixels (16 a and 16 b) by applying a current twice as large asthe programming current Iw as illustrated in FIG. 167(b).

Operation of the selection-side gate driver circuit 12 a is shown inFIG. 165. In FIG. 165(a), pixel rows are selected one at a time byshifting one by one in sync with a horizontal synchronization signal. InFIG. 165(b), pixel rows are selected two at a time by shifting one byone in sync with a horizontal synchronization signal.

FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram illustrating operation of the gatedriver circuit 12 b which controls the gate signal lines 17 b that turnon and off the EL elements 15. FIG. 168(a) shows a state which resultswhen a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b of onepixel row in each set of four pixel rows (hereinafter such a set ofpixel rows will be referred to as a pixel row set). The location of adisplayed pixel row 53 shifts one by one in sync with a horizontalsynchronization signal (HD). Of course, it is free to decide whether toselect one pixel row (apply a turn-off voltage to the gate signal lines17 b of the other three pixel rows) or no pixel row (apply a turn-offvoltage to the gate signal lines 17 b of the four pixel rows) in the4-pixel-row set. Since this is configured into the shift register, theselection is shifted in sync with a horizontal synchronization signal.

FIG. 168(b) shows a state which results when a turn-on voltage isapplied to the gate signal lines 17 b of two pixel rows in each4-pixel-row set. The location of a displayed pixel row 53 shifts one byone in sync with a horizontal synchronization signal (HD). Of course, itis free to decide whether to select two pixel rows (apply a turn-offvoltage to the gate signal lines 17 b of the other two pixel rows) or nopixel row (apply a turn-off voltage to the gate signal lines 17 b of thefour pixel rows) in the 4-pixel-row set. Since this is configured intothe shift register, the selection is shifted in sync with a horizontalsynchronization signal.

FIG. 168(a) shows a state which results when a turn-on voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 b of one pixel row in each4-pixel-row set. FIG. 168(b) shows a state which results when a turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 b of two pixel rows ineach 4-pixel-row set. However, the present invention is not limited tothis configuration (system). For example, a turn-on voltage may beapplied to the gate signal line 17 b of one pixel row in eachsix-pixel-row set. Alternatively, a turn-on voltage may be applied tothe gate signal lines 17 b of two pixel rows in each eight-pixel-rowset. That is, the present invention is not limited to the drive methodin FIG. 168. Also, on/off state may be varied separately for R, G, andB.

FIG. 169 shows state of voltage outputted to the gate signal lines 17 bin the drive mode in FIG. 168(a). As described earlier, the subscript inthe gate signal line 17 b( ) indicates a pixel row. Incidentally, forease of explanation, pixel rows begin with (1). Also, the numerals inthe top row of the table indicate horizontal scanning period numbers.

As illustrated in FIG. 169, the gate signal lines 17 b(1) to 17 b(4)have the same waveforms as the gate signal lines 17 b(5) to 17 b(8).That is, the same operation is performed for each 4-pixel-row set.

FIG. 170 shows state of voltage outputted to the gate signal lines 17 bin the drive mode in FIG. 168(b). As illustrated in FIG. 120, the gatesignal lines 17 b(1) to 17 b(4) have the same waveforms as the gatesignal lines 17 b(5) to 17 b(8). That is, the same operation isperformed for each 4-pixel-row set.

According to the example in FIG. 168, the brightness of the displayscreen 50 can be adjusted at anytime by increasing and decreasing thenumber of pixels in display mode. In a QCIF panel, the number ofvertical pixels is 220 dots. Thus, in FIG. 168(a), 220/4=55 pixel rowscan be displayed. That is, in white raster display, maximum brightnessis obtained when 55 pixel rows are displayed. The display screen can bemade darker by decreasing the number of displayed pixel rows as follows:55→54→53→52→51→ . . . 5→4→3→2→1→0. Conversely, the screen can be madebrighter by increasing the number of displayed pixel rows as follows:0→1→2→3→4→5→ . . . 50→51→52→53→54→55. Thus, the brightness can beadjusted in multiple steps.

In this brightness adjustment, the brightness of the screen changeslinearly in proportion to the number of displayed pixel rows. Besides,gamma characteristics which correspond to the brightness do not change(the number of gradations remains constant regardless of whether thescreen is bright or dark).

Although in the above example, the number of displayed pixel rows ischanged in increments of 1 to adjust the brightness of the screen 50,this is not restrictive. It may be changed as follows: 54→52→50→48→46→ .. . 6→4→2→0. Alternatively, it may be changed as follows:55→50→45→40→35→ . . . 15→10→5→0.

Similarly, in FIG. 168(b), a QCIF panel can display 220/2=110 pixelrows. That is, in white raster display, maximum brightness is obtainedwhen 110 pixel rows are displayed. The display screen can be made darkerby decreasing the number of displayed pixel rows as follows:110→108→106→104→102→ . . . 10→8→6→4→2→0. Conversely, the screen can bemade brighter by increasing the number of displayed pixel rows asfollows: 0→2→4→6→8→ . . . 100→102→104→106→108→110. Thus, the brightnesscan be adjusted in multiple steps.

Although the number of displayed pixel rows is changed in increments of2 to adjust the brightness of the screen 50, this is not restrictive. Itmay be changed in increments of 4 or more than 4. When curtailingdisplayed pixel rows to adjust brightness, preferably pixel rows arecurtailed in a distributed manner wherever possible rather than in aconcentrated manner. This is to reduce flickering.

Brightness can also be adjusted by varying illumination time perhorizontal scanning period instead of using the number of pixel rows(the pixel rows are illuminated or non-illuminated approximately over anentire horizontal scanning period). That is, the brightness of thedisplay screen is adjusted by illuminating pixel rows for part of onehorizontal scanning period (e.g., for ⅛ of 1 H or for 15/16 of 1 H).

This adjustment (control) is performed using a main clock (MCLK) of thedisplay panel.

In the case of a QCIF panel, MCLK is approximately 2.5 MHz. This meansthat 176 clock pulses can be counted in one horizontal scanning period(1 H). Thus, by counting MCLK pulses and controlling the duration forwhich a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signal lines 17 bbased on the count value, it is possible to turn on and off the ELelements 15 in each pixel row.

Specifically, this can be done by controlling the positions where theclocks (SCK) are set to the low level and the duration for which theclocks (SCK) are set to the low level in timing charts in FIGS. 112 and114. The shorter the duration for which the clocks (SCK) are set to thelow level, the shorter the duration for which the Q output terminal isset to the low level (Vgl).

With the drive method in FIG. 168(a), the durations for which Vgl(turn-on voltage) occurs symmetrically during a period of 1 H getshorter as illustrated in FIG. 171. In (a) of FIG. 171, Vgl (turn-onvoltage) is outputted for an entire period of 1 H (however, with thep-channel gate driver circuit 12 shown in FIG. 113, it is not possibleto produce a low-level output over the entire period of 1 H). A periodof the Vgh voltage (turn-off voltage) occurs between 1 H and the next 1H. However, this is shown in (a) of FIG. 1721 for ease of explanation.

Similarly, in (b) of FIG. 171, the duration for which Vgl is outputtedto the gate signal lines 17 b is shorter than in (a) by two MCLK pulses.In (c) of FIG. 171, the duration for which Vgl is outputted to the gatesignal lines 17 b is shorter than in (b) by two MCLK pulses. The rest isthe same as above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

With the drive method in FIG. 168(b), the durations for which Vgl(turn-on voltage) occurs symmetrically during a period of 2 Hs getshorter as illustrated in FIG. 172. In (a) of FIG. 172, Vgl (turn-onvoltage) is outputted for an entire period of 1 H (however, with thep-channel gate driver circuit 12 shown in FIG. 113, it is not possibleto produce a low-level output over the entire period of 2 Hs). A periodof the Vgh voltage (turn-off voltage) occurs between 2 Hs and the next 2Hs. This is similar to the case with FIG. 171.

Similarly, in (b) of FIG. 172, the duration for which Vgl is outputtedto the gate signal lines 17 b is shorter than in (a) by two MCLK pulsesin the period of 2 Hs. In (c) of FIG. 172, the duration for which Vgl isoutputted to the gate signal lines 17 b is shorter than in (b) by twoMCLK pulses. The rest is the same as above, and thus description thereofwill be omitted.

Incidentally, if the clock is adjusted by changing the configuration ofthe gate driver circuit 12 somewhat, the voltage can be applied to thegate signal lines 17 b in FIG. 171 for 2 Hs continuously as illustratedin FIG. 173.

The drive method in FIG. 168 can also achieve proper movie display.However, whereas both display area 53 and non-display area 52 arecontinuous in FIG. 13, the display area 53 in FIG. 168 is notcontinuous. This is because a turn-on voltage is applied to one pixelrow in each 4-pixel-row set (FIG. 168(a)) or two consecutive pixel rowsin each 4-pixel-row set (FIG. 168(b)). Of course, by changing orimproving the circuit configuration illustrated in FIGS. 113 and 111, itis possible to change or vary displayed pixel rows in relation to theclocks (SCK). For example, pixel rows can be displayed by skipping onepixel row. Also, it is possible to illuminate pixel rows by skipping sixpixel rows. However, in the case of a driver circuit (shift register)which is composed or formed of p-channel transistors, on-illuminatedpixel rows 52 are at least placed (inserted) among displayed pixel rows53.

FIG. 174 shows a drive method which supports movie display in the casewhere the gate driver circuit 12 is composed of p-channel transistors asshown in FIG. 113. As described earlier, intermittent display isrequired to prevent degradation of image display due to blurred movingpictures. That is, it is necessary to insert black (display a black orlow-brightness display screen). It is necessary to provide intermittentscreen display as CRT display. That is, an arbitrary pixel row whichdisplays an image enters black (low-brightness) display mode after apredetermined period. This pixel row blinks (image display andnon-display (black display or low-brightness display) alternate). Theblack display period should be 4 msec or longer. Alternatively, blackdisplay (low-brightness display) should last ¼ of one frame (field)period or longer. Preferably, black display (low-brightness display)should last ½ of one frame (field) period or longer.

This condition depends on persistence of human vision. That is, imageswhich blink faster than at predetermined intervals appear to illuminatecontinuously because of the human vision. This results in blurred movingpictures. However, when images blink slower than at predeterminedintervals, although they visually appear to be continuous, insertednon-display (black display) areas become recognizable and the displayedimages become discrete (although nothing looks unusual visually)Consequently, in movie display, images become discrete and no image bluroccurs. That is, blurred moving pictures are eliminated.

In area A in FIG. 174(a), one pixel row out of four pixel rows aredisplayed (illuminated). Thus, a pixel row illuminates once every fourhorizontal scanning periods (illuminates for 1 H every 4 Hs). Thisperiod (the time it takes for a pixel row to turn on, turns off, andturn on again) is 4 msec or less. Thus, it looks to the human eye as ifthe images were displayed continuously (any pixel row almost appears tobe displayed constantly). In area B in FIG. 174(a), black(low-brightness display) is inserted so that the time required for apixel row to be displayed again after it is displayed once will be 4msec or more, and preferably 8 msec or more. This makes images discrete,resulting in proper movie display.

Incidentally, the term “area A” or “area B” is used above only for easeof explanation. In FIG. 174, area A is scanned sequentially in thedirection of the arrow (from top to bottom of the screen). This issimilar to electronic beam scanning in a CRT. That is, images arerewritten in sequence (For FIG. 174(a), refer to FIG. 175. The pixelrows are scanned (driven) as shown in FIG. 175(a)→(b)→(c)→(a). For FIG.174(b), refer to FIG. 176. The pixel rows are scanned (driven) as shownin FIG. 176(a)→(b)→(c)→(a).

As described above, with the drive method according to the presentinvention, in FIG. 174(a), arbitrary pixel row is displayed for 1 H inevery 4 Hs for a period of 4 msec (preferably 8 msec) or more out of onefield (frame) period, and remains non-illuminated (black display (blackinsertion) or low-brightness display) for the rest of the period (in thefield (frame) period). Thus, although the term “area A” or “area B” hasbeen used above for ease of explanation, it is more appropriate to usethe term “period A” or “period B” from a temporal standpoint.Specifically, images are displayed continuously in area A (period A)while pixel rows (the screen 50) are displayed intermittently in area B(period B). The above items also apply to the example in FIG. 174(b) aswell as to other examples of the present invention.

In FIG. 174(b), two pixel rows are illuminated continuously and the nexttwo pixel rows are non-illuminated. That is, in area A (period A), pixelrows are illuminated for a period of 2 Hs and non-illuminated for aperiod of 2 Hs and this cycle is repeated. In area B (period B), pixelrows remain non-illuminated for a predetermined period. With the drivemethod in FIG. 174(b), continuous display takes place in appearance inarea A and intermittent display takes place in appearance in area B.

Thus, when display modes of an arbitrary pixel row (pixels) is observed,the drive method according to the present invention alternates twoperiods: a first period during which image display and non-display arerepeated at least once for a period of less than 4 msec (or less than ¼of one frame (field) period) and a second period during which the pixelrow (pixels) changes from display mode to non-display mode (blackdisplay or low-brightness display lower than a predetermined brightness)and enters display mode again after 4 msec or more (or ¼ of one frame(field) period or more) The above driving makes it possible to achieveproper image display. Also it uses a simple configuration of the controlcircuit (the gate driver circuit 12 and the like), resulting in reducedcosts.

In FIG. 174, again it is possible to adjust (vary) the brightness of thescreen 50 by varying the number of illuminated pixel rows (the number ofdisplayed pixel rows 53 can be varied or adjusted as in the case of FIG.168). Also, by varying the ratio of a black insertion area (area B inFIG. 174), it is possible to achieve an optimum state according to imagedisplay condition. For example, in the case of still pictures, it isnecessary to avoid increasing area B. Increasing area B will causeflickering. In the case of still pictures, the display area 53 should bescattered in the screen 50. For example, a QCIF panel has 220 pixelrows. To display a still picture using 55 pixel rows, since 220/44=4,one in every four pixel rows can be displayed. To display 10 pixel rowsout of the 200 pixel rows, one in every 22 pixel rows (220/10=22) can bedisplayed.

Incidentally, although one area B (period B) is shown in FIG. 174,needless to say, this is not restrictive and area B (period B) may bedivided into two or more parts.

However, in FIG. 174(a), there is only a choice of whether to illuminateone in every four pixel rows. Thus, it is not possible to illuminate onein every 22 pixel rows. Consequently, one pixel row is displayed inevery five 4-pixel-row sets (i.e., one in every 20 pixel rows isdisplayed) In other words, four 4-pixel-row sets are not illuminated atall and only one pixel row in a 1-pixel-row set is illuminated. All theremaining twenty (20) pixel rows are not illuminated (220-4×5=200). Thatis, the present invention puts a set of pixel rows to be manipulatedinto a unit, groups pixel-row sets into a block, and controls, on ablock by block basis, the number of pixel-row sets which contains apixel row to be illuminated. The above items also apply to the examplein FIG. 174(b) as well as to other examples of the present invention.

Conversely, in the case of movie display, black display should beinserted for at least 4 msec as described with reference to FIG. 174.Also, by varying the ratio of black insertion (duration of black displayor area ratio of black display to the display screen), it is possible tochange movie display condition (adjust it to an optimum state). For veryfast movie display (e.g., if images move actively), it is recommended toincrease the black insertion area. In so doing, reduction in brightnessdue to reduction in the number of pixels displaying images iscompensated for by increasing the emission brightness of each pixel row.Also, it is recommended to increase the period in which black displaycontinues. If the ratio of a movie display area to the entire screen isrelatively small or if moving pictures move relatively slowly, it isrecommended to decrease the ratio of black insertion. In so doing,increase in display brightness due to increase in the number ofilluminated pixel rows 53 can be adjusted easily by decreasing theemission brightness of each pixel row. This adjustment can be made byvarying the programming current Iw and the like. Alternatively, theadjustment can be made by scattering the black insertion period intomultiple parts. This makes it possible to achieve proper image displaywith reduced flickering.

Thus, also in the case of movie display, it is possible to achieve moreoptimum image display by varying or adjusting the condition of blackinsertion. Needless to say, the above items also apply to examplesdescribed below.

An input image signal is checked for moving pictures (ID detection). Ifthe signal represents moving pictures or contains many moving pictures,the drive system in FIG. 174 (intermittent display by means of blackinsertion) is performed. In the case of still pictures, the drive systemin FIG. 168 is implemented (illuminated pixel rows are placed beingscattered as much as possible). Of course, the drive system may bechanged according to the application of the display panel or displayapparatus of the present invention. For example, the drive system inFIG. 168 is used for still pictures such as those on a computer monitor.The drive system in FIG. 174 is used for AV applications such astelevision. The drive system can be changed easily using the SSTA dataof the gate driver circuit 12 b. This can be done simply by controllingthe transistor which turns on and off the current flowing through the ELelements 15 shown in FIG. 1 and the like.

Switching between the drive systems in FIGS. 174 and 168 (for movingpictures or still pictures, or for mainly moving pictures or mainlystill pictures) may be either left up to the user by providing achangeover switch as required or done by the manufacturer of the displaypanel according to the present invention. Also, switching may be doneautomatically by detecting conditions of ambient environment with aphotosensor and the like. It is also possible to combine a controlsignal (changeover signal) with the video signal received by the presentinvention, detect the control signal, and switch display mode (drivesystem).

FIG. 177 shows output waveforms of gate signal lines 17 b in the casewhere the drive system in FIG. 174(a) is used. With the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 1, on/off signals (Vgh is a turn-off voltage andVgl is a turn-on voltage) applied to the gate signal lines 17 b turn onand off the transistors 11 d, thereby turning on and off the EL elements15. In FIG. 1, the top row contains the horizontal scanning period,where symbol L represents the number of pixel rows (in the case of aQCIF panel, L=220 pixel rows). In FIGS. 168 and 174, again the drivesystems according to the present invention are not limited to the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 1. Needless to say, they may also be applied toother pixel configurations (e.g., FIG. 38).

As can be seen from FIG. 177, in period A (area A), a turn-on voltage(Vgl) is applied to the gate signal lines 17 b for 1 H in every 4 Hs. Inperiod B (area B), a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied continuously.Thus, current does not flow through the EL elements 15 during thisperiod. The location of each gate signal line 17 b to which a turn-onvoltage is applied is scanned every pixel row.

Incidentally, although it has been stated in the above example thatpixel rows are scanned one by one, the present invention is not limitedto this. For example, in the case of interlaced scanning, pixel rows arescanned skipping one pixel row. That is, even-numbered pixel rows arescanned in the first frame. Odd-numbered pixel rows are scanned in thesecond frame. When the first frame is being rewritten, the imageswritten into the second frame are retained. However, blinking is caused(or may not be caused). When the second frame is being rewritten, theimages written into the first frame are retained. Of course, blinkingmay be caused as in the example of FIG. 174.

In the case of interlaced scanning, one field consists of two frames,which is normally the case with CRTs. However, the present invention isnot limited to this. For example, one field may consist of four frames.In that case, images in the (4N+1)-th pixel rows are rewritten in thefirst frame (where n is an integer not smaller than 1). Images in the(4N+2)-th pixel rows are rewritten in the second frame. Images in the(4N+3)-th pixel rows are rewritten in the third frame. Images in the(4N+4)-th pixel rows are rewritten in the final fourth frame. Thus,writing into pixel rows according to the present invention is notlimited to sequential scanning. The above items also apply to otherexamples. The interlaced scanning as referred to herein means typicalskip scanning and is not limited to “2 frames=1 field.” That is, onefield may consist of a plurality of frames.

Needless to say, the drive system in FIG. 177 or 178 may be used incombination with the drive system described in FIGS. 171, 172, 173,etc., which involves adjusting the brightness of the screen 50 bycontrolling the current flowing through the EL elements 15 (controllingON periods), in one horizontal scanning period (1 H) or two or morehorizontal scanning periods.

As in the case of FIG. 177, FIG. 178 shows applied waveforms of gatesignal lines 17 b in FIG. 174(b). FIG. 178 differs from FIG. 177 in thatin period A (area A, see FIG. 168(b)), a turn-on voltage (Vgl) isapplied to each gate signal line 17 b for two horizontal scanningperiods (2 Hs) and then a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied for 2 Hs.The turn-on voltage and turn-off voltage are applied alternately. Theturn-off voltage is applied continuously in period B (area B). Thatlocation of each gate signal line 17 b to which a turn-on voltage isapplied is scanned every 1H.

FIG. 177 shows output waveforms of gate signal lines 17 b in the casewhere the drive system in FIG. 174(a) is used. With the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 1, on/off signals (Vgh is a turn-off voltage andVgl is a turn-on voltage) applied to the gate signal lines 17 b turn onand off the transistors 11 d, thereby turning on and off the EL elements15. In FIG. 1, the top row contains the horizontal scanning period,where symbol L represents the number of pixel rows L (in the case of aQCIF panel, L=220 pixel rows). In FIGS. 168 and 174, again the drivesystems according to the present invention are not limited to the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 1. Needless to say, they also apply to other pixelconfigurations (e.g., FIGS. 38, 43, 51, 62, 63, etc.).

As in the case of FIG. 177, FIG. 178 shows applied waveforms of gatesignal lines 17 b in FIG. 174(b). FIG. 178 differs from FIG. 177 in thatin period A (area A, see FIG. 168(b)), a turn-on voltage (Vgl) isapplied to each gate signal line 17 b for two horizontal scanningperiods (2 Hs) and then a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied for 2 Hs.The turn-on voltage and turn-off voltage are applied alternately. Theturn-off voltage is applied continuously in period B (area B). Thatlocation of each gate signal line 17 b to which a turn-on voltage isapplied is scanned every 1H. Other items are the same as or similar toFIG. 177, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, in the above example, area A and area B coexist in thescreen 50. That is, area A and area B always exist during any period inscreen display mode (of course, the location of area A varies). Thismeans that period A and period B exist in one field (one frame, i.e., arefresh period of the screen). However, since black insertion (blackdisplay or low-brightness display) can be used to improve movie display,the present invention is not limited to the drive system in FIG. 124.For example, the drive system in FIG. 179 may be used.

In FIG. 179, it is assumed for ease of explanation, that the screen ismade up of four display periods (a), (b), (c), and (d). It is alsoassumed that one field consists of four frames with FIG. 179(a)corresponding to the first frame, FIG. 179(b) corresponding to thesecond frame, FIG. 179(c) corresponding to the third frame, and FIG.179(d) corresponding to the fourth frame. In FIG. 179, the displayrepeats a cycle of (a)→(b)→(c)→(d).

In the first frame, the even-numbered pixel rows are selected insequence to rewrite images as illustrated in FIG. 179(a). When the firstframe is rewritten, the screen 50 is filled with black display insequence from the top as illustrated in FIG. 179(b) (FIG. 179(b) showsthe screen 50 filled with black display). Next, in the third frame,images are written into the odd-numbered pixel rows in sequence from thetop of the screen 50 as illustrated in FIG. 179(c). In other words,odd-numbered images are displayed in sequence from the top. Next, in thefourth frame, images are put into non-illumination mode (black display)in sequence from the top of the screen 50 (FIG. 179(d) shows the screen50 completely in non-illumination mode).

Incidentally, the words “images are written” and “images are displayed”are used in FIGS. 179(a) and (c), and basically the present invention ischaracterized in that images are displayed (illuminated). Thus, writingan image (running a program) does not need to be identical withdisplaying an image. That is, one may think that in FIGS. 179(a) and(c), by controlling the gate signal lines 17 b, the present inventioncontrols the current flowing through the EL elements 15, and therebyputs images into illumination or non-illumination mode. Thus, it ispossible to switch between the state in FIG. 179(a) and state in FIG.179(b) at once (e.g., in a period of 1 H). For example, this can be donethrough control of an enable terminal (on-state and off-state are heldin the shift registers of the gate driver circuit 12 b (in FIG. 179(a),the shift register for the even-numbered pixel rows holds on-state data)and the states in FIGS. 179(b) and (d) are displayed when the enableterminal is off and the state in FIG. 179(a) is displayed when theenable terminal is on). Thus, the displays in FIGS. 179(a) and 179(c)can be achieved using on-state and off-state of the gate signal lines 17b (image data is held in the capacitor 19 beforehand in the case of thepixel configuration in FIG. 1, for example). It has been stated thateach of the modes in FIGS. 179(a), (b), (c), and (d) occurs for one 1frame period.

However, the present invention is not limited to these display modes. Toimprove at least movie display condition, black insertion mode such asthe one shown in FIGS. 179(b) or (d) can be run for 4 msec. Thus, in theexample of the present invention, the display modes in FIGS. 179(a) and(c) can be brought about not only by scanning the gate signal lines 17 busing the shift register circuits of the gate driver circuit 12 b. Thesemodes can be brought about by mutually connecting odd-numbered gatesignal lines 17 b (referred to as an odd-numbered gate signal linegroup), mutually connecting even-numbered gate signal lines 17 b(referred to as an even-numbered gate signal line group), and applyingturn-on and turn-off voltages alternately to the odd-numbered gatesignal line group and even-numbered gate signal line group. The displaymode in FIG. 179(c) is brought about if a turn-on voltage is applied tothe odd-numbered gate signal line group and a turn-off voltage isapplied to the even-numbered gate signal line group. The display mode inFIG. 179(a) is brought about if a turn-on voltage is applied to theeven-numbered gate signal line group and a turn-off voltage is appliedto the odd-numbered gate signal line group. The display modes in FIGS.179(b) and (d) are brought about if a turn-off voltage is applied toboth odd-numbered gate signal line group and even-numbered gate signalline group. Each of the modes in FIGS. 129(a), (b), (c), and (d)(especially FIGS. 179(b) and (d)) should be brought about for 4 msec orlonger. The drive system in FIG. 179 alternates between screen displaymode (FIGS. 179(a) and (c)) and black display mode (black insertion,FIGS. 179(b) and (d)). This makes image display intermittent, improvingmovie display performance (without blurred moving pictures).

The drive system in the example of FIG. 179 involves displaying imagesin the odd-numbered pixel rows or even-numbered pixel rows in the firstand third frames and inserting a black screen (FIGS. 179(b) and (d))between the two screens. However, the present invention is not limitedto this. The display mode in FIG. 168 may be brought about in the firstand third frame and black display may be inserted between the twoframes.

A timing chart for an example described below is shown in FIG. 180. FIG.180(a) corresponds to the first frame and FIG. 180(b) corresponds to thesecond frame which is in black insertion mode. FIG. 180(c) correspondsto the third frame. Incidentally, the fourth frame, which is the same asthat in FIG. 180(b), has been omitted. However, the fourth frame is notstrictly necessary. One field may consist of three frames. Since blackscreen is inserted in the second frame, blurred moving pictures arereduced greatly. Thus, in FIG. 180, a cycle of (a)→(b)→(c) is repeated.

In FIG. 180(a), images are displayed in FIG. 168(a) for 1 H in everyfour horizontal scanning periods (4 Hs) (a Vgl voltage (turn-on voltage)is applied to each gate signal line 17 b for 1 H in every 4 Hs). Next,in the second-frame, a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to all the gatesignal lines 17 b. This can be done at once through control of theenable terminal as is the case with the previous example. Thus, it isnot strictly necessary to maintain the state in FIG. 180(b) for oneframe period. To achieve proper movie display, it is enough to maintainthe state for 4 msec or longer. However, in FIG. 180(a), if images arerewritten in sequence from the top of the screen (not necessarily fromthe top), images will be skipped. The state in FIG. 180(b) can bemaintained easily by connecting the plural gate signal lines 17 b in thelump and controlling the enable terminal as described with reference toFIG. 179.

In FIG. 180, images are displayed regularly, for example, byilluminating each pixel row for 1 H in every 4 Hs. However, it issufficient if each pixel row is illuminated (displayed) for an equalinterval during a unit period (e.g., one frame, one field, or the like).That is, there is no need for illumination mode and non-illuminationmode to occur regularly.

FIG. 181 shows an example in which illumination mode occurs irregularly.A turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b(1) in the 1stH, 5th H, 6th H, 9th H, 13th H, 14th H, and so on. A turn-off voltage isapplied during the other periods. Thus, the turn-on voltage is appliedrandomly rather than periodically (although periodically in the longterm). It is sufficient if total durations for which a turn-on voltageis applied during one frame period (unit period) are approximately equalamong different gate signal lines. In this way, the different pixel rowsare illuminated for approximately equal durations (pixel rows areilluminated (displayed) when a turn-on voltage is applied to the gatesignal lines 17 b).

Incidentally, in FIG. 181, the signal waveforms applied to the gatesignal lines 17 b are scanned every 1 H. In this way, by scanning(applying) basic waveforms by shifting the gate signal lines 17 b by 1 H(by predetermined clock pulses or by a predetermined unit), it ispossible to make brightness uniform over the entire screen. In FIG. 181,needless to say, the brightness of the screen can also be controlled(adjusted) by adjusting the application duration of the turn-on voltage(Vgl).

In the above example, the same turn-on/turn-off voltage patterns areapplied to the gate signal lines 17 b in each frame (unit period).However, according to the present invention, different pixel rows(pixels) are illuminated (display) or non-illuminated (non-display) forapproximately equal durations during a predetermined period. Thus, inthe drive system, where one field consists of two frames, the signalwaveforms applied to the first frame and second frame may vary amongdifferent gate signal lines 17 b For example, a turn-on voltage may beapplied to an arbitrary pixel row for a period of 10 Hs in the firstframe, and for a period of 20 Hs in the second frame (in a unit periodof two frames, a turn-on voltage is applied for a period of 10 Hs+20Hs). A turn-on voltage is also applied to the other pixel rows for aperiod of 30 Hs.

An example is shown in FIG. 182. In FIG. 182(a) (first frame), a turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b for each pixel row forone horizontal scanning period (1 H) in every four horizontal scanningperiods (4 Hs). In FIG. 182(b) (second frame), a turn-on voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 for each pixel row for 2 Hs in every4 Hs. Thus, in two frames, a turn-on voltage is applied for (1+2) Hs inevery (4+4) Hs. However, in a unit period (two frames in FIG. 132), aturn-on voltage is applied to every gate signal line 17 b for the sameperiod. Thus, every pixel row is displayed at the same brightness(assuming a white raster display).

Incidentally, although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 180that a turn-on voltage is applied for 1 H in every 4 Hs, this is notrestrictive. For example, a turn-on voltage may be applied for 1 H inevery 8 Hs as illustrated in FIG. 183. Also, in each frame, signalwaveforms may be applied to the gate signal lines 17 b perfectly atrandom rather than periodically. It is sufficient if the total durationsfor which a turn-on voltage is applied during a unit period are equalamong all the gate signal lines 17 b.

Although it has been stated in the above example that the totaldurations for which a turn-on voltage is applied during a unit periodare equal among all the gate signal lines 17 b, this does not apply tothe following cases. Such is the case when a screen 50 (i.e., onedisplay panel) contains multiple screens 50 which differ in brightness.That is, for example, when the screen 50 consists of a first screen 50 aand second screen 50 b which differ in brightness. The two screens 50can be varied in brightness by adjusting the programming current Iw, butthey can be varied more easily by scanning the gate signal lines 17 band varying the illumination (display) period of pixel rows between thefirst screen 50 a and second screen 50 b. For example, regarding eachpixel row in the first screen 50 a, a turn-on voltage is applied to thegate signal lines 17 b for 1 H in every 4 Hs. For each pixel row in thesecond screen 50 b, a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signallines 17 b for 1 H in every 8 Hs. In this way, by varying theapplication duration of the turn-on voltage among different screens, itis possible to adjust screen brightness and make gamma curves of thescreens similar to each other.

The power supply circuit (IC) 82 (see FIG. 8) generates voltages ofpotentials needed for a turn-on voltage (selection voltage of pixel 16transistors) and turn-off voltage (non-selection voltage of pixel 16transistors) to be outputted from the gate driver circuits 12 to thegate signal lines 17. Consequently, semiconductor processes for thepower supply IC 82 have sufficient voltage resistance.

Thus, the logic signals can be level-shifted (LS) conveniently by thepower supply IC 82. For this reason, gate driver circuit 12 controlsignals outputted from a controller (not shown) are fed into the powersupply IC 82 and level-shifted there before it is fed into the gatedriver circuits 12 according to the present invention. Source drivercircuit 14 control signals outputted from the controller (not shown) arefed into the source driver circuit 14 and the like according to thepresent invention (there is no need for level shifting).

However, the present invention does not limit all the transistors formedon the array board 71 to p-channel transistors. By using only p-channeltransistors for the gate driver circuits 12 as described later withreference to FIGS. 111 and 113, it is possible to make the gate drivercircuits 12 smaller than gate driver circuits 12 of CMOS structure.Consequently, it is possible to reduce bezel width. In the case of a2.2-inch QCIP panel, the width of a gate driver circuit 12 can bereduced to 600 μm if a 6-μm rule is adopted. The width will be 700 μmeven including power wiring of the gate driver circuit 12. If CMOS(n-channel and p-channel transistors) is used for a similar circuitconfiguration, the width will be increased to 1.2 mm. Thus, by usingonly p-channel transistors for the gate driver circuits 12, it ispossible to achieve a characteristic effect of bezel width reduction.

Also, if the pixels 16 are constructed of p-channel transistors, theywill match well with the gate driver circuits 12 which are composed ofp-channel transistors. The p-channel transistors (the transistors 11 band 11 c and transistor 11 d in the pixel configuration in FIG. 1) turnon when the voltage becomes low (Vgl). On the other hand, the lowervoltage serves as the selection voltage for the gate driver circuits 12as well. Gate drivers with p-channel transistors achieve good matchingif the lower level is used as the selection level as can be seen from aconfiguration in FIG. 113. This is because the lower level cannot bemaintained for a long time. On the other hand, the higher voltage (Vgh)can be maintained for a long time.

Also, by using p-channel transistors for the driver transistors(transistor 11 a in FIG. 1) which supplies current to the EL elements15, it is possible to use a ground electrode made of thin metal film asthe cathode of the EL elements 15. Also, current can be passed from theanode potential Vdd to the EL elements 15 in the forward direction. Inview of the above circumstances, it is preferable that the transistorsin the pixels 16 and gate driver circuits 12 are p-channel transistors.Thus, the use of p-channel transistors as the transistors (drivertransistors 11 a and switching transistors 11 d, 11 b, and 11 c) in thepixels 16 and as the transistors in the gate driver circuits 12according to the present invention is not merely a design matter.

The level shifter (LS) circuit may be formed directly on the array board71. That is, n-channel and p-channel transistors are used for the levelshifter (LS) circuit. A logic signal from a controller (not shown) isboosted by the level shifter circuit formed directly on the board 71 sothat it will match the logic level of the gate driver circuits 12constructed from a p-channel transistor. The boosted logic voltage isapplied to the gate driver circuits 12.

Incidentally, the level shifter circuit may be constructed from asemiconductor chip and mounted on the board 71 using COG technology orthe like. Also, the source driver circuit 14 is constructed basicallyfrom a semiconductor chip and mounted on the board 71 using COGtechnology. However, the source driver circuit 14 is not limited tobeing constructed from a semiconductor chip, and may be formed directlyon the board 71 using polysilicon technology. If p-channel transistorsare used as the transistors 11 a of pixels 16, programming current flowsin the direction from the pixels 16 to the source signal lines 18. Thus,n-channel transistors should be used as the constant-current circuit inthe source driver circuit. That is, the source driver circuit 14 shouldbe configured in such a way as to draw the programming current Iw.

Thus, if the driver transistors 11 a of the pixels 16 (in the case ofFIG. 1) are p-channel transistors, the constant-current circuit (circuitwhich outputs gradation current) in the source driver circuit 14 must ben-channel transistors to ensure that the source driver circuit 14 willdraw the programming current Iw. In order to form a source drivercircuit 14 on an array board 71, it is necessary to use both masks(processes) form-channel transistors and masks (processes) for p-channeltransistors. Conceptually speaking, in the display panel (displayapparatus) of the present invention, p-channel transistors are used forthe pixels 16 and gate driver circuits 12 while n-channel transistorsare used as the transistors of drawing current sources of the sourcedriver.

FIG. 8 is a block diagram of signal and voltage supplies on a displayapparatus according to the present invention or a block diagram of thedisplay apparatus. Signals (power supply wiring, data wiring, etc.) aresupplied from the control IC 81 to a source driver circuit 14 a via aflexible board 84.

In FIG. 8, a control signal for the gate driver circuit 12 is generatedby the control IC, level-shifted by the source driver circuit 14, andapplied to the gate driver circuit 12. Since drive voltage of the sourcedriver circuit 14 is 4 to 8 (V), the control signal with an amplitude of3.3 (V) outputted from the control IC 81 can be converted into a signalwith an amplitude of 5 (V) which can be received by the gate drivercircuit 12. Of course, the signal voltage may be level-shifted by acontroller and supplied to the gate driver circuits 12.

Preferably, the source driver circuit 14 contains an image memory. Imagedata may go through an error diffusion process or dithering processbefore being stored in the image memory.

In FIG. 8 and the like, what is denoted by reference numeral 14 has beendescribed as a source driver, but instead of being a mere driver, it mayincorporate a power circuit, buffer circuit (including a circuit such asa shift register), data conversion circuit, latch circuit, commanddecoder, shifting circuit, address conversion circuit, image memory,etc. Needless to say, a three-side free configuration or otherconfiguration, drive system, etc. described with reference to FIG. 9 andthe like are also applicable to the configuration described withreference to FIG. 8 and the like.

When the display panel is used for information display apparatus such asa cell phone, it is preferable to mount (form) the source driver IC(circuit) 14 and gate driver IC (circuit) 12 on one side of the displaypanel as shown in FIG. 9 (incidentally, a configuration in which driverICs (circuits) are mounted (formed) on one side of a display panel isreferred to as a three-side free configuration (structure).Conventionally, the gate driver IC 12 is mounted on an X side of adisplay area and a source driver IC 14 is mounted on a Y side). Thismakes it easy in the design to center the center line of a displayscreen 50 on the display apparatus and mount the driver ICs. Using thethree-side free configuration, the gate driver circuit may be producedby high-temperature polysilicon technology, low-temperature polysilicontechnology or the like (i.e., at least one of the source driver circuit14 and gate driver circuit 12 may be formed directly on the board 71 bypolysilicon technology).

Incidentally, the three-side free configuration includes not only aconfiguration in which ICs are placed or formed directly on the board71, but also a configuration in which a film (TCP, TAB, or othertechnology) with a source driver IC (circuit) 14 and gate driver IC(circuit) 12 mounted are pasted on one side (or almost one side) of theboard 71. That is, the three-side free configuration includesconfigurations and arrangements in which two sides are left free of ICsand all similar configurations.

If the gate driver circuit 12 is placed beside the source driver circuit14 as shown in FIG. 9, the gate signal line 17 must be formed along theside c.

Incidentally, the thick solid line in FIG. 9, etc. indicates gate signallines 17 formed in parallel. Thus, as many gate signal lines 17 as thereare scanning signal lines are formed in parallel in part b (bottom ofthe screen) while a single gate signal line 17 is formed in part a (topof the screen).

Spacing between the gate signal lines 17 formed on the side C is from 5μm to 12 μm (both inclusive). If it is less than 5 μm, parasiticcapacitance will cause noise on adjacent gate signal lines. It has beenshown experimentally that parasitic capacitance has significant effectswhen the spacing is 7 μm or less. Furthermore, when the spacing is lessthan 5 μm, beating noise and other image noise appear intensely on thedisplay screen. In particular, noise generation differs between theright and left sides of the screen and it is difficult to reduce thebeating noise and other image noise. When the spacing exceeds 12 μm,bezel width D of the display panel becomes too large to be practical.

To reduce the image noise, a ground pattern (conductive pattern whichhas been fixed at a constant voltage or set generally at a stablepotential) can be placed under or above the gate signal lines 17.Alternatively, a separate shield plate (shield foil: a conductivepattern which has been fixed at a constant voltage or set generally at astable potential) may be placed on the gate signal lines 17.

The gate signal lines 17 on the side c in FIG. 9 may be formed, usingITO materials. However, to reduce resistance, preferably they are formedby laminating ITO and thin metal films. Also preferably they are formedof multilayered metal films. When using an ITO laminate, a titanium filmis formed on the ITO, and a thin aluminum film or aluminum-molybdenumalloy film is formed on it. Alternatively, a chromium is formed on theITO. For metal films, thin aluminum films or chromium films are used.This also applies to other examples of the present invention.

Incidentally, although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 9 andthe like that the gate signal lines 17 are placed on one side of thedisplay area, this is not restrictive and they may be placed on bothsides. For example, the gate signal line 17 a may be placed (formed) onthe right side of the display area 50 while the gate signal line 17 bmay be placed (formed) on the left side of the display area 50. Thisalso applies to other examples.

Also, the source driver IC 14 and gate driver IC 12 may be integratedinto a single chip. Then, it suffices to mount only one IC chip on thedisplay panel. This also reduces implementation costs. Furthermore, thismakes it possible to simultaneously generate various voltages for use inthe single-chip driver IC.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 1 and the like, the EL element 15 isconnected to the Vdd potential via the transistor 11 a. However, thereis a problem that organic EL elements constituting different colors varyin drive voltage. For example, when a current of 0.01 A is delivered persquare centimeter, the terminal voltage of the EL elements for blue (B)is 5 V while the terminal voltage of the EL elements for green (G) andred (R) is 9 V. That is, the terminal voltage for B differs from theterminal voltage for G and R. Thus, the source-drain voltage (SDvoltage) of the transistor 11 a for B differs from that for G and R.Consequently, drain-source off-leakage current differs among differentcolors. If off-leakage current occurs and off-leakage characteristicsvary with the color, flickering occurs with color balance disturbed andgamma characteristics deviate in correlation with emitted colors,resulting in complicated display condition.

To deal with this problem, preferably the potential of the cathodeelectrode for one of at least the RGB colors is different from thepotential of the cathode electrode for the other colors. Alternatively,it is preferable that the Vdd potential (anode potential) for one of theRGB colors is different from the Vdd potential for the other colors.

Needless to say, the terminal voltages of the EL elements 15 for R, G,and B are identical whenever possible. Material and structure should beselected in such a way that the terminal voltages of the EL elements forR, G, and B are 10 V or below at least at white peak brightness and in acolor temperature range of 7000 K to 12000 K (both inclusive). Also,among R, G, and B, the difference between the maximum terminal voltageand minimum terminal voltage of the EL elements should be 2.5 V or less.For example, if the terminal voltage of the EL elements for R is 7 Vwhen maximum current is passed through the EL elements 15, preferablythe terminal voltage of the EL elements 15 for R, G and B should bebetween 7−2.5 V (minimum) and 7+2.5 V (maximum) both inclusive whenmaximum current is passed through the EL elements. More preferably, thedifference should be 1.5 v or less.

Although it has been stated that pixels are of the three primary colorsof R, G, and B, this is not restrictive. They may be of three colors ofcyan, yellow, and magenta. They may be of two colors of B and yellow orthe like. Of course, they may be monochromatic. Alternatively, they maybe of six colors of R, G, B, cyan, yellow, and magenta or of five colorsof R, G, B, cyan, and magenta. These are natural colors which provide anexpanded color reproduction range, enabling good display. Besides, thepixels may be of four colors of R, G, B, and white. Alternatively, theymay be of seven colors of R, G, B, cyan, yellow, magenta, black, andwhite. It is also possible to form (build) white light-emitting pixelsover the entire display area 50 and produce the three primary colorsusing RGB color filters or the like. Also, a single pixel may betwo-colored such as B and yellow. Thus, the EL display apparatusaccording to the present invention is not limited to those which providecolor display using the three primary colors of R, G, and B.

Mainly three methods are available to colorize an organic EL displaypanel. One of them is a color conversion method. It suffices to form asingle layer of blue as a light-emitting layer. The remaining green andred colors needed for full color display can be produced from the bluecolor through color conversion. Thus, this method has the advantage ofeliminating the need to paint the R, G, and B colors separately andprepare organic EL materials for the R, G, and B colors. The colorconversion method does not lower yields unlike the multi-color paintingmethod. Any of the three methods can be applied to the EL display panelof the present invention.

Also, in addition to the three primary colors, white light-emittingpixels may be formed. The white light-emitting pixels can be created(formed or constructed) by laminating R, G, and B light-emittingstructures. A set of pixels consists of pixels for the three primarycolors RGB and a white light-emitting pixel 16. Forming the whitelight-emitting pixels makes it easier to express peak brightness ofwhite, and thus possible to implement bright image display.

Even when using a set of pixels for the three primary colors RGB, it ispreferable to vary pixel electrode areas for the different colors. Ofcourse, an equal area may be used if luminous efficiencies of thedifferent colors as well as color purity are well balanced. However, ifone or more colors are poorly balanced, preferably the pixel electrodes(light-emitting areas) are adjusted. The electrode area for each colorcan be determined based on current density. That is, when white balanceis adjusted in a color temperature range of 7000 K (Kelvin) to 12000 K(both inclusive), difference between current densities of differentcolors should be within ±30%. More preferably, the difference should bewithin ±15%. For example, if current densities are around 100A/squaremeter, all the three primary colors should have a currentdensity of 70 A/square meter to 130 A/square meter (both inclusive) Morepreferably, all the three primary colors should have a current densityof 85 A/square meter to 115 A/square meter (both inclusive).

The organic EL element 15 is a self-luminous element. When light fromthis self-luminous element enters a transistor serving as a switchingelement, a photoconductive phenomenon occurs. The photoconductivephenomenon is a phenomenon in which leakage (off-leakage) increases dueto photoexcitation when a switching element such as a transistor is off.

To deal with this problem, the present invention forms a shading filmunder the gate driver circuit 12 (source driver circuit 14 in somecases) and under the pixel transistor 11. The shading film is formed ofthin film of metal such as chromium and is from 50 nm to 150 nm thick(both inclusive). A thin film will provide a poor shading effect while athick film will cause irregularities, making it difficult to pattern thetransistor 11 a 1 in an upper layer.

A smoothing film made of inorganic material, 20 to 100 nm thick (bothinclusive), is formed on the light-shielding film. One of the electrodesof the storage capacitance 19 may be formed of this layer of thelight-shielding film. In that case, preferably the thickness of thesmooth film is minimized to increase the capacitance value of thestorage capacitance. It is also possible to form the light-shieldingfilm of aluminum, form a silicon oxide film on the light-shielding filmusing anodizing technology, and use the silicon oxide film as adielectric film for the storage capacitance 19. Pixel electrodes of ahigh aperture (HA) structure are formed on the smoothing film.

In the case of the driver circuit 12 and the like, it is necessary toreduce penetration of light not only from the topside, but also from theunderside. This is because the photoconductive phenomenon will causemalfunctions. If cathode electrodes are made of metal films, the presentinvention also forms a cathode electrode on the surface of the driver 12and the like and uses it as a shading film.

An antireflection film is formed on a light emitting surface of theboard 71. The antireflection film is formed of thin multilayer film oftitanium oxide or magnesium fluoride.

If a cathode electrode is formed on the driver 12, electric fields fromthe cathode electrode may cause driver malfunctions or place the cathodeelectrode and driver circuit in electrical contact. To deal with thisproblem, the present invention forms at least one layer of organic ELfilm, and preferably two or more layers, on the driver circuit 12simultaneously with the formation of organic EL film on the pixelelectrode. Since the organic EL film is an insulating material, itisolates the cathode and driver from each other when formed on thedriver. This solves the above problem.

If a short circuit occurs between terminals of one or more transistors11 or between a transistor 11 and signal line in the pixel, the ELelement 15 may become a bright spot which remains illuminatedconstantly. The bright spot is visually conspicuous and must be turnedinto a black spot (turned off) The pixel 16 which corresponds to thebright spot is detected and the capacitor 19 is irradiated with laserlight to cause a short circuit across the capacitor. As a result, thecapacitor 19 can no longer hold electric charges, and thus thetransistor 11 a can be stopped from passing current. Thus, the pixelsirradiated with laser light remain non-illuminated in black displaymode.

Incidentally, it is desirable to remove cathode film from those portionswhich will be irradiated with laser light. This will prevent theterminal electrodes of the capacitor 19 from short-circuiting to thecathode film when the pixels are irradiated with laser light. Thus,where laser repairs will be made, the cathode electrode is patternedwith holes in advance.

Flaws in a transistor 11 in the pixel 16 will affect the driver IC 14.For example, if a source-drain (SD) short circuit 562 occurs in thedriver transistor 11 a in FIG. 56, a Vdd voltage of the panel is appliedto the source driver IC 14. Thus, preferably the power supply voltage ofthe source driver IC 14 is kept equal to or higher than the power supplyvoltage Vdd of the panel (anode voltage). Preferably, the referencevoltage used by the source driver IC 14 can be adjusted with anelectronic regulator 561.

As shown in FIG. 56, if an SD short circuit 562 occurs in the transistor11 a, an excessive current flows through the EL element 15. In otherwords, the EL element 15 remains illuminated constantly (becomes abright spot). The bright spot is conspicuous as a defect. For example,if a source-drain (SD) short circuit occurs in the transistor 11 a inFIG. 56, current flows constantly from the Vdd voltage to the EL element15 (when the transistor 11 d is on) regardless of the magnitude of gate(G) terminal voltage of the transistor 11 a. Thus, a bright spotresults.

On the other hand, if an SD short circuit occurs in the transistor 1 aand if the transistor 11 c is on, the Vdd voltage is applied to thesource signal line 18 and to the source driver circuit 14. If the powersupply voltage of the source driver circuit 14 is not higher than Vdd,voltage resistance may be exceeded, causing the source driver circuit 14to rupture.

An SD short circuit of the transistor 11 a may go beyond a point defectand lead to rupture of the source driver circuit of the panel. Also, thebright spot is conspicuous, which makes the panel defective. Thus, it isnecessary to turn the bright spot into a black spot by cutting thewiring which connects between the transistor 11 and EL element 15. Forthat, the source terminal (S) or drain terminal (D) of the transistor 11a are cut by optical means such as laser light or the channel of thetransistor 11 a is destroyed.

Incidentally, although it has been stated in the above example thatwiring is cut, this is not restrictive in the case of black display. Forexample, as also can be seen from FIG. 1, the power supply Vdd of thetransistor 11 a may be always applied to the gate (G) terminal of thetransistor 11 a. For example, if the two electrodes of the capacitor 19are short-circuited, the Vdd voltage is applied to the gate (G) terminalof the transistor 1 a. Consequently, the transistor 11 a is turned offcompletely, causing the EL elements 15 to stop passing current. This canbe accomplished easily because the capacitor electrodes can beshort-circuited by irradiating the capacitor 19 with laser light.

Also, since Vdd wiring is actually laid under the pixel electrodes, thedisplay condition of the pixels can be controlled (corrected) byirradiating the Vdd wiring and pixel electrodes with laser light.

For black display of the pixels 16, the EL elements 15 may be degraded.For example, the EL layer 15 is degraded physically or chemically bybeing irradiated with laser light so that it will not emit light(constant black display). The EL layer 15 can be heated and degradedeasily by laser irradiation. The EL layer 15 can be chemically changedeasily using an excimer laser.

Incidentally, although the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 is cited in theabove example, the present invention is not limited to this. Needless tosay, the approach of opening or short-circuiting wiring or electrodesusing laser light is also applicable to other current-driven pixelconfigurations such as current mirrors or to voltage-driven pixelconfigurations such as those illustrated in FIGS. 62 and 51. Thus, thepresent invention is not limited by pixel configuration or structure.

A drive method regarding the pixel structure shown in FIG. 1 will bedescribed below. As shown in FIG. 1, the gate signal line 17 a conductswhen the row remains selected (since the transistor 11 in FIG. 1 is aP-channel transistor, the gate signal line 17 a conducts when it is inlow state) and the gate signal line 17 b conducts when the row remainsnon-selected.

Parasitic capacitance (not shown) is present in the source signal line18. The parasitic capacitance is caused by the capacitance at thejunction of the source signal line 18 and gate signal line 17, channelcapacitance of the transistors 11 b and 11 c, etc.

The time t required to change the current value of the source signalline 18 is given by t=C·V/I, where C is stray capacitance, V is avoltage of the source signal line, and I is a current flowing throughthe source signal line. Thus, if the current value can be increasedtenfold, the time required to change the current value can be reducednearly tenfold. This also means that the current value can be changed toa predetermined value even if the parasitic capacitance of the sourcesignal line 18 is increased tenfold. Thus, to apply a predeterminedcurrent value during a short horizontal scanning period, it is useful toincrease the current value.

For example, a tenfold increase in the output current from the sourcedriver IC 14 results in a tenfold increase in the current programmedinto the pixel 16. This results in a tenfold increase in the emissionbrightness of the EL element 15 as well. Thus, to obtain predeterminedbrightness, a light emission period is reduced tenfold by reducing theconduction period (ON time) of the transistor 17 d in FIG. 1 tenfoldcompared to a conventional conduction period.

Thus, in order to charge and discharge the parasitic capacitance of thesource signal line 18 sufficiently and program a predetermined currentvalue into the transistor 11 a of the pixel 16, it is necessary tooutput a relatively large current from the source driver circuit 14.However, when such a large current is passed through the source signalline 18, its large current value is programmed into the pixel and acurrent larger than the predetermined current flows through the ELelement 15. For example, if a 10 times larger current is programmed,naturally a 10 times larger current flows through the EL element 15 andthe EL element 15 emits 10 times brighter light. To obtain predeterminedemission brightness, the time during which the current flows through theEL element 15 can be reduced tenfold. This way, the parasiticcapacitance can be charged/discharged sufficiently from the sourcesignal line 18 and the predetermined emission brightness can beobtained.

Incidentally, although it has been stated that a 10 times larger currentvalue is written into the pixel transistor 11 a (more precisely, theterminal voltage of the capacitor 19 is set) and that the conductionperiod of the EL element 15 is reduced to 1/10, this is only exemplary.As another example, ten times larger current may be written into thepixel transistor 11 a and the ON time of the EL element 15 may bereduced to ⅕. On the contrary, a 10 times larger current value may bewritten into the pixel transistor 11 a and the conduction period of theEL element 15 may be reduced to ½.

It is also possible to set the ON time to 1/1 (keep the transistor 11 don) for bright image display and set the ON time to 1/10 (turn on thetransistor 11 d for 1/10 of a frame period) for dark image display.Also, the display may be changed in real time based on image displaydata.

The present invention is characterized in that the write current into apixel is set at a value other than a predetermined value and that acurrent is passed through the EL element 15 intermittently. For ease ofexplanation, it has been stated herein that an N times larger current iswritten into the pixel transistor 11 and the conduction period of the ELelement 15 is reduced to 1/N. However, this is not restrictive. Needlessto say, N1 times larger current may be written into the pixel transistor11 and the conduction period of the EL element 15 may be reduced to 1/N2(N1 and N2 are different from each other).

Incidentally, the term “intermittently” does not mean that the paneldrive method according to the present invention always uses intermitdisplay. A 1/1 display (other than intermittent display) may be useddepending on image display condition. That is, with the drive methodaccording to the present invention, image display occasionally involvesintermit display. Intermittent display is a display mode in which atleast two horizontal scanning periods (2 Hs) occur in one frame period.

Incidentally, regarding intermittent display, intermittent periods arenot necessarily spaced equally. For example, they may appear at random(provided that the display period or non-display period makes up apredetermined value (constant ratio) as a whole). Also, display periodsmay vary among R, G, and B. For example, R pixels may be driven innon-display mode for ⅓ of one frame period and G and B pixels may bedriven in non-display mode for ¼ of one frame period. That is, during anintermittent period, display periods of R, G, and B or non-displayperiod can be adjusted to a predetermined value (constant ratio) in suchaway as to obtain an optimum white balance.

To facilitate explanation, it is assumed that “1/N” means reducing 1 F(one field or one frame) to 1/N. However, it takes time to select onepixel row and to program current values (normally, one horizontalscanning period (1 H)) and error may result depending on scanningconditions. Thus, what has been described above is strictly for ease ofexplanation and is not meant to be restrictive. Also, N is not limitedto integers and may be non-integers such as 3.5. For ease ofexplanation, it is assumed herein that N represents integers unlessotherwise stated.

The EL element 15 may be illuminated for ⅕ of a period by programmingthe pixel 16 with an N=10 times larger current. The EL element 15illuminates 10/5=2 times more brightly. On the contrary, it is alsopossible to program an N=2 times larger current into the pixel 16 andilluminate the EL element 15 for ¼ of the period. The EL element 15illuminates 2/4=0.5 time more brightly. In short, the present inventionachieves display other than constant display ( 1/1, i.e.,non-intermittent drive) by using a current other than an N=1 timecurrent for current programming. Also, in a broad sense, the drivesystem turns off the current supplied to the EL element 15, at leastonce during one frame (or one field) period. Also, the drive system atleast achieves intermittent display by programming the pixel 16 with acurrent larger than a predetermined value.

A problem with an organic (inorganic) EL display is that it uses adisplay method basically different from that of an CRT or other displaywhich presents an image as a set of displayed lines using an electrongun. That is, the EL display holds the current (voltage) written into apixel for 1 F (one field or one frame) period. Thus, a problem is thatdisplaying moving pictures will result in blurred edges.

According to the present invention, current is passed through the ELelement 15 only for a period of 1 F/N, but current is not passed duringthe remaining period (1 F (N−1)/N). Let us consider a situation in whichthe drive system is implemented and one point on the screen is observed.

In this display condition, image data display and black display(non-illumination) are repeated every 1 F. That is, image data isdisplayed intermittently (intermittent display) in the temporal sense.When moving picture data are displayed intermittently, a good displaycondition is achieved without edge blur. In short, movie display closeto that of a CRT can be achieved. Although the present inventionimplements intermittent display, the main clock of the circuit does notdiffer from conventional ones. Thus, there is no increase in the powerconsumption of the circuit.

In the case of liquid crystal display panels, image data (voltage) to besubjected to light modulation is held in a liquid crystal layer.Therefore, for black insertion display, the data applied to the liquidcrystal layer must be rewritten. For that, the operation clock of thesource driver IC 14 must be speeded up and the image data and blackdisplay data must be applied alternately to the source signal lines 18.Thus, to achieve black insertion (intermittent display such as blackdisplay), it is necessary to speed up the main clock of the circuit.Also, an image memory is needed in order to elongate a time axis.

In the pixel configurations of the EL display panel according to thepresent invention shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 38, etc., image data is held inthe capacitor 19. Current which corresponds to the terminal voltage ofthe capacitor 19 is passed through the EL element 15. Thus, the imagedata is not held in a light modulating layer unlike in the case ofliquid crystal display panels.

The present invention controls the current passed through the EL element15 by simply turning on and off the switching transistor lid, thetransistor 11 e, and the like. That is, even if the current Iw flowingthrough the EL element 15 is turned off, the image data is held as it isin the capacitor 19. Thus, when the switching element 11 d is turned onthe next time, the current passed through the EL element 15 has the samevalue as the current flowing through the EL element 15 the previoustime. Even to achieve black insertion (intermittent display such asblack display), the present invention does not need to speed up the mainclock of the circuit. Also, it does not need to elongate a time axis,and thus requires no image memory. Besides, the EL element 15 respondsquickly, requiring a short time from application of current to lightemission. Thus, the present invention is suitable for movie display, andby using intermittent display, it can solve a problem with conventionaldata-holding display panels (liquid crystal display panels, EL displaypanels, etc.) in displaying moving pictures.

Furthermore, in the case of a large display apparatus with a largesource capacity, source current can be increased more than tenfold.Generally, if the source current value is increased N times, theconduction period of the gate signal line 17 b (the transistor 11 d) canbe set to 1 F/N. This makes it possible to apply the present inventionto television sets as well as to display apparatus for monitoring.

The drive method according to the present invention will be describedwith reference to drawings in more detail below. The parasiticcapacitance of the source signal line 18 is generated by the couplingcapacitance with adjacent source signal lines 18, buffer outputcapacitance of the source driver IC (circuit) 14, cross capacitancebetween the source signal line 18 and gate signal line 17, etc. Thisparasitic capacitance is normally 10 pF or larger. In the case ofvoltage driving, since voltage is applied to the source signal line 18from the source driver IC 14 at low impedance, more or less largeparasitic capacitance does not disturb driving.

However, in the case of current driving, especially image display at theblack level, the pixel capacitor 19 needs to be programmed with a minutecurrent of 20 nA or less. Thus, if parasitic capacitance larger than apredetermined value is generated, the parasitic capacitance cannot becharged and discharged during the time when one pixel row is programmed(normally within 1 H, but not limited to 1 H because two pixel rows maybe programmed simultaneously). If the parasitic capacitance cannot becharged and discharged within a period of 1 H, sufficient current cannotbe written into the pixel, resulting in inadequate resolution.

In the pixel configuration in FIG. 1, the programming current Iw flowsthrough the source signal line 18 during current programming as shown inFIG. 3(a). The current Iw flows through the transistor 11 a and voltageis set (programmed) in the capacitor 19 in such a way as to maintain thecurrent Iw. At this time, the transistor 11 d is open (off).

During a period when the current flows through the EL element 15, thetransistors 11 c and 11 b turn off and the transistor 11 d turns onasshown in FIG. 3(b). Specifically, a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied tothe gate signal line 17 a, turning off the transistors 11 b and 11 c. Onthe other hand, a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signalline 17 b, turning on the transistor 11 d.

Suppose a current 11 is N times the current which should normally flow(a predetermined value), the current flowing through the EL element 15in FIG. 3(b) is also Iw. Thus, the EL element 15 emits light 10 timesmore brightly that a predetermined value. In other words, as shown inFIG. 12, the larger the magnification N, the higher the displaybrightness B of the display panel. Thus, the magnification N and thebrightness are proportional to each other. Conversely, if the current isreduced to 1/N, the brightness is inversely proportional to themagnification.

If the transistor 11 d is kept on for a period 1/N the period duringwhich it is normally kept on (approximately 1 F) and is kept off duringthe remaining period (N−1)/N, the average brightness over the 1 F equalspredetermined brightness. This display condition closely resembles thedisplay condition under which a CRT is scanning a screen with anelectronic gun. The difference is that the area where images aredisplayed is 1/N of the entire screen which illuminates (where theentire screen is taken as 1) (in a CRT, what illuminates is one pixelrow—more precisely, one pixel).

According to the present invention, 1 F/N of the image display area 53moves from top to bottom of the screen 50 as shown in FIG. 13(b).According to the present invention, current flows through the EL element15 only for the period of 1 F/N, but current does not flow during theremaining period (1 F-(N−1)/N). Thus, the pixel is displayedintermittently. However, due to an afterimage, the entire screen appearsto be displayed uniformly to the human eye.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 13, the write pixel row 51 a isnon-illuminated 52 a. However, this is true only to the pixelconfigurations in FIGS. 1, 2, etc. In the pixel configuration of acurrent mirror shown in FIG. 38, etc., the write pixel row 51 a may beilluminated. However, description will be given herein citing mainly thepixel configuration in FIG. 1 for ease of explanation. A drive methodwhich involves driving a pixel intermittently by programming it with acurrent larger than the predetermined drive current Iw shown in FIGS.13, 16, etc. is referred to as N-fold pulse driving.

In this display condition, image data display and black display(non-illumination) are repeated every 1 F. That is, image data isdisplayed at intervals (intermittently) in the temporal sense. Liquidcrystal display panels (EL display panels other than that of the presentinvention), which hold data in pixels for a period of 1 F, cannot keepup with changes in image data during movie display, resulting is blurredmoving pictures (edge blur of images). Since the present inventiondisplays images intermittently, it can achieve a good display conditionwithout edge blur of images. In short, movie display close to that of aCRT can be achieved.

A timing chart is illustrated in FIG. 14. The pixel configurationreferred to in the present invention and the like is the one shown inFIG. 1 unless otherwise stated. However, needless to say, since thepixel configurations in FIGS. 38, 63, 64, 65, etc. can also achieveintermittent display, the present invention is not limited to FIG. 1.

As can be seen from FIG. 14, in each selected pixel row (the selectionperiod is designated as 1 H), when a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied tothe gate signal line 17 a (see FIG. 14(a)), a turn-off voltage (Vgh) isapplied to the gate signal line 17 b (see FIG. 14(b)). During thisperiod, current does not flow through the EL element 15(non-illumination mode). In anon-selected pixel row, a turn-on voltage(Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b and a turn-off voltage(Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17 a. During this period,current flows through the EL element 15 (illumination mode). In theillumination mode, the EL element 15 illuminates at a brightness (N-B) Ntimes the predetermined brightness and the illumination period is 1 F/N.Thus, the average display brightness of the display panel over 1 F isgiven by (N-B)×(1/N)=B (the predetermined brightness).

Incidentally, although the above description seemingly concerns whitedisplay, the brightness is reduced to 1/10 in black display as well.Thus, even if excessive brightness develops in image display, it is alsoreduced to 1/10, resulting in a proper image display.

FIG. 15 shows an example in which the operation in FIG. 14 is applied toeach pixel row (it illustrates signal waveforms of the gate signal lines17 a and 17 b for pixels). The turn-off voltage of gate signal line isdenoted by Vgh (high level) while waveforms of the turn-on voltage aredenoted by Vgl (low level). The subscripts such as (1) and (2) indicateselected pixel row numbers.

In FIG. 15, a gate signal line 17 a(1) is selected (Vgl voltage) and aprogramming current flows through the source signal line 18 in thedirection from the transistor 11 a in the selected pixel row to thesource driver circuit 14. Incidentally, the direction in which theprogramming current flows varies with the pixel configuration. If thedriver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 is a p-channel transistor, theprogramming current Iw flows form the pixel 16 to the source drivercircuit 16. If the driver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 is ann-channel transistor, the programming current Iw flows form the sourcedriver circuit 16 to the pixel 16.

The programming current is N times larger than a predetermined value(for ease of explanation, it is assumed that N=10. Of course, since thepredetermined value is a data current for use to display images, it isnot a fixed value unless in the case of white raster display). Themagnitude of the current programmed into each pixel 16 varies with thedisplay condition of natural images. Therefore, the capacitor 19 isprogrammed so that a 10 times larger current will flow through thetransistor 11 a. When the pixel row (1) is selected, in the pixelconfiguration shown in FIG. 1, a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied tothe gate signal line 17 b(1) and current does not flow through the ELelement 15.

After 1 H, a gate signal line 17 a(2) is selected (Vgl voltage) and aprogramming current flows through the source signal line 18 in thedirection from the transistor 11 a in the selected pixel row to thesource driver circuit 14. The programming current is N times larger thana predetermined value (for ease of explanation, it is assumed thatN=10). Therefore, the capacitor 19 is programmed so that 10 times largercurrent will flow through the transistor 11 a.

When the pixel row (2) is selected, in the pixel configuration shown inFIG. 1, a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17b(2) and current does not flow through the EL element 15. However, sincea turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17 a(1) anda turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b(1) ofthe pixel row (1), the EL element 15 illuminates.

After the next 1 H, agate signal line 17 a(3) is selected, a turn-offvoltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b(3), and currentdoes not flow through the EL element 15 in the pixel row (3). However,since a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal lines 17a(1) and (2) and a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signallines 17 b(1) and (2) in the pixel rows (1) and (2), the EL element 15illuminates.

Through the above operation, images are displayed in sync with asynchronization signal of 1 H. However, with the drive method in FIG.15, a 10 times larger current flows through the EL element 15. Thus, thedisplay screen 50 is 10 times brighter. Of course, it goes withoutsaying that for display at a predetermined brightness in this state, theprogramming current can be reduced to 1/10 (by controlling theprogramming current rather than reducing the intermittent period to1/10). However, a 10 times smaller current will cause a shortage ofwrite current due to parasitic capacitance and the like. To solve thisproblem, the basic idea of the present invention is to use an N timeslarger current for programming, insert a black screen 52 (intermittentdisplay), and thereby obtain a predetermined brightness.

Incidentally, the drive method according to the present invention causesa current larger than a predetermined current to flow through the ELelement 15, and thereby charges and discharges the parasitic capacitanceof the source signal line 18 sufficiently. That is, there is no need topass an N times larger current through the EL element 15. For example,it is conceivable to form a current path in parallel with the EL element15 (form a dummy EL element and use a shield film to prevent the dummyEL element from emitting light) and divide the flow of current betweenthe EL element 15 and the dummy EL element.

For example, when a signal current is 0.2 μA, a programming current isset to 2.2 μA and the current of 2.2 μA is passed through the transistor11 a. Then, the signal current of 0.2 μA may be passed through the ELelement 15 and 2 μA may be passed through the dummy EL element, forexample (see FIG. 136). That is, the dummy pixel row 281 in FIG. 27remains selected constantly. Incidentally, the dummy pixel row is eitherkept from emitting light or hidden from view by a shield film or thelike even if it emits light.

With the above configuration, by increasing the current passed throughthe source signal line 18 N times, it is possible to pass an N timeslarger current through the driver transistor 11 a and pass a currentsufficiently smaller than the N times larger current through the ELelement 15. As shown in FIG. 5, this method allows the entire displayarea 50 to be used as the image display area 53 without a non-displayarea 52.

FIG. 13(a) shows writing into the display image 50. In FIG. 13(a),reference numeral 51 a denotes a write pixel row. A programming currentis supplied to the source signal line 18 from the source driver IC 14.In FIG. 13 and the like, there is one pixel row into which current iswritten during a period of 1 H, but this is not restrictive. The periodmay be 0.5H or 2 Hs.

Also, although it has been stated that a programming current is writteninto the source signal line 18, the present invention is not limited tocurrent programming. The present invention may also use voltageprogramming (FIG. 62, etc.) which writes voltage into the source signalline 18. For example, a possible voltage drive method programs pixels 16by applying a voltage higher than needed for a predetermined brightnessto the source signal lines 18 and then obtains the predeterminedbrightness using intermittent display.

In FIG. 13(a), when the gate signal line 17 a is selected, the currentto be passed through the source signal line 18 is programmed into thetransistor 11 a. At this time, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 b, and current does not flow through the EL element 15.This is because when the transistor 11 d is on on the EL element 15, acapacitance component of the EL element 15 is visible from the sourcesignal line 18 and the capacitance prevents sufficient current frombeing programmed into the capacitor 19. Thus, to take the configurationshown in FIG. 1 as an example, the pixel row into which current iswritten is a non-illuminated area 52 as shown in FIG. 13(b).

Suppose an N times larger current is used for programming (it is assumedthat N=10 as described above), the screen becomes 10 times brighter.Thus, 90% of the display area 50 can be constituted of thenon-illuminated area 52. Thus, for example, if the number of horizontalscanning lines in the screen display area is 220 (S=220) in compliancewith QCIF, 22 horizontal scanning lines can compose a display area 53while 220−22=198 horizontal scanning lines can compose a non-displayarea 52. Generally speaking, if the number of horizontal scanning lines(number of pixel rows) is denoted by S, S/N of the entire areaconstitutes a display area 53, which is illuminated N times morebrightly. Then, the display area 53 is scanned in the vertical directionof the screen. Thus, S(N−1) IN of the entire area is a non-illuminatedarea 52. The non-illuminated area presents a black display (isnon-luminous). Also, the non-luminous area 52 is produced by turning offthe transistor lid. Incidentally, although it has been stated that thedisplay area 53 is illuminated N times more brightly, naturally thedisplay area 53 is adjusted to the value of N by brightness adjustmentand gamma adjustment.

In the above example, if a 10 times larger current is used forprogramming, the screen becomes 10 times brighter and 90% of the displayarea 50 can be constituted of the non-illuminated area 52. However, thisdoes not necessarily mean that R, G, and B pixels constitute thenon-illuminated area 52 in the same proportion. For example, ⅛ of the Rpixels, ⅙ of the G pixels, and 1/10 of the B pixels may constitute thenon-illuminated area 52 with different colors making up differentproportions.

It is possible to allow the non-illuminated area 52 (or illuminated area53) to be adjusted separately among R, G, and B. For that, it isnecessary to provide separate gate signal lines 17 b for R, G, and B.However, allowing R, G, and B to be adjusted separately makes itpossible to adjust white balance, making it easy to adjust color balancefor each gradation (see FIG. 41).

As shown in FIG. 13(b), pixel rows including the write pixel row 51 acompose a non-illuminated area 52 while an area of S/N (1 F/N in thetemporal sense) above the write pixel row 51 a compose a display area 53(when write scans are performed from top to bottom of the screen. Whenthe screen is scanned from bottom to top, the areas change places).Regarding the display condition of the screen, a strip of the displayarea 53 moves from top to bottom of the screen.

In FIG. 13, one display area 53 moves from top to bottom of the screen.At a low frame rate, the movement of the display area 53 is recognizedvisually. It tends to be recognized easily especially when a user closeshis/her eyes or moves his/her head up and down.

To deal with this problem, the display area 53 can be divided into aplurality of parts as shown in FIG. 16. If the total area of the divideddisplay area is S(N−1)/N, the brightness is equal to the brightness inFIG. 13 (where, S is an effective display area 50 of the display panel).Incidentally, there is no need to divide the display area 53 equally.For example, the display area may be divided into a display area 53 awith an area of 1, display area 53 b with an area of 2, display area 53c with an area of 1, and display area 53 d with an area of 4. Also, thedivided display areas do not need to be exactly equal in size to dividednon-display areas 52.

Needless to say, it is also possible to make the average size of thedisplay area 53 over a few frames (fields) equal to a target size. Forexample, to make the size of the display area 53 equal to S/10, apossible drive method involves setting the size of the display area 53to S/10 in the first frame (field), setting the size of the display area53 to S/20 in the second frame (field), setting the size of the displayarea 53 to S/20 in the third frame (field), and setting the size of thedisplay area 53 to S/5 in the fourth frame (field) to obtain the desireddisplay area (display brightness) of S/10 when averaged over the fourframes (fields). Also, the average display area over a few frames(fields) may be made equal among the RGB colors for a period of L.However, preferably, the few frames (fields) as referred to above do notexceed four frames (fields). Otherwise, flickering may occur dependingon displayed images.

Incidentally, one frame or one field as referred to herein may beregarded to be synonymous with an image refresh period of the pixels 16or the period required for the screen 50 to be scanned from top tobottom (from bottom to top).

Also, the average display area over a few frames (fields) may be madedifferent among the RGB colors for a period of L to achieve anappropriate white balance. This drive method is effective especiallywhen emission efficiency varies among R, G, and B. Also, the number K ofdivisions may be varied among R, G, and B. G, in particular, is visuallyconspicuous, and thus it is useful to increase the number of divisionsof G over R and B.

Incidentally, it has been stated in the above example for ease ofexplanation that the display area 53 is divided. However, dividing anarea is tantamount to dividing a period (time). Thus, in FIG. 1, sincethe ON time of the transistor 11 d is divided, dividing an area istantamount to dividing a period (time).

Dividing the display area 53 reduces flickering of the screen. Thus, aflicker-free good image display can be achieved. Incidentally, thedisplay area 53 may be divided more finely. However, the more finely thedisplay area 53 is divided, the poorer the movie display performancebecomes. Also, the frame rate of image display can be lowered, resultingin reduced power consumption. For example, if the non-display area 52 isundivided, flickering occurs when the frame rate falls below 45 Hz.However, if the non-display area 52 is divided into six or more parts,flickering does not occur until the frame rate falls below 20 Hz.

FIG. 17 shows voltage waveforms of gate signal lines 17 and emissionbrightness of the EL element. As can be seen from FIG. 17, a period (1F/N) during which the gate signal line 17 b is set to Vgl is dividedinto a plurality of parts (K parts). That is, a period of 1 F/(K·N)during which the gate signal line 17 b is set to Vgl repeats K times. Ifthe period of 1 F/(K*N) is repeated K times, the total of illuminationperiods 53 is 1 F/N. This reduces flickering and implements imagedisplay at a low frame rate.

Preferably, the number of divisions is variable. For example, when theuser presses a brightness adjustment switch or turns a brightnessadjustment knob, the value of K may be changed in response. Also, theuser may be allowed to adjust brightness. Alternatively, the value of Kmay be changed manually or automatically depending on images or data tobe displayed.

Also, the number of divisions may be changed according to condition ofimage data. If the image data is moving pictures, by leaving thenon-illuminated area 52 undivided, it is possible to avoid blurredmoving pictures. In the case of moving pictures, since images changeconstantly, flickering does not occur even if the frame rate is lowered.If the image data is still pictures, by dividing the non-illuminatedarea 52 into multiple parts, it is possible to avoid flickering even ata low frame rate. Thus, by judging in real time whether the image datais moving pictures or still pictures and controlling the number ofdivisions of the non-illuminated area 52 based on the result ofjudgment, it is possible to achieve high quality display without blurredmoving pictures at low power consumption.

If the timing of a change from a state in which a turn-on voltage (Vgl)is applied to the gate signal line 17 a to a state in which a turn-offvoltage (Vgh) is applied coincides with the timing of a change from astate in which a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signalline 17 b to a state in which a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied,variations tend to occur in retained images. This is believed to be dueto discharge or leakage of the voltage programmed in the capacitor 19,which in turn is caused by difference in on/off timing of thetransistors 11 b and 11 d depending on their characteristics.

To deal with this problem, preferably a write pixel row 51 is sandwichedby non-display areas 53 as illustrated in FIG. 66. It is preferable toprogram the write pixel row with current (voltage), apply a turn-onvoltage to the gate signal line 17 b of the pixel row after onehorizontal scanning period, and thereby pass current through the ELelement 15. Preferably, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signalline 17 b of each pixel row at least 3 μsec after applying a turn-onvoltage to the gate signal line 17 a which selects the pixel row.Preferably, the pixel rows before and after the write pixel rows 51 areincluded in the non-display area 52 as illustrated in FIG. 66 if thereis no restriction on the timing to pass current through the EL element15.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the above drive method.FIG. 67 assumes the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 for ease ofexplanation.

In FIG. 67(a), a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signalline 17 a for one horizontal scanning period (1 H). At the point when aturn-on voltage is removed and a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 a, a turn-off voltage continues to be applied to the gatesignal line 17 b. A turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signalline 17 b after a lapse of time A as illustrated in FIG. 67(a).Preferably, the period A is 1 μsec or longer. More preferably, theperiod A is 3 μsec or longer.

By continuing to apply a turn-off voltage to the gate signal line 17 bwhile a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a andapplying a turn-on voltage to the gate signal line 17 b when a turn-offvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a in place of the turn-onvoltage and the transistors 11 b and 11 c of the pixel 16 in FIG. 1 areturned off completely as shown in FIG. 67(a), it is possible to reducevariations in the current programmed into the pixels 16 and achieveproper image display.

In FIG. 67(b), a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signalline 17 a for a period shorter than one horizontal scanning period (1H). At the point when a turn-on voltage is removed and a turn-offvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a, a turn-off voltagecontinues to be applied to the gate signal line 17 b. A turn-on voltage(Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b after a lapse of time C asillustrated in FIG. 67(b). Preferably, the period C is 1 μsec or longer.More preferably, the period C is 3 μsec or longer.

By continuing to apply a turn-off voltage to the gate signal line 17 bwhile a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a andapplying a turn-on voltage to the gate signal line 17 b when a turn-offvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a in place of the turn-onvoltage and the transistors 11 b and 11 c of the pixel 16 in FIG. 1 areturned off completely as shown in FIG. 67(b), it is possible to reducevariations in the current programmed into the pixels 16 and achieveproper image display.

In FIG. 67(c), a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signalline 17 a for one horizontal scanning period (1 H). At the point when aturn-on voltage is removed and a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 a, a turn-off voltage continues to be applied to the gatesignal line 17 b.

Furthermore, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 bfor 1 H after a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line17 a.

By continuing to apply a turn-off voltage to the gate signal line 17 bwhile a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a andapplying a turn-on voltage to the gate signal line 17 b when a turn-offvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a in place of the turn-onvoltage and the transistors 11 b and 11 c of the pixel 16 in FIG. 1 areturned off completely as shown in FIG. 67(c), it is possible to reducevariations in the current programmed into the pixels 16 and achieveproper image display.

Incidentally, although the above example has been described by citingthe pixel configuration in FIG. 1 and the like, needless to say, theabove example is also applicable to the pixel configurations shown inFIGS. 63, 64, 65, etc.

Also, although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 17 and the likethat a period during which the gate signal line 17 b is set to Vg1 (theperiod of 1 F/N during which the transistor 11 d is on in the case ofFIG. 1) is divided into a plurality of parts (the number of divisions isK) and that a period of 1 F/(K*N) during which the gate signal line 17 bis set to Vg1 is repeated K times, this is not restrictive. A period of1 F/(K*N) may be repeated L (L≠K) times. In other words, the presentinvention displays the display screen 50 by controlling the period(time) during which current is passed through the EL elements 15. Thus,the idea of repeating the 1 F/(K*N) period L (L≠K) times is included inthe technical idea of the present invention. Also, it is not strictlynecessary to divide a period into equal parts. Also, the control methodof L, period of L, and cycle of L may be varied among R, G, and B.

By varying the value of L, the brightness of the display screen 50 canbe changed digitally. For example, there is a 50% change of brightness(contrast) between L=2 and L=3. By changing the period of Lsequentially, it is possible to adjust the brightness of the screen 50linearly in proportion to the period of L. Even if the brightness isadjusted, the number of gradations is maintained. Incidentally, theperiod of L is not limited to integral multiples of one horizontalscanning period (1 H). Needless to say, 5/2 Hs or a period shorter than1 H such as ½ H or ⅛ H may be used for operations and control.

In the example described above, the display screen 50 is turned on andoff (illuminated and non-illuminated) as the current delivered to the ELelement 15 is switched on and off. That is, approximately equal currentis passed through the transistor 11 a multiple times using electriccharges held in the capacitor 19. The present invention is not limitedto this. For example, the display screen 50 may be turned on and off(illuminated and non-illuminated) by charging and discharging thecapacitor 19 (See embodiments shown in FIGS. 32, 33, 53, 54 etc.).

FIG. 18 shows voltage waveforms applied to gate signal lines 17 toachieve the image display condition shown in FIG. 16. FIG. 18 differsfrom FIG. 15 in the operation of the gate signal line 17 b (in theoperation of the transistor lid in FIGS. 1, 2, 64, and 65; or operationof the switch 631 in FIG. 63. Although the switch 631 is not controlledvia the gate signal line 17 b, those skilled in the art can easilyperform on/off control of the switch 631, and thus description thereofwill be omitted.) The gate signal line 17 b is turned on and off (Vgland Vgh) as many times as there are screen divisions. FIG. 18 is thesame as FIG. 15 in other respects, and thus description thereof will beomitted.

Since black display on EL display apparatus corresponds to completenon-illumination, contrast does not lower unlike in the case ofintermittent display on liquid crystal display panels. Also, with theconfigurations in FIG. 1, intermittent display can be achieved by simplyturning on and off the transistor 11 d. With the configurations in FIGS.38, and 51, intermittent display can be achieved by simply turning onand off the transistor element 11 e. In this way, the same image displaycan be reproduced even if the pixel 16 is turned on and off one or moretimes because image data is stored in the capacitor 19 (the number ofgradations is infinite because analog values are used). That is, theimage data is held in each pixel 16 for a period of 1 F (until the imagedata is rewritten in the next frame). Whether to deliver a current whichcorresponds to the stored image data to the EL element 15 is controlledby controlling the transistors 11 d and 11 e or the switch 631.

The drive method described above is not limited to a current-driven typeand can be applied to a voltage-driven type as well. That is, in aconfiguration in which the current passed through the EL element 15 isstored in each pixel, intermittent driving is implemented by switchingon and off the current path between the driver transistor 11 and ELelement 15. Needless to say, intermittent driving can be implemented,for example, through control of the transistor 11 d in FIG. 43 ortransistor 11 e in FIG. 51.

It is important to maintain the terminal voltage of the capacitor 19programmed with current or voltage. This is because if the terminalvoltage of the capacitor 19 changes (charge/discharge) during one field(frame) period, flickering occurs when the screen brightness changes andthe frame rate lowers. The current passed through the EL element 15 bythe transistor 11 a must be higher than 65%. More specifically, if theinitial current written into the pixel 16 and passed through the ELelement 15 is taken as 100%, the current passed through the EL element15 just before it is written into the pixel 16 in the next frame (field)must not fall below 65%. The capacitance of the capacitor 19 andturn-off characteristics of the voltage-holding transistor 11 b aredetermined in such a way as to satisfy the above conditions.

With the pixel configuration shown in FIG. 1, etc., there is nodifference in the number of transistors 11 in a single pixel betweenwhen an intermittent display is created and when an intermittent displayis not created. That is, by controlling the transistor 11 d, propercurrent programming is achieved with the pixel configuration left as itis by removing the effect of parasitic capacitance of the source signalline 18. Besides, movie display close to that of a CRT is achieved.

Also, since the operation clock of the gate driver circuit 12 issignificantly slower than the operation clock of the source drivercircuit 14, there is no need to upgrade the main clock of the circuit(the same clock can be applied to either of the cases where intermittentoperation is done or not.) Besides, the value of N or K can be changedeasily. This can be achieved simply through on/off control of thetransistor 11 b and the like.

Incidentally, the image display direction (image writing direction) maybe from top to bottom of the screen in the first field (frame), and frombottom to top of the screen in the second field (frame). That is, anupward direction and downward direction may be repeated alternately. Byswitching the scanning direction in this way, it is possible to reduceflickering even at a low frame rate.

Alternatively, it is possible to use a downward direction in the firstfield (frame), turn the entire screen into black display (non-display)once, and use an upward direction in the second field (frame). It isalso possible to turn the entire screen into black display (non-display)once. It is also possible to turn the entire screen into black display(non-display) once, and then rewrite images from top to bottom of thescreen. That is, the entire screen is turned into black display afterrewriting and displaying images. Turning the entire screen into blackdisplay in this way improves movie display performance.

In the description of the drive method according to the presentinvention, it is stated for ease of explanation that the writingdirection on the screen is from top to bottom or from bottom to top.However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is alsopossible to fix the writing direction on the screen to a top-to-bottomdirection or bottom-to-top direction and move the non-display area 52from top to bottom in the first field (frame), and from bottom to top inthe second field (frame). Alternatively, it is possible to divide aframe into three fields and assign the first field to R, the secondfield to G, and the third field to B so that three fields compose asingle frame. It is also possible to display R, G, and B in turns byswitching among them every horizontal scanning period (1 H) (see FIGS.75 to 82, etc.) The items mentioned above also apply to other examplesof the present invention. Needless to say, the above items similarlyapply to other examples of the present invention.

The non-display area 52 need not be totally non-illuminated. Weak lightemission or dim image display will not be a problem in practical use.That is, non-display area (non-illuminated area) 52 should be regardedto be an area which has a lower display brightness than the imagedisplay area 53. It has been shown analytically that if the brightnessof the non-display area 52 is set at or below ⅓ the brightness of thedisplay area 53, proper image display can be achieved without loweringmovie display performance. In the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 and thelike, brightness of ⅓ or below can be achieved by increasing the turn-onvoltage (Vgl) of the transistor 11 d in such a way that the transistor11 d will not turn on completely. Also, the non-display area 52 may bean area which does not display one or two colors out of R, G, and B.

If the brightness of the display area 53 is kept at a predeterminedvalue, the larger the display area 53, the brighter the display screen50. For example, when the brightness of the image display area 53 is 100(nt), if the percentage of the display screen 50 accounted for by thedisplay area 53 changes from 10% to 20%, the brightness of the screen isdoubled. Thus, by varying the proportion of the display area 53 in theentire screen 50, it is possible to vary the display brightness of thescreen. The present invention provides a system which controls imagedisplay by controlling the size of the display area 52 with respect tothe display 50.

The size of the display area 53 can be specified freely by controllingdata pulses (ST2) sent to the shift register circuit 61 (See FIG. 6).Also, by varying the input timing and period of the data pulses, it ispossible to switch between the display condition shown in FIG. 16 anddisplay condition shown in FIG. 13 (the size of the non-display area 52is made different between FIG. 13 and FIG. 16 for ease of explanation).If the sizes of the non-display areas 52 are made equal, the samebrightness can be obtained (provided the same reference current areapplied to the source driver IC (described later)). Increasing thenumber of data pulses in one 1 F period thereby extending the displayarea 52 makes the screen 50 brighter and decreasing it makes the screen50 dimmer. Also, continuous application of the data pulses brings on thedisplay condition shown in FIG. 13 while intermittent input of the datapulses brings on the display condition shown in FIG. 16. Thus, thebrightness of image display can be controlled easily by simplycontrolling the data pulses applied to the shift registers 61.

FIG. 19(a) shows a brightness adjustment scheme used when the displayarea 53 is continuous as in FIG. 13. The display brightness of thescreen 50 in FIG. 19(a 1) is the brightest, the display brightness ofthe screen 50 in FIG. 19(a 2) is the second brightest, and displaybrightness of the screen 50 in FIG. 19(a 3) is the dimmest. Changes fromFIG. 19(a 1) to FIG. 19(a 3) (or vice versa) can be achieved easily bycontrolling the shift register circuit 61 and the like of the gatedriver circuit 12 as described above. In this case, there is no need tovary the Vdd voltage (anode voltage, or the like) in FIG. 1. There is noneed to vary the magnitude of the programming current or programmingvoltage outputted from the source driver circuit 14, either. That is,the brightness of the screen 50 can be varied without changing the powersupply voltage or video signal.

Also, in the process of change from FIG. 19(a 1) to FIG. 19(a 3), thegamma characteristics of the screen do not change at all. Thus, thecontrast and gradation characteristics of the display screen aremaintained regardless of the brightness of the screen 50. This is aneffective feature of the present invention.

In brightness adjustment of a conventional screen, low brightness of thescreen 50 results in poor gradation performance. That is, even if 64gradations can be displayed in a high-brightness display, less than halfthe gradations can be displayed in a low-brightness display. Incontrast, the drive method according to the present invention does notdepend on the display brightness of the screen and can display up to 64gradations, which is the highest.

FIG. 19(b) shows a brightness adjustment scheme used when the displayareas 53 are scattered as in FIG. 16. The display brightness of thescreen 50 in FIG. 19(b 1) is the brightest, the display brightness ofthe screen 50 in FIG. 19(b 2) is the second brightest, and displaybrightness of the screen 50 in FIG. 19(b 3) is the dimmest. Changes fromFIG. 19(b 1) to FIG. 19(b 3) (or vice versa) can be achieved easily bycontrolling the shift register circuit 61 of the gate driver circuit 12and the like as described above. By scattering the display areas 53 asshown in FIG. 19(b), it is possible to eliminate flickering even at alow frame rate.

To eliminate flickering at an even lower frame rate, the display areas53 can be scattered more finely as shown in FIG. 19(c). However, thislowers movie display performance. Thus, the drive method in FIG. 19(a)is suitable for moving pictures. The drive method in FIG. 19(c) issuitable when it is desired to reduce power consumption by displayingstill pictures. Switching from FIG. 19(a) to FIG. 19(c) can be doneeasily by controlling the shift register circuit 61.

Although non-display areas 52 are formed at equal intervals in FIG. 19,this is not restrictive. Needless to say, it is also possible to form acontinuous display area 53 in half the area of the screen 50, andalternate display areas 53 and non-display areas 52 at equal intervalsin the rest of the screen 50 as shown in FIG. 19(c 1).

FIG. 20 illustrates another example of the drive method according to thepresent invention. FIG. 20 shows a system which selects multiple pixelrows simultaneously, charges and discharges parasitic capacitance andthe like of the source signal line 18 using the programming currentwhich drives the multiple pixel rows, and thereby alleviate shortages ofwrite current greatly. Since a plurality of pixel rows are selectedsimultaneously, drive current per pixel can be reduced. Thus, it ispossible to reduce the current flowing through the EL element 15. Forease of explanation, it is assumed, for example that N=10 and that thenumber M of pixel rows selected simultaneously is 5 (the current passedthrough the source signal line 18 is increased tenfold. Since five pixelrows are selected simultaneously, ⅕ of the programming current flowsthrough each pixel).

According to the invention described with reference to FIG. 20, M pixelrows are selected simultaneously. A current N times larger than apredetermined current is applied to the source signal line 18 from thesource driver IC 14. A current N/M times larger than the current passedthrough the EL element 15 is programmed into each pixel. To illuminatethe EL element 15 at a predetermined emission brightness, current ispassed through the EL element 15 for a duration of M/N the duration ofone frame (one field) This makes it possible to charge and dischargeparasitic capacitance of the source signal line 18 sufficiently,resulting in a sufficient resolution at the predetermined emissionbrightness.

Incidentally, although in the description of the drive method accordingto the present invention, it is stated for ease of explanation that acurrent N times larger than a predetermined current is passed throughthe source signal line, this is not restrictive. The present inventionis characterized in that a signal (current or voltage) outputted fromthe source driver circuit 14 is divided into multiple parts, which areapplied to pixel rows selected simultaneously (it is all right if theyare selected not exactly at the same time). If the driver transistors 11a in the pixels 16 selected simultaneously and connected to the samesource signal line 18 have uniform characteristics, the currentoutputted from the source driver circuit 14 and divided by the number Mof pixel rows selected simultaneously is programmed into the pixels 16.

That is, current is passed through the EL elements 15 only for a periodequal to M/N of one frame (one field), but current is not passed duringthe remaining period (1 F (N−1) M/N). In this display condition, imagedata display and black display (non-illumination) are repeated every 1F. That is, image data is displayed intermittently in the temporal sense(intermittent display). Thus, a good display condition is achievedwithout edge blur. Also, since the source signal line 18 is driven by anN times larger current, it is not affected by parasitic capacitance.Thus, this method can accommodate high-resolution display panels.

Incidentally, it has been stated in the above example for ease ofexplanation that M pixel rows are selected simultaneously and that an Ntimes larger current is outputted from the source driver circuit 14.However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is alsopossible to select M pixel rows simultaneously and output the originalcurrent as it is from the source driver circuit 14. In that case, thepresent invention is implemented with the brightness of the displayscreen 50 reduced. Of course, the brightness of the screen 50 can beincreased if 2 times, 2.5 times, or 5.25 times larger current isoutputted from the source driver circuit 14.

Although it has been stated in the above example for ease of explanationthat M pixel rows are selected simultaneously and that each pixel 16 isilluminated for a period of M/N, the present invention is not limited tothis. It is also possible to select M pixel rows simultaneously andoutput M/10 times, M/5 times, or M/2.5 times larger current from thesource driver circuit 14. That is, the display period can be set freelyindependent of N. Increasing the display period increases the brightnessof the screen 50 and decreasing the display period decreases thebrightness of the screen 50. That is, the present invention whichselects M pixel rows simultaneously can also control or adjust thebrightness of the screen 50 easily by controlling the display period.

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram illustrating drive waveforms whichimplement the drive method shown in FIG. 20. In the voltage waveforms ofthe gate signal lines 17, the turn-off voltage is Vgh (H level) andturn-on voltage is Vgl (L level). The subscripts to signal lines (suchas (1), (2), and (3)) indicate pixel row numbers. Incidentally, a QCIFpanel has 220 pixel rows and a VGA panel has 480 pixel rows.

In FIG. 21, a gate signal line 17 a(1) is selected (a Vgl voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 a of the pixel row (1)) and aprogramming current flows through the source signal line 18 in thedirection from the transistor 11 a in the selected pixel row to thesource driver circuit 14 (in the case of FIG. 1). For ease ofexplanation, it is assumed here that the write pixel row 51 a is the(1)-th pixel row in FIG. 20.

The programming current flowing through the source signal line 18 is Ntimes larger than a predetermined value (for ease of explanation, it isassumed that N=10. Of course, since the predetermined value is a datacurrent for use to display images, it is not a fixed value unless in thecase of white raster display or the like. The current value to beprogrammed in each pixel 16 by the image data varies. It is also assumedthat five pixel rows are selected simultaneously (M=5). Therefore,ideally the capacitor 19 of one pixel is programmed so that a twice(N/M= 10/5=2) larger current will flow through the transistor 11 a.

When the write pixel row is the (1)-th pixel row, the gate signal lines17 a of pixel rows (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) are selected as shown inFIG. 21. That is, the switching transistors 11 b and the transistors 11c in the pixel rows (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) are on. Also, theprogramming current flows through the driver transistors 11 a of pixelrows (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5). As can be seen from FIG. 21, in the5th H, a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 a of thepixel rows (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) while a turn-off voltage isapplied to the gate signal lines 17 b of the pixel rows (1), (2), (3),(4), and (5). Thus, the switching transistors 11 d in the pixel rows(1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) are off and current does not flow throughthe EL elements 15 in the corresponding pixel rows. That is, the ELelements 15 are in non-illumination mode 52.

Incidentally, it has been stated for ease of explanation that when aselection voltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 a of pixel rows(pixel rows (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) in the above description), aturn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 b and thetransistors 11 d of the pixel rows (pixel rows (1), (2), (3), (4), and(5)) are turned off. However, as illustrated in FIG. 20, it goes withoutsaying that the transistors 11 d of pixel rows other than the selectedpixel rows may be turned off. In FIG. 20, the transistors 11 d in a widerange including the write pixel rows 51 are turned off to form anon-display area 52. Needless to say, the non-display area may bescattered or undivided as described with reference to FIG. 19.

According to the present invention, in the pixel configurations in FIGS.1, 2, etc., it is important to cut off the current paths for the ELelements 15 when finally holding the programming current in the pixelsat least in the pixel rows being programmed with current. However, inthe case of current-mirror pixel configurations in FIG. 38, the aboveitems are not restrictions.

According to the present invention, it is important that one or all ofthe pixel rows selected simultaneously (with a turn-on voltage appliedto the gate signal lines 17 a) to write image data are put intonon-display mode. This is because putting one or more pixel rows intodisplay mode lowers the resolution of displayed images.

Ideally, the transistors 11 a in the five pixels deliver a current ofIw×2 each to the source signal line 18 (i.e., a current ofIw×2×N=Iw×2×5=Iw×10 flows through the source signal line 18. Thus, if apredetermined voltage Iw flows when the N-fold pulse driving accordingto the present invention is not used, a current 10 times larger than Iwflows through the source signal line 18).

Through the above operation (drive method), the capacitor 19 of eachpixel row (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5) is programmed with a twice largerprogramming current. For ease of understanding, it is assumed here thatthe transistors 11 a have equal characteristics (Vt and S value).

Since five pixel rows are selected simultaneously (K=5), five drivertransistors 11 a operate. That is, 10/5=2 times larger current flowsthrough the transistor 11 a per pixel. The total programming current ofthe transistors 11 a of the five pixels 16 flows through the sourcesignal line 18. For example, if a current written into the write pixelrow 51 a is Iw, a current equal to Iw×10 is passed through the sourcesignal line 18. The write pixel rows 51 b (the pixel rows (2), (3), (4),and (5) when the pixel row (1) is being programmed with current) intowhich image data is written later than the write pixel row (1) areauxiliary pixel rows used to increase the amount of current delivered tothe source signal line 18. However, there is no problem because regularimage data is written into the write pixel rows 51 b later (see FIG. 20.It is assumed that 51 a in FIG. 20 corresponds to the pixel row (1)while 51 b corresponds to the pixel rows (2), (3), (4), and (5)).

Thus, the four pixel rows 51 b provide the same display as the pixel row51 a during a period of 1 H. Consequently, at least the write pixel row51 a and the pixel rows 51 b selected to increase current are put intonon-display mode 52 (see FIG. 20(b)). Needless to say, however, in thecurrent-mirror pixel configuration in FIG. 38 or other pixelconfigurations for voltage programming, the pixel row 51 a may be indisplay mode.

After 1 H, the gate signal line 17 a(1) becomes deselected and a turn-onvoltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b in FIG. 21. Seethe waveforms of the gate signal lines in the 6th H. At the same time,the gate signal line 17 a(6) is selected (a Vgl voltage is applied) andprogramming current flows through the source signal line 18 in thedirection from the transistor 11 a in the selected pixel row (6) to thesource driver circuit 14. Through this operation, regular image data isheld in the pixel row (1). That is, the programming current for thepixel row (1) is determined definitely and a programming current flowsthrough the pixel row (6).

After the next 1 H, the gate signal line 17 a(2) becomes deselected anda turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b of thepixel row (2) (see the 7th H in FIG. 21). At the same time, the gatesignal line 17 a(7) is selected (a Vgl voltage is applied) and aprogramming current flows through the source signal line 18 in thedirection from the transistor 11 a in the selected pixel row (7) to thesource driver circuit 14. Through this operation, regular image data isheld in the pixel row (2). The entire screen 50 is redrawn as it isscanned by shifting pixel rows one by one through the above operations.

With the drive method in FIG. 20, since each pixel is programmed with atwice larger current (voltage), ideally the emission brightness of theEL element 15 is two times higher (however, the FIG. “two” here is onlyaccording to one example). Thus, the brightness of the display screen istwice higher than a predetermined value. To equalize this brightnesswith the predetermined brightness, an area which includes the writepixel rows 51 and which is half as large as the display screen 50 can beturned into a non-display area 52 as illustrated in FIG. 16.

As is the case with FIG. 13, when one display area 53 moves from top tobottom of the screen as shown in FIG. 20, the movement of the displayarea 53 is recognized visually if a low frame rate is used. It tends tobe recognized easily especially when the user closes his/her eyes ormoves his/her head up and down. To deal with this problem, the displayarea 53 can be divided into a plurality of parts as illustrated in FIG.22 (the number of divisions is K).

FIG. 23 shows voltage waveforms applied to gate signal lines 17. FIG. 21differs from FIG. 23 basically in the operation of the gate signal lines17 b. The gate signal line 17 b is turned on and off (Vgl and Vgh) asmany times as there are screen divisions. The rest is almost the same asFIG. 21 or can be known by analogy, and thus description thereof will beomitted.

As described above, dividing the display area 53 reduces flickering ofthe screen. Thus, a flicker-free good image display can be achieved.Incidentally, the display area 53 may be divided more finely. The morefinely the display area 53 is divided, the less flickering occurs. Sincethe EL element 15 is highly responsive, even if it is turned on and offat intervals shorter than 5 μsec, there is no lowering of the displaybrightness.

With the drive method according to the present invention, the EL element15 can be turned on and off by turning on and off a signal applied tothe gate signal line 17 b. Thus, a clock frequency can be controlledusing a low frequency on the order of KHz. Also, it does not need animage memory or the like in order to insert a black screen (insertanon-display area 52). Thus, the drive circuit or method according tothe present invention can be implemented at low costs.

FIG. 24 shows a case in which two pixel rows are selectedsimultaneously. It was found that on a display panel formed bylow-temperature polysilicon technology, a method in which two pixel rowswere selected simultaneously provided image display with out any problemon a practical level. Probably this is because driver transistors 11 ain adjacent pixels had very similar characteristics. In laser annealing,good results were obtained when laser stripes were irradiated inparallel with the source signal line 18 (see FIG. 7 and the explanationthereof).

This is because that part of a semiconductor film which is annealedsimultaneously has uniform characteristics. That is, the semiconductorfilm is created uniformly within an irradiation range of laser stripesand the Vt, mobility, and S value of the transistors which use thesemiconductor film are almost uniform. Thus, if a striped laser shot ismoved in parallel with the source signal line 18 (see FIG. 7), pixels (apixel column, i.e., pixels arranged vertically on the screen) along thesource signal line 18 take on almost equal characteristics. Therefore,if a plurality of pixel rows are turned on simultaneously for currentprogramming, the current obtained by dividing the programming current bythe number of selected pixels are programmed almost uniformly into thepixels This makes it possible to program a current close to a targetvalue and achieve uniform display. Thus, it is possible to achieveproper image display using an array board 71 built along the directionof a laser shot and the drive method described with reference to FIG. 24and the like.

As described above, if the direction of a laser shot is made to coincideapproximately with the direction of the source signal line 18, thecharacteristics of the pixel transistors 11 a arranged vertically becomealmost uniform. This makes it possible to program pixels accurately witha target voltage, and thus achieve proper image display (even if thecharacteristics of the pixel transistors 11 a arranged horizontally arenot uniform). The above operation is performed in sync with 1 H (onehorizontal scanning period) by shifting selected pixel rows one by oneor by shifting two or more selected pixel rows at once.

Incidentally, according to the present invention, the direction of thelaser shot does not always need to be parallel with the direction of thesource signal line 18. This is because even if the laser shot isdirected at angles to the source signal line 18, pixel transistors 11 aplaced along one source signal line 18 can be made to take on almostequal characteristics. Thus, directing a laser shot in parallel with thesource signal line 18 means bringing a pixel vertically adjacent to anarbitrary pixel along the source signal line 18 into a laser irradiationrange. Besides, a source signal line 18 generally constitutes wiringwhich transmits programming current or voltage used as a video signal.

Incidentally, in the examples of the present invention a write pixel rowis shifted every 1 H, but this is not restrictive. Pixel rows may beshifted every 2 Hs. Also, more than two pixel rows may be shifted at atime. Also, pixel rows may be shifted at desired time intervals. Theshifting interval may be varied according to locations on the screen.For example, the shifting interval may be decreased in the middle of thescreen, and increased at the top and bottom of the screen. Also, theshifting interval may be varied on a frame-by-frame basis.

Also, it is not strictly necessary to select consecutive pixel rows. Forexample, every second pixel row may be selected. Specifically, apossible drive method involves selecting the first and third pixel rowsin the first horizontal scanning period, the second and fourth pixelrows in the second horizontal scanning period, the third and fifth pixelrows in the third horizontal scanning period, and the fourth and sixthpixel rows in the fourth horizontal scanning period. Of course, a drivemethod which involves selecting the first, third, and fifth pixel rowsin the first horizontal scanning period also belongs to the technicalcategory of the present invention. Also, one in every few pixel rows maybe selected.

Incidentally, the combination of the direction of a laser shot andselection of multiple pixel rows is not limited to the pixelconfigurations in FIGS. 1, 2, 32, 63, 64, 65, etc., but, needless tosay, it is also applicable to other current-driven pixel configurationssuch as the current-mirror pixel configurations in FIGS. 38, 42, 50,etc. Also, it can be applied to voltage-driven pixel configurations inFIGS. 43, 51, 54, 62, etc. This is because as long as transistors inupper and lower parts of the pixel have equal characteristics, voltageprogramming can be performed properly using the voltage value applied tothe same source signal line 18.

As described above, the drive method according to the present inventionin FIG. 21 selects five pixel rows simultaneously. FIGS. 24 and 25 showan example of the drive method which selects two pixel rowssimultaneously. In FIG. 24, when the write pixel row is the (1)-th pixelrow, the gate signal lines 17 a (1) and (2) are selected (see FIG. 25).That is, the switching transistors 11 b and the transistors 11 c in thepixel rows (1) and (2) are on. Also, when a turn-on voltage is appliedto the gate signal lines 17 a, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal lines 17 b.

Thus, in the 1st and 2nd Hs, the switching transistors 11 d in the pixelrows (1) and (2) are off and current does not flow through the ELelements 15 in the corresponding pixel rows. That is, the EL elements 15are in non-illumination mode 52. Incidentally, in FIG. 24, the displayarea 53 is divided into five parts to reduce flickering.

Ideally, the transistors 11 a in the two pixel rows deliver a current ofIw×5 each to the source signal line 18 (when N=10. Since K=2, a currentof Iw×K×5=Iw×10 flows through the source signal line 18). Then, a 5times larger current is programmed to the capacitor 19 of each pixel 16and held.

Since two pixel rows are selected simultaneously (K=2), two drivertransistors 11 a operate. That is, 10/2=5 times larger current flowsthrough the transistor 11 a per pixel. The total programming current ofthe two transistors 11 a flows through the source signal line 18.

For example, if the current written into the write pixel row 51 a is Id,a current of Iw×10 is passed through the source signal line 18. There isno problem because regular image data is written into the write pixelrow 51 b later. The pixel row 51 b provides the same display as thepixel row 51 a during a period of 1 H. Consequently, at least the writepixel row 51 a and the pixel row 51 b selected to increase current arein non-display mode 52.

After the next 1 H, the gate signal line 17 a(1) becomes deselected anda turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b. At thesame time, the gate signal line 17 a(3) is selected (Vgl voltage) and aprogramming current flows through the source signal line 18 in thedirection from the transistor 11 a in the selected pixel row (3) to thesource driver circuit 14. Through this operation, regular image data isheld in the pixel row (1).

After the next 1 H, the gate signal line 17 a(2) becomes deselected anda turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b. At thesame time, the gate signal line 17 a(4) is selected (Vgl voltage) and aprogramming current flows through the source signal line 18 in thedirection from the transistor 11 a in the selected pixel row (4) to thesource driver circuit 14. Through this operation, regular image data isheld in the pixel row (2). The entire screen is redrawn as it is scannedby shifting pixel rows one by one through the above operations (ofcourse, two or more pixel rows may be shifted simultaneously. Forexample, in the case of pseudo-interlaced driving, two pixel rows willbe shifted at a time. Also, from the viewpoint of image display, thesame image may be written into two or more pixel rows).

As in the case of FIG. 16, with the drive method in FIG. 24, since eachpixel is programmed with a five times larger current (voltage), ideallythe emission brightness of the EL element 15 is five times higher. Thus,the brightness of the display area 53 is five times higher than apredetermined value. To equalize this brightness with the predeterminedbrightness, an area which includes the write pixel rows 51 and which is⅕ the display screen 50 can be turned into a non-display area 52.

As shown in FIG. 27, two write pixel rows 51 (51 a and 51 b) areselected in sequence from the upper side to the lower side of the screen50 (see also FIG. 26. Pixel rows 16 a and 16 b are selected in FIG. 26).However, at the bottom of the screen, there does not exist 51 b althoughthe write pixel row 51 a exists. That is, there is only one pixel row tobe selected. Thus, the current applied to the source signal line 18 isall written into the write pixel row 51 a. Consequently, twice as largea current as usual is written into the write pixel row 51 a.

To deal with this problem, the present invention forms (places) a dummypixel row 281 at the bottom of the screen 50, as shown in FIG. 27(b).Thus, after the pixel row at the bottom of the screen 50 is selected,the final pixel row of the screen 50 and the dummy pixel row 281 areselected. Consequently, a prescribed current is written into the writepixel row in FIG. 27(b). Incidentally, although the dummy pixel row 281is illustrated as being adjacent to the top end or bottom end of thedisplay area 50, this is not restrictive. It may be formed at a locationaway from the display area 50. Besides, the dummy pixel row 281 does notneed to contain a switching transistor 11 d or EL element 15 such asthose shown in FIG. 1. This reduces the size of the dummy pixel row 281,which results in shortening the frame length of the panel.

FIG. 28 shows a mechanism of how the state shown in FIG. 27(b) takesplace. As can be seen from FIG. 28, after the pixel 16 c at the bottomof the screen 50 is selected, the final pixel row 281 of the screen 50is selected. The dummy pixel row 281 is placed outside the display area50. That is, the dummy pixel row 281 does not illuminate, is notilluminated, or is hidden even if illuminated. For example, contactholes between the pixel electrode and transistor 11 are eliminated, noEL element 15 is formed on the dummy pixel row, or the like. An ELelement 15, transistor 11 d, and gate signal line 17 b are illustratedin the dummy pixel row 281 in FIG. 28, but they are not necessary fordriving. No EL element 15, transistor 11 d, or gate signal line 17 b isformed in a dummy pixel row 281 of a display panel actually developedaccording to the present invention. However, it is preferable to form apixel electrode. This is to provide against a situation in which therewould be a difference in parasitic capacitance between the dummy pixeland other pixels 16, resulting in a difference in retained programmingcurrent.

Although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 27 that the dummypixel (row) 281 is provided (formed or placed) at the bottom of thescreen 50, this is not restrictive. For example, the screen is scannedfrom bottom to top as shown in FIG. 29(a). In the case of inversescanning, a dummy pixel row 281 should also be formed at the top of thescreen 50 as shown in FIG. 29(b). That is, dummy pixel rows 281 areformed (placed) both at the top and bottom of the screen 50. Thisconfiguration accommodates inverse scanning of the screen as well.

Two pixel rows are selected simultaneously in the example describedabove. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, fivepixel rows may be selected simultaneously (see FIG. 23). When five pixelrows are selected simultaneously, four dummy pixel rows 281 should beformed. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example. FIG.134 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration of a lowerpart of the screen 50. This example relates to simultaneous writing offive pixel rows. Four dummy pixel rows 281 have been formed or placed.The dummy pixel rows 281 do not contain an EL element 15 or the like.The dummy pixel rows 281 contain only pixel transistors (transistors 11a, 11 b, and 11 c), capacitors 19, and other components which passprogramming current. Of course, it goes without saying that gate signallines 17 b, EL elements 15, and the like may be formed.

In view of the above, the required number of dummy pixel rows 281 equalsthe number M of pixel rows selected simultaneously minus 1. For example,if five pixel rows are selected simultaneously, required number of dummypixel rows is 5−1=4. If ten pixel rows are selected simultaneously,required number of dummy pixel rows is 10−1=9.

FIG. 135 is an explanatory diagram illustrating placement locations ofdummy pixel rows in the case where the dummy pixel rows 281 are formed.Basically, assuming inversion driving, dummy pixel rows 281 are placedat the top and bottom of the screen 50.

FIG. 135(a) shows formation locations of dummy pixel rows 281 fordriving with simultaneous selection of two pixel rows (M=2). FIG. 135(b)shows formation locations of dummy pixel rows 281 for driving withsimultaneous selection of three pixel rows (M=3). FIG. 135(c) showsformation locations of dummy pixel rows 281 for driving withsimultaneous selection of four pixel rows (M=4). FIG. 135(d) showsformation locations of dummy pixel rows 281 for driving withsimultaneous selection of five pixel rows (M=5). Incidentally, if fourdummy pixel rows 281 are selected as shown in FIG. 135, driving withsimultaneous selection of two to five pixel rows is available.

In the above example of a drive method, different image data is held foreach pixel row. Needless to say, the required number of pixel rows isdoubled if the same image data is held in two pixel rows. That is, iftwo pixel rows are selected at a time to scan, twice as many dummy pixelrows are required. Thus, the required number of dummy pixel rows isgiven by the number M of pixel rows selected simultaneously minus 1, allmultiplied by the number of pixel rows into which the same image data iswritten.

In the above example of a drive method, adjacent pixel rows are selectedsimultaneously. However, the drive system according to the presentinvention is not limited to this. FIGS. 136 and 137 show an example ofanother drive method (drive system) according to the present invention.FIG. 136 shows an example of the drive method which involvessimultaneous selection of two pixel rows. In FIG. 136, a dummy pixel row281 is formed at the bottom of the screen 50 as in the case of FIG. 135.

In a drive method which involves selecting two pixel rowssimultaneously, the dummy pixel row 281 formed at the bottom must alwaysbe selected. That is, the transistors 11 b and 11 c of the dummy pixelrow 281 which select the dummy pixel row 281 always remain on.

FIG. 136(a) shows a state in which the top of the screen 50 is scanned(programmed with current). FIG. 136(b) shows a state in which the centerof the screen 50 is scanned (programmed with current). FIG. 136(c) showsa state in which the bottom of the screen 50 is scanned (programmed withcurrent). In any of the above cases, the dummy pixel row 281 is selectedtogether. Thus, two pixel rows—the dummy pixel row 281 and the pixel rowto be programmed with current—are selected simultaneously and an imageis written into them.

With the drive method in FIG. 136, pixel rows in the display area 50 areselected one by one together with the dummy pixel row 281 at a fixedlocation. Then, currents from the dummy pixel row 281 and selected pixelrow are supplied to the source driver IC (circuit) 14 (see FIG. 137). IfFIG. 137(a) shows a driving state at a certain time point, FIG. 137(b)shows state one horizontal scanning period later.

Incidentally, in FIG. 136, the dummy pixel row 281 delivers the samecurrent as the pixel rows 51 selected one after another to the sourcesignal line 18. However, the present invention is not limited to this.The dummy pixel row 281 may deliver a larger current than the pixel rows51 selected one after another. For example, it may deliver 2 times or3.5 times larger current.

The magnification of the current delivered by the dummy pixel row 281 tothe source signal line 18 can be set by specifying the channel width Wand channel length L of the driver transistor 11 a of the dummy pixelrow 281 in design. Increasing W increases the drive current passedthrough the source signal line 18 and decreasing W decreases the drivecurrent passed through the source signal line 18. Thus, if W/L of thedriver transistor 11 a of the dummy pixel row 281 is made larger thanW/L of the driver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 in the display area50, the drive current of the dummy pixel row 281 can be made larger thanthe drive current of the display area 50. Needless to say, it ispreferable to make the drive current of the dummy pixel row 281 larger.

Incidentally, although with the drive method in FIG. 136, the pixel rowsto be programmed with current are selected one by one, the presentinvention is not limited to this. For example, two or more pixel rowsmay be selected simultaneously as illustrated in FIG. 24.

With the pixel configuration in FIG. 136, since the dummy pixel row 281is always selected, variations in the dummy pixel row 281 can bereduced, resulting in uniform image display. Incidentally, whenreversing the scan direction of images, preferably a dummy pixel row 281is formed at the top of the screen 50 in FIG. 136.

In the above example, scanning begins with the same pixel row number inevery field or frame. NTSC and the like supports interlaced driving. Ininterlaced driving, one frame consists of two fields and odd-numberedpixel rows are scanned in the first field and even-numbered pixel rowsare scanned in the second field.

In an example in FIG. 133, FIG. 133(a) shows a method of driving thefirst field and FIG. 133(b) shows a method of driving the second field.The drive method here employs driving with simultaneous selection of twopixel rows described with reference to FIG. 24.

In the first field, two pixel rows are selected simultaneously beginningwith the first pixel row and subsequent pixel rows are selected byshifting position. This process is similar to the one described withreference to FIG. 24 and the like, and thus detailed description thereofwill be unnecessary.

In the second field, two pixel rows are selected simultaneouslybeginning with the second pixel row and subsequent pixel rows areselected by shifting position. The point is that the scanning beginswith the second pixel row rather than the first pixel row. Withinterlaced driving, odd-numbered pixel rows are scanned in the firstfield and even-numbered pixel rows are scanned in the second field. Thatis, the start position of scanning differs between the first field andsecond field. Needless to say, a dummy pixel row 281 such as the onedescribed with reference to FIG. 134 and the like may be formed.

The drive method according to the present invention is not limited tosimultaneous selection of multiple pixel rows. For example, the speed ofwriting into pixel rows may be doubled. That is, pixel rows are selectedone by one and images on the selected pixel rows are rewritten (see FIG.13). The same image data is written into adjacent pixel rows. Forexample, in the first field, the same image is written into the firstand second pixel rows. Similarly, the same image is written into thethird and fourth pixel rows and the same image is written into the fifthand sixth pixel rows. The above operation is repeated until the 479thand 480th pixel rows to finish writing images into the first field.

In the second field, the same image is written into the second and thirdpixel rows. Similarly, the same image is written into the fourth andfifth pixel rows and the same image is written into the sixth andseventh pixel rows. The above operation is repeated until the 478th and479th pixel rows or the 480th and 481st pixel rows to finish writingimages into the second field.

The simultaneous selection of multiple pixel rows is not limited tosimultaneous selection of two pixel rows. Needless to say, for example,odd-numbered pixel rows (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, . . . 479) may be scanned in thefirst field and even-numbered pixel rows (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, . . . , 480)may be scanned in the second field. The even-numbered pixel rows in thefirst field may be either non-illuminated or scanned in sequence asnon-display areas 52, as illustrated in FIG. 24. Also, the odd-numberedpixel rows in the second field may be either non-illuminated or scannedin sequence as non-display areas 52, as illustrated in FIG. 24.

In FIGS. 15 and 21 and the like, pixel rows are selected one by one,being shifted by one pixel row in sync with a horizontal synchronizationsignal. However, the present invention is not limited to this and itgoes without saying that pixel rows may be selected being shifted by twoor more pixel rows. The dummy pixel row configuration or dummy pixel rowdriving according to the present invention uses one or more dummy pixelrows. Of course, it is preferable to use the dummy pixel row driving andN-fold pulse driving in combination.

Now, interlaced driving according to the present invention will bedescribed below in more detail. FIG. 127 shows a configuration of thedisplay panel according to the present invention which performs theinterlaced driving. In FIG. 127, the gate signal lines 17 a ofodd-numbered pixel rows are connected to a gate driver circuit 12 a 1.The gate signal lines 17 a of even-numbered pixel rows are connected toa gate driver circuit 12 a 2. On the other hand, the gate signal lines17 b of the odd-numbered pixel rows are connected to a gate drivercircuit 12 b 1. The gate signal lines 17 b of the even-numbered pixelrows are connected to a gate driver circuit 12 b 2.

Thus, through operation (control) of the gate driver circuit 12 a 1,image data in the odd-numbered pixel rows are rewritten in sequence. Inthe odd-numbered pixel rows, illumination and non-illumination of the ELelements are controlled through operation (control) of the gate drivercircuit 12 b 1. Also, through operation (control) of the gate drivercircuit 12 a 2, image data in the even-numbered pixel rows are rewrittenin sequence. In the even-numbered pixel rows, illumination andnon-illumination of the EL elements are controlled through operation(control) of the gate driver circuit 12 b 2.

FIG. 128(a) shows operating state in the first field of the displaypanel. FIG. 128(b) shows operating state in the second field of thedisplay panel. In FIG. 128, the oblique hatching which marks the gatedriver circuits 12 indicates that the gate driver circuits 12 are nottaking part in data scanning operation. Specifically, in the first fieldin FIG. 128(a), the gate driver circuit 12 a 1 is operating for writecontrol of programming current and the gate driver circuit 12 b 2 isoperating for illumination control of the EL elements 15. In the secondfield in FIG. 128(b), the gate driver circuit 12 a 2 is operating forwrite control of programming current and the gate driver circuit 12 b 1is operating for illumination control of the EL elements 15. The aboveoperations are repeated within the frame.

FIG. 129 shows image display status in the first field. FIG. 129(a)illustrates write pixel rows (locations of odd-numbered pixel rowsprogrammed with current (voltage)). The location of the write pixel rowis shifted in sequence: FIG. 129(a 1)→(a 2)→(a 3). In the first field,odd-numbered pixel rows are rewritten in sequence (image data in theeven-numbered pixel rows are retained). FIG. 129(b) illustrates displaystatus of odd-numbered pixel rows. Incidentally, FIG. 129(b) illustratesonly odd-numbered pixel rows. Even-numbered pixel rows are illustratedin FIG. 129(c). As can be seen from FIG. 129(b), the EL elements 15 ofthe pixels in the odd-numbered pixel rows are non-illuminated. On theother hand, the even-numbered pixel rows are scanned in both displayarea 53 and non-display area 52 as shown in FIG. 129(c) (N-fold pulsedriving).

FIG. 130 shows image display status in the second field. FIG. 130(a)illustrates write pixel rows (locations of odd-numbered pixel rowsprogrammed with current (voltage)) The location of the write pixel rowis shifted in sequence: FIG. 130(a 1)→(a 2)→(a 3). In the second field,even-numbered pixel rows are rewritten in sequence (image data in theodd-numbered pixel rows are retained). FIG. 130(b) illustrates displaystatus of odd-numbered pixel rows. Incidentally, FIG. 130(b) illustratesonly odd-numbered pixel rows. Even-numbered pixel rows are illustratedin FIG. 130(c). As can be seen from FIG. 130(b), the EL elements 15 ofthe pixels in the even-numbered pixel rows are non-illuminated. On theother hand, the odd-numbered pixel rows are scanned in both display area53 and non-display area 52 as shown in FIG. 130(c) (N-fold pulsedriving).

In this way, interlaced driving can be implemented easily on an ELdisplay panel. Also, N-fold pulse driving eliminates shortages of writecurrent and blurred moving pictures. Besides, current (voltage)programming and illumination of EL elements 15 can be controlled easilyand circuits can be implemented easily.

Incidentally, the drive method according to the present invention is notlimited to those shown in FIGS. 129 and 130. For example, a drive methodshown in FIG. 131 is also available. In FIGS. 129 and 130, theodd-numbered pixel rows or even-numbered pixel rows being programmedwith current (voltage) belong to a non-display area 52 (non-illuminationor black display). The example in FIG. 131 involves synchronizing thegate driver circuits 12 b 1 and 12 b 2 which control illumination of theEL elements 15. Needless to say, however, the write pixel row 51 beingprogrammed with current (voltage) belongs to a non-display area (thereis no need for this in the case of the current-mirror pixelconfiguration in FIG. 38). In FIG. 131, since illumination control iscommon to the odd-numbered pixel rows and even-numbered pixel rows,there is no need to provide two gate driver circuits 12 b 1 and 12 b 2.One gate driver circuit 12 b alone can perform illumination control.

The drive method in FIG. 131 uses the same illumination control for bothodd-numbered pixel rows and even-numbered pixel rows. However, thepresent invention is not limited to this. FIG. 132 shows an example inwhich illumination control is varied between odd-numbered pixel rows andeven-numbered pixel rows. In FIG. 132, in particular, the illuminationmode (display area 53 and non-display area 52) of odd-numbered pixelrows and illumination mode of even-numbered pixel rows have oppositepatterns. Thus, the display area 53 and non-display area 52 have thesame size. Of course, this is not restrictive.

In the above example, pixel rows are programmed with current (voltage)one by one. However, the drive method according to the present inventionis not limited to this. Needless to say, two pixel rows (a plurality ofpixel rows) may be programmed with current (voltage) simultaneously asshown in FIG. 133. Also, in FIGS. 130 and 129, it is not strictlynecessary that all the pixel rows in the odd-numbered pixel rows oreven-numbered pixel rows should be non-illuminated. Needless to say, thepixel rows may be driven as shown in FIG. 66 and the like.

In the drive method which selects two or more pixel rows at a time, thelarger the number of pixel rows selected simultaneously, the moredifficult it becomes to absorb variations in the characteristics of thetransistors 11 a. However, the current programmed into one pixelincreases with decreases in the number of pixel rows selected, resultingin a large current flowing through the EL element 15, which in turnmakes the EL element 15 prone to degradation.

FIG. 30 shows how to solve this problem. The basic concept behind FIG.30 is to use a method of selecting a plurality of pixel rowssimultaneously during ½ H (½ of a horizontal scanning period) asdescribed with reference to FIGS. 22 and 29 and to use a method ofselecting one pixel row in the latter ½ H (½ of the horizontal scanningperiod) as described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 13. This combinationmakes it possible to absorb variations in the characteristics of thetransistors 11 a and achieve high speed and uniform surfaces.

Referring to FIG. 30, for ease of understanding, it is assumed that fivepixel rows are selected simultaneously in the first period and that onepixel row is selected in the second period. First, as shown in FIG. 30(a1), in the first period (first ½ H), five pixel rows are selectedsimultaneously. This operation has been described with reference to FIG.22, and thus description thereof will be omitted. As an example, it isassumed that the current passed through the source signal line 18 is 25times as large as a predetermined value. Thus, the transistor 11 a inthe pixel 16 (in the pixel configuration in FIG. 1) is programmed with afive times larger current ( 25/5 pixel rows=5). Since the current is 25times larger, the parasitic capacitance generated in the source signalline 18 and the like is charged and discharged in an extremely shortperiod. Consequently, the potential of the source signal line 18 reachesa target potential in a short period of time and the terminal voltage ofthe capacitor 19 of each pixel 16 is programmed to pass a 25 timeslarger current. The 25 times larger current is applied in the first ½ H(½ of the horizontal scanning period).

Naturally, since the same image data is written into the five writepixel rows, the transistors 11 d in the five write pixel rows are turnedoff in order not to display the image. Thus, the display condition is asshown in FIG. 30(a 2).

In the next ½ H period, one pixel is selected for current (voltage)programming. The condition is as shown in FIG. 30(b 1). Current(voltage) programming is performed so as to pass a five times largercurrent through the write pixel row 51 a as in the first period. Equalcurrent is passed in FIG. 30(a 1) and FIG. 30(b 1) to reach a targetcurrent more quickly by decreasing the changes in the terminal voltageof the programmed capacitor 19.

Specifically, in FIG. 30 (a1), current is passed through a plurality ofpixels, approaching an approximate target value quickly. In this firststage, since a plurality of transistors 11 a are programmed, variationsin the transistors cause error with respect to the target value. In thesecond stage, only a pixel row where data will be written and held isselected and complete programming is performed by changing the value ofcurrent from the approximate target value to a predetermined targetvalue.

Incidentally, scanning of the non-illuminated area 52 from top to bottomof the screen and scanning of the write pixel rows 51 a from top tobottom of the screen are performed in the same manner as in examples inFIG. 13 and the like, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 31 shows drive waveforms used to implement the drive method shownin FIG. 30. As can be seen from FIG. 31, 1 H (one horizontal scanningperiod) consists of two phases. An ISEL signal is used to switch betweenthe two phases. The ISEL signal is illustrated in FIG. 31.

First, the ISEL signal will be described. The driver circuit 14 whichperforms operations shown in FIG. 30 comprises a current output circuitA and current output circuit B. Each of the current output circuitsconsists of a D/A circuit which converts 8-bit gradation data fromdigital to analog, an operation amplifier, etc. In the example in FIG.30, the current output circuit A is configured to output 25 times largercurrent. On the other hand, the current output circuit B is configuredto output 5 times larger current. Outputs from the current outputcircuit A and current output circuit B are controlled by a switchcircuit formed (placed) in a current output section through the ISELsignals and are applied to the source signal line 18. Such currentoutput circuits are placed on each source signal line 18.

When the ISEL signal is low, the current output circuit A which outputs25 times larger current is selected and current from the source signalline 18 is absorbed by the source driver IC 14 (more precisely, thecurrent is absorbed by the current output circuit A formed in the sourcedriver IC 14). The magnification (such as ×25 or ×5) of the current fromthe current output circuits can be adjusted easily using a plurality ofresisters and an analog switch.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the write pixel row is the (1)-th pixel row(see the 1 H column in FIG. 30), the gate signal lines 17 a(1), (2),(3), (4), and (5) are selected (in the case of configuration shown inFIG. 1). That is, the switching transistors 11 b and the transistors 11c in the pixel rows (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) are on. Besides, sinceISEL is low, the current output circuit A which outputs 25 times largercurrent is selected and connected to the source signal line 18. Also, aturn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b. Thus,the switching transistors lid in the pixel rows (1), (2), (3), (4), and(5) are off and current does not flow through the EL elements 15 in thecorresponding pixel rows. That is, the EL elements 15 are innon-illumination mode 52.

Ideally, the transistors 11 a in the five pixels deliver a current ofIw×2 each to the source signal line 18. Then, the capacitor 19 of eachpixel 16 is programmed with a five times larger current. For ease ofunderstanding, it is assumed here that the transistors have equalcharacteristics (Vt and S value).

Since five pixel rows are selected simultaneously (K=5), five drivertransistors 11 a operate. That is, 25/5=5 times larger current flowsthrough the transistor 11 a per pixel. The total programming current ofthe five transistors 11 a flows through the source signal line 18. Forexample, if the current written into the write pixel row 51 a by aconventional drive method is Iw, a current of Iw×25 is passed throughthe source signal line 18. The write pixel rows 51 b into which imagedata is written later than the write pixel row (1) are auxiliary pixelrows used to increase the amount of current delivered to the sourcesignal line 18. However, there is no problem because regular image datais written into the write pixel rows 51 b later.

Thus, the pixel rows 51 b provide the same display as the pixel row 51 aduring a period of 1 H. Consequently, at least the write pixel row 51 aand the pixel rows 51 b selected to increase current are in non-displaymode 52.

In the next ½ H period (½ of the horizontal scanning period), only thewrite pixel row 51 a is selected. That is, only the (1)-th pixel row isselected. As can be seen from FIG. 31, a turn-on voltage (Vgl) isapplied only to the gate signal line 17 a(1) and a turn-off voltage(Vgh) is applied to the gate signal lines 17 a(2), (3), (4), and (5).Thus, the transistor 11 a in the pixel row (1) is in operation(supplying current to the source signal line 18), but the switchingtransistors 11 b and the transistors 11 c in the pixel rows (2), (3),(4), and (5) are off. That is, they are non-selected. Besides, sinceISEL is high, the current output circuit B which outputs 5 times largercurrent is selected and connected to the source signal line 18. Also, aturn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b, which isin the same state as during the first ½ H. Thus, the switchingtransistors lid in the pixel rows (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) are offand current does not flow through the EL elements 15 in thecorresponding pixel rows. That is, the EL elements 15 are innon-illumination mode 52.

Thus, each transistor 11 a in the pixel row (1) deliver a current ofIw×5 to the source signal line 18. Then, the capacitor 19 in each pixelrow (1) is programmed with a 5 times larger current.

In the next horizontal scanning period, the write pixel row shifts byone. That is, the pixel row (2) becomes the current write pixel row.During the first ½ H period, when the write pixel row is the (2)-thpixel row, the gate signal lines 17 a(2), (3), (4), and (5) and (6) areselected. That is, the switching transistors 11 b and the transistors 11c in the pixel rows (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) are on. Besides, sinceISEL is low, the current output circuit A which outputs 25 times largercurrent is selected and connected to the source signal line 18. Also, aturn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b. Thus,the switching transistors lid in the pixel rows (2), (3), (4), (5), and(6) are off and current does not flow through the EL elements 15 in thecorresponding pixel rows. That is, the EL elements 15 are innon-illumination mode 52. On the other hand, since Vgl voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 b(1) of the pixel row (1), thetransistor lid is on and the EL element 15 in the pixel row (1)illuminates.

Since five pixel rows are selected simultaneously (K=5), five drivertransistors 11 a operate. That is, 25/5=5 times larger current flowsthrough the transistor 11 a per pixel. The total programming current ofthe five transistors 11 a flows through the source signal line 18.

In the next ½ H period (½ of the horizontal scanning period), only thewrite pixel row 51 a is selected. That is, only the (2)-th pixel row isselected. As can be seen from FIG. 31, a turn-on voltage (Vgl) isapplied only to the gate signal line 17 a(2) and a turn-off voltage(Vgh) is applied to the gate signal lines 17 a (3), (4), (5), and (6).Thus, the transistors 11 a in the pixel rows (1) and (2) are inoperation (the pixel row (1) supplies current to the EL element 15 andthe pixel row (2) supplies current to the source signal line 18), butthe switching transistors 11 b and the transistors 11 c in the pixelrows (3), (4), (5), and (6) are off. That is, they are non-selected.Besides, since ISEL is high, the current output circuit B which outputs5 times larger current is selected and the current output circuit 1222 bis connected to the source signal line 18. Also, a turn-off voltage(Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17 b, which is in the samestate as during the first ½ H. Thus, the switching transistors 11 d inthe pixel rows (2), (3), (4), (5), and (6) are off and current does notflow through the EL elements 15 in the corresponding pixel rows. Thatis, the EL elements 15 are in non-illumination mode 52.

Thus, each transistor 11 a in the pixel row (1) deliver a current ofIw×5 to the source signal line 18. Then, the capacitor 19 in each pixelrow (1) is programmed with a 5 times larger current. The entire screenis drawn as the above operations are performed in sequence.

The drive method described with reference to FIG. 30 selects G pixelrows (G is 2 or larger) in the first period and does programming in sucha way as to pass N times larger current through each pixel row. In thesecond period, the drive method selects B pixel rows (B is smaller thanG, but not smaller than 1) and does programming in such a way as to passan N times larger current through the pixels.

Another scheme is also available. It selects G pixel rows (G is 2 orlarger) in the first period and does programming in such a way that thetotal current in all the pixel rows will be an N times larger current.In the second period, this scheme selects B pixel rows (B is smallerthan G, but not smaller than 1) and does programming in such a way thatthe total current in the selected pixel rows (the current in the onepixel row if one pixel row is selected) will be an N times largercurrent. For example, in FIG. 30(a 1), five pixel rows are selectedsimultaneously and a twice larger current is passed through thetransistor 11 a in each pixel. Thus, 5×2=10 times larger current flowsthrough the source signal line 18. In the second period, one pixel rowis selected in FIG. 30(b 1). A 10 times larger current is passed throughthe transistor 11 a in this pixel.

Incidentally, although a plurality of pixel rows are selectedsimultaneously in a period of ½ H and a single pixel row is selected ina period of ½ H in FIG. 31, this is not restrictive. A plurality ofpixel rows may be selected simultaneously in a period of ¼ H and asingle pixel row may be selected in a period of ¾ H. Also, the sum ofthe period in which a plurality of pixel rows are selectedsimultaneously and the period in which a single pixel row is selected isnot limited to 1 H. For example, the total period may be 2 Hs or 1.5 Hs.

In FIG. 30, it is also possible to select two pixel rows simultaneouslyin the second period after selecting five pixel rows simultaneously inthe first ½ H. This can also achieve a practically acceptable imagedisplay.

In FIG. 30, pixel rows are selected in two stages—five pixel rows areselected simultaneously in the first ½ H period and a single pixel rowis selected in the second ½ H period, but this is not restrictive. Forexample, it is also possible to select five pixel rows simultaneously inthe first stage, select two of the five pixel rows in the second stage,and finally select one pixel row in the third stage. In short, imagedata may be written into pixel rows in two or more stages.

In the example described above, pixel rows are selected one by one andprogrammed with current, or two or more pixel rows are selected at atime and programmed with current. However, the present invention is notlimited to this. It is also possible to use a combination of the twomethods according to image data: the method of selecting pixel rows oneby one and programming them with current and the method of selecting twoor more pixel rows at a time and programming them with current.

FIG. 126 combines a drive system which selects pixel rows one by one anda drive method which selects multiple pixel rows one by one. In the casewhere multiple pixel rows are selected at a time, it is assumed for easeof understanding that two pixel rows are selected simultaneously asillustrated in FIG. 126(a 2). Thus, one dummy pixel row 281 each isformed at the top and bottom of the screen. The drive system whichselects pixel rows one by one does not need to use dummy pixel rows.

Incidentally, for ease of understanding, it is assumed that the sourcedriver IC 14 in FIG. 126(a 1) (one pixel row is selected) and FIG. 126(a2) (two pixel rows are selected) output equal currents. Thus, the drivesystem which selects two pixel rows at a time as shown in FIG. 126(a 2)provides half the screen brightness compared to the drive system whichselects pixel rows one by one as shown in FIG. 126(a 1). To provideequal screen brightness, the duty ratio in FIG. 126(a 2) can be doubled(e.g., if the duty ratio in FIG. 126(a 1) is ½, the duty ratio in FIG.126(a 2) can be set to 1/1=½×2). Also, the magnitude of the referencecurrent inputted in the source driver IC 14 can be varied twice as much.Alternatively, the programming current can be doubled.

FIG. 126(a 1) shows a typical drive method according to the presentinvention. If input video signals are non-interlaced (progressive)signals, the drive system in FIG. 126(a 1) is used. If input videosignals are interlaced signals, the drive system in FIG. 126(a 2) isused. Also, if video signals have low image resolution, the drive systemin FIG. 126(a 2) is used. It is also possible to use the drive method inFIG. 126(a 2) for moving pictures and the drive method in FIG. 126(a 1)for still pictures. The drive method in FIG. 126(a 1) and drive methodin FIG. 126(a 2) can be switched easily by controlling the start pulsesupplied to the gate driver circuit 12.

A problem is that the drive system which selects two pixel rows at atime as shown in FIG. 126(a 2) provides half the screen brightnesscompared to the drive system which selects pixel rows one by one (FIG.126(a 1)). To provide equal screen brightness, the duty ratio in FIG.126(a 2) can be doubled (e.g., if the duty ratio in FIG. 126(a 1) is ½,the duty ratio in FIG. 126(a 2) can be set to 1/1=½×2). That is, theproportions of the non-display area 52 and display area 53 in FIG.126(b) can be varied.

The proportions of the non-display area 52 and display area 53 can bevaried easily by controlling the start pulse supplied to the gate drivercircuit 12. That is, the drive mode in FIG. 126(b) can be variedaccording the display mode in FIGS. 126(a 1) and 126(a 2).

Incidentally, FIG. 126(a 2) shows a drive method which drives two pixelsat a time sequentially. However, there is no need to select adjacentpixel rows and two nonadjacent pixel rows may be selected for sequentialscanning as shown in FIG. 123.

The N-fold pulse driving method according to the present inventionmentioned above uses the same waveform for the gate signal lines 17 b ofdifferent pixel rows and applies current by shifting the pixel rows at 1H intervals. The use of such scanning makes it possible to shiftilluminating pixel rows in sequence with the illumination duration ofthe EL elements 15 fixed to 1 F/N. It is easy to shift pixel rows inthis way while using the same waveform for the gate signal lines 17 b ofthe pixel rows. It can be done by simply controlling data ST1 and ST2applied to the shift register circuits 61 a and 61 b in FIG. 6. Forexample, if Vgl is output to the gate signal line 17 b when input ST1 islow and Vgh is output to the gate signal line 17 b when input ST1 ishigh, ST2 applied to the shift register circuit 17 b can be set low fora period of 1 F/N and set high for the remaining period. Then, inputtedST2 can be shifted using a clock CLK2 synchronized with 1 H.

Incidentally, the EL elements 15 must be turned on and off at intervalsof 0.5 msec or longer. Short intervals will lead to insufficient blackdisplay due to persistence of vision, resulting in blurred images andmaking it look as if the resolution has lowered. This also represents adisplay state of a data holding display. However, increasing the on/offintervals to 100 msec will cause flickering. Thus, the on/off intervalsof the EL elements must be not shorter than 0.5 μsec and not longer than100 msec. More preferably, the on/off intervals should be from 2 msec to30 msec (both inclusive). Even more preferably, the on/off intervalsshould be from 3 msec to 20 msec (both inclusive).

As also described above, an undivided black screen 152 achieves goodmovie display, but makes flickering of the screen more noticeable. Thus,it is desirable to divide the black insert into multiple parts. However,too many divisions will cause moving pictures to blur. The number ofdivisions should be from 1 to 8 (both inclusive). More preferably, itshould be from 1 to 5 (both inclusive).

Incidentally, it is preferable that the number of divisions of a blackscreen can be varied between still pictures and moving pictures. WhenN=4, 75% is occupied by a black screen (non-display area 52) and 25% isoccupied by image display (display area 53). When the number ofdivisions is 1, a strip of black display (non-display area 52) whichmakes up 75% is scanned vertically. When the number of divisions is 3,three blocks are scanned, where each block consists of a black screenwhich makes up 25% and a display screen which makes up 25/3 percent. Thenumber of divisions is increased for still pictures and decreased formoving pictures. The switching can be done either automaticallyaccording to input images (detection of moving pictures) or manually bythe user. Alternatively, the switching can be done according to inputoutlet such as video on the display apparatus.

For example, on cell phones, which use still pictures for wallpapers andinput screens, the number of divisions should be 10 or more (in extremecases, the display may be turned on and off every 1 H). When displayingmoving pictures in NTSC format, the number of divisions should be from 1to 5 (both inclusive). Preferably, the number of divisions can beswitched in three or more steps; for example, 0, 2, 4, 8, 16 divisions,and so on. Preferably, the number of divisions can be varied from 0 tohalf the number of displayed scanning lines. Preferably, the number ofdivisions can be changed in real time according to contents of imagedata. It is also possible to allow the user to change the number ofdivisions with a changeover switch or the like. It is also possible toallow the number of divisions to be changed in real time according tothe brightness of extraneous light.

Preferably, the ratio of the black screen to the entire display screenshould be from 0.2 to 0.9 (from 1.2 to 9 in terms of N) both inclusivewhen the area of the entire screen is taken as 1. More preferably, theratio should be from 0.25 to 0.6 (from 1.25 to 6 in terms of N) bothinclusive. If the ratio is 0.20 or less, movie display is not improvedmuch. When the ratio is 0.9 or more, the display part becomes bright andits vertical movements become liable to be recognized visually.

Also, preferably, the number of frames per second is from 10 to 100 (10Hz to 100 Hz) both inclusive. More preferably, it is from 12 to 65 (12Hz to 65 Hz) both inclusive. When the number of frames is small,flickering of the screen becomes conspicuous while too large a number offrames makes writing from the source driver circuit 14 and the likedifficult, resulting in deterioration of resolution.

In any case, the present invention allows the brightness of images to bevaried by controlling the gate signal lines 17. However, needless tosay, the brightness of images may be varied by varying the current(voltage) applied to the source signal lines 18. It goes without sayingthat the two methods described above (FIGS. 33 and 35 and the like) maybe used in combination: the method of controlling the gate signal lines17 and the method of varying the current (voltage) applied to the sourcesignal lines 18.

Needless to say, the above items also apply to the pixel configurationsfor current programming in FIG. 38 and the like as well as to the pixelconfigurations for voltage programming in FIGS. 43, 51, 54, and thelike. This can be accomplished through on/off control of the transistor11 d in FIG. 38, transistor 11 d in FIG. 43, and transistor 11 e in FIG.51. This can also be accomplished by switching the connection terminalof the changeover switch 631 in FIG. 63. In this way, by turning on andoff the wiring which delivers current to the EL elements 15, the N-foldpulse driving according to the present invention can be implementedeasily.

Also, the gate signal line 17 b may be set to Vgl for a period of 1 F/Nanytime during the period of 1 F (not limited to 1F. Any unit time willdo). This is because a predetermined brightness is obtained by turningoff the EL element 15 for a predetermined period out of a unit time.However, it is preferable to set the gate signal line 17 b to Vgl andilluminate the EL element 15 immediately after the current programmingperiod (1 H). This will reduce the effect of retention characteristicsof the capacitor 19 in FIG. 1.

Also, preferably the number of screen divisions is configured to bevariable. For example, when the user presses a brightness adjustmentswitch or turns a brightness adjustment knob, the value of K, which isthe number of divisions, may be changed in response. Alternatively, thevalue of K may be changed manually or automatically depending on imagesor data to be displayed.

In this way, the mechanism for changing the value of K (the number ofdivisions of the image display part 53) can be implemented easily. Thiscan be achieved by simply making the time to change ST (when to set STlow during 1 F) adjustable or variable.

Incidentally, although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 16 andthe like that a period (1 F/N) during which the gate signal line 17 b isset to Vgl is divided into a plurality of parts (K parts) and that aperiod of 1 F/(K/N) during which the gate signal line 17 b is set to Vglrepeats K times, this is not restrictive. A period of 1 F/(K/N) may berepeated L (L K) times. In other words, the present invention displaysthe image 50 by controlling the period (time) during which current ispassed through the EL element 15. Thus, the idea of repeating the 1F/(K/N) period L (L≠K) times is included in the technical idea of thepresent invention. Also, by varying the value of L, the brightness ofthe image 50 can be changed digitally. For example, there is a 50%change of brightness (contrast) between L=2 and L=3. The controldescribed here is also applicable to other examples of the presentinvention (of course, it is applicable to what is described laterherein). These are also included in the N-fold pulse driving accordingto the present invention.

The above examples involve placing (forming) the transistor lid servingas a switching element between the EL element 15 and driver transistor11 a and turning on and off the screen 50 by controlling the transistor11 d. This drive method eliminates shortages of write current in blackdisplay condition during current programming and thereby achieves properresolution or black display. That is, in current programming, it isimportant to achieve proper black display. The drive method describednext achieves proper black display by resetting the driver transistor 11a. This example will be described below with reference to FIG. 32.

The pixel configuration in FIG. 32 is basically the same as the oneshown in FIG. 1. With the pixel configuration in FIG. 32, a programmedIw current flows through the EL element 15, illuminating the EL element15. By being programmed, the driver transistor 11 a retains a capabilityto pass current. The drive system shown in FIG. 32 resets (turns off)the transistor 11 a using this capability to pass current. Hereinafter,this drive system will be referred to as reset driving.

To implement reset driving using the pixel configuration shown in FIG.1, the transistors 11 b and 11 c must be able to be switched on and offindependently of each other. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 32, itis necessary to be able to independently control the gate signal line 11a (gate signal line WR) used for on/off control of the transistor 11 band the gate signal line 11 c (gate signal line EL) used for on/offcontrol of the transistor 11 c. The gate signal lines 11 a and 11 c canbe controlled using two independent shift registers 61 as illustrated inFIG. 6.

Preferably, the drive voltage should be varied between the gate signalline WR and the gate signal line EL. The amplitude value (differencebetween turn-on voltage and turn-off voltage) of the gate signal line WRshould be smaller than the amplitude value of the gate signal line EL.Basically, too large an amplitude value of the gate signal line willincrease penetration voltage between the gate signal line and pixel,resulting in an insufficient black level. The amplitude of the gatesignal line WR can be controlled by controlling the time when thepotential of the source signal line 18 is not applied (or is applied(during selection)) to the pixel 16. Since changes in the potential ofthe source signal line 18 are small, the amplitude value of the gatesignal line WR can be made small. On the other hand, the gate signalline EL is used for on/off control of EL. Thus, its amplitude valuebecomes large. For this, output voltage is varied between the shiftregister circuits 61 a and 61 b. If the pixel is constructed ofP-channel transistors, approximately equal Vgh (turn-off voltage) isused for the shift register circuits 61 a and 61 b while Vgl (turn-onvoltage) of the shift register circuit 61 a is made lower than Vgl(turn-on voltage) of the shift register circuit 61 b.

Reset driving will be described below with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33is a diagram illustrating a principle of reset driving. First, asillustrated in FIG. 33(a), the transistors 11 c and 11 d are turned offand the transistor 11 b is turned on. As a result, the drain (D)terminal and gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a areshort-circuited, allowing a current Ib to flow. Generally, thetransistor 11 a has been programmed with current in the previous field(frame) and capable of flowing the current. In this state, as thetransistor 11 d is turned off and the transistor 11 b is turned on, thedrive current Ib flows through the gate (G) terminal of the transistor11 a. Consequently, the gate (G) terminal and drain (D) terminal of thetransistor 11 a have the same potential, resetting the transistor 11 a(to a state in which no current flows).

The reset mode (in which no current flows) of the transistor 11 a isequivalent to a state in which an offset voltage is held in voltageoffset canceling mode described with reference to FIG. 51 and the like.That is, in the state in FIG. 33(a), the offset voltage is held betweenthe terminals of the capacitor 19. The offset voltage varies with thecharacteristics of the transistor 11 a. Thus, in FIG. 33(a), a state inwhich the transistor 11 a does not pass current is maintained in thecapacitor 19 in each pixel (i.e., the transistor 11 a passes a blackdisplay current close to zero).

Incidentally, before the operation in FIG. 33(a), it is preferable toturn off the transistors 11 b and 11 c, turn on the transistor 11 d, andpass current through the driver transistor 11 a. Preferably, thisoperation should be done in a minimum time. Otherwise, there is a fearthat a current will flow through the EL element 15, illuminating the ELelement 15, and thereby lowering display contrast. Preferably, theoperating time here is from 0.1% to 10% of 1 H (one horizontal scanningperiod) both inclusive. More preferably, it is from 0.2% to 2% or from0.2 μsec to 5 μsec (both inclusive). Also, this operation (the operationto be performed before the operation in FIG. 33(a)) may be performed onall the pixels 16 of the screen at once. This operation will lower thedrain (D) terminal voltage of the driver transistor 11 a, making itpossible to pass the current Ib smoothly in the state shown in FIG.33(a). Incidentally, the above items also apply to other reset drivingaccording to the present invention.

As the operation time of FIG. 33(a) becomes longer, a larger Ib currenttends to flow, reducing the terminal voltage of the capacitor 19. Thus,the operation time of FIG. 33(a) should be fixed. It has been shownexperimentally and analytically that preferably the operation time inFIG. 33(a) is from 1 H to 5 Hs (both inclusive). Preferably, this periodshould be varied among R, G, and B pixels. This is because EL materialvaries among different colors and rising voltage varies among differentEL materials. Optimum periods suitable for EL materials should bespecified separately for the R, G, and B pixels. Although it has beenstated that the period should be from 1 H to 5 Hs (both inclusive) inthis example, it goes without saying that the period may be 5 Hs orlonger in the case of a drive system which mainly concerns blackinsertion (writing of a black screen). Incidentally, the longer theperiod, the better the black display condition of pixels.

A state shown in FIG. 33(b) occurs during a period of 1H to 5 Hs (bothinclusive) after the state in FIG. 33(a) FIG. 33(b) shows a state inwhich the transistors 11 c and 11 b are on and the transistor 11 d isoff. This is a state in which current programming is being performed, asdescribed earlier. Specifically, a programming current Iw is output (orabsorbed) from the source driver circuit 14 and passed through thedriver transistor 11 a. The potential of the gate (G) terminal of thedriver transistor 11 a is set so that the programming current Iw flows(the set potential is held in the capacitor 19).

If the programming current Iw is 0 A, the transistor 11 a is held in thestate in FIG. 33(a) in which it does not pass current, and thus a properblack display is achieved. Also, when performing current programming forwhite display in FIG. 33(b), the current programming is started fromoffset voltage of completely black display even if there are variationsin the characteristics of driver transistors in pixels. Thus, the timerequired to reach a target current value becomes uniform according togradations. This eliminates gradation errors due to variations in thecharacteristics of the transistors 11 a, making it possible to achieveproper image display.

After the programming in FIG. 33(b), the transistors 11 b and 11 c areturned off in sequence and the transistor 11 d is turned on to deliverthe programming current Iw (=Ie) to the EL element 15 from the drivertransistor 11 a, and thereby illuminate the EL element 15. What is shownin FIG. 33(c) has already been described with reference to FIG. 1 andthe like, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The drive system (reset driving) described with reference to FIG. 33consists of a first operation of disconnecting the driver transistor 11a from the EL element 15 (so that no current flows) and shorting betweenthe drain (D) terminal and gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor(or between the source (S) terminal and gate (G) terminal, or generallyspeaking, between two terminals including the gate (G) terminal of thedriver transistor) and a second operation of programming the drivertransistor with current (voltage) after the first operation. At leastthe second operation is performed after the first operation.Incidentally, for reset driving, the transistors 11 b and 11 c must beable to be controlled independently as shown in FIG. 32.

In image display mode (if instantaneous changes can be observed), thepixel row to be programmed with current is reset (black display mode)and is programmed with current after 1 H (also in black display modebecause the transistor 11 d is off). Next, current is supplied to the ELelement 15 and the pixel row illuminates at a predetermined brightness(at the programmed current). That is, the pixel row of black displaymoves from top to bottom of the screen and it should look as if theimage were rewritten at the location where the pixel row passed by.Incidentally, although it has been stated that current programming isperformed 1 H after a reset, this period may be approximately 5 Hs orshorter. This is because it takes a relatively long time for the resetin FIG. 33(a) to be completed. If this period is 5 Hs, five pixel rowswill be displayed in black (six pixel rows including the pixel row goingthrough current programming).

Also, the number of pixel rows which are reset at a time is not limitedto one, and two or more pixel rows may be reset at a time. It is alsopossible to reset and scan two or more pixel rows at a time byoverlapping some of them. For example, if four pixel rows are reset at atime, pixel rows (1), (2), (3), and (4) are reset in the firsthorizontal scanning period (1 unit), pixel rows (3), (4), (5), and (6)are reset in the second horizontal scanning period, pixel rows (5), (6),(7), and (8) are reset in the third horizontal scanning period, andpixel rows (7), (8), (9), and (10) are reset in the fourth horizontalscanning period. Incidentally the drive operations in FIGS. 33(b) and33(c) are naturally carried out in sync with the drive operation in FIG.33(a).

Needless to say, the drive operation in (b) and (c) of FIG. 33 may beperformed after resetting all the pixels in the screen simultaneously orduring scanning. Also, it goes without saying that pixel rows may bereset (at intervals of one or more pixel rows) in interlaced drivingmode (scanning at intervals of one or more pixel rows). Also, pixel rowsmay be reset at random. The reset driving according to the presentinvention involves operating pixel rows (i.e., controlling the verticaldirection of the screen). However, the concept of reset driving does notlimit control directions to the pixel row direction. For example, itgoes without saying that reset driving may be performed in the directionof pixel columns.

It has been stated that FIG. 32 shows a pixel configuration for resetdriving. However, by controlling the gate signal line 17 a and gatesignal line 17 c independently, it is possible to reduce variations inimage data programmed with current. A drive method for such control willbe described below.

First, description will be given of why variations occur in image dataprogrammed with current in the pixel configuration in FIG. 1. With thepixel configuration in FIG. 1, the transistors 11 b and 11 c are turnedon or off simultaneously by voltage applied to the gate signal line 17a. Actually, however, there could be subtle difference incharacteristics between the transistor 11 b and transistor 11 c andthere may be cases in which the transistor 11 b and transistor 11 c donot turn on or off simultaneously. For example, if a turn-on voltage andturn-off voltage are applied to the gate signal line 17 a successively,the transistor 11 b may turn off later than the transistor 11 c.

If the transistor 11 c turns off with the transistor 11 b on, the stateillustrated in FIG. 33(a) occurs. That is, reset mode occurs.Consequently, a current Ib flows, causing the capacitor 19 to charge ordischarge. The state of charge or discharge is affected by variations inpixel 16 transistors. If the transistor 11 b turns off earlier than thetransistor 11 c, the capacitor 19 is not charged or discharged. If thetransistor 11 b turns off later than the transistor 11 c, the capacitor19 is charged or discharged. Error occurs in the voltage held by thecapacitor 19 depending on the duration of charge or discharge.

To solve this problem, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signalline 17 a after a turn-on voltage (the transistor 11 b turns off by theapplication of the turn-off voltage), and then a turn-off voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 c after a turn-on voltage (thetransistor 11 c turns off by the application of the turn-off voltage).That is, after programming the pixel 16 with current (during theprogramming, a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 aand 17 c, keeping the transistors 11 b and 11 c on), a turn-off voltageis applied to the gate signal line 17 a, and after a predeterminedperiod of time, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17c. Through the above operation, appropriate current programming can beachieved, eliminating the state in FIG. 33(a). The operation, control,etc. of the transistor 11 d are the same as in FIG. 1 and the like, andthus description thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, the predetermined period of time here is between 0.1 and10 μsec (both inclusive). Alternatively, it is between 1/1000 and 1/10of 1 H (both inclusive). If this period is too short, it is not possibleto achieve proper current (voltage) programming, resulting in variationsin the holding voltage of the capacitor 19. If it is too long, theduration of current (voltage) programming is reduced, resulting ininsufficient writing. A drive method which controls the on/off timing ofthe voltage-holding transistor 11 b and the on/off timing of thetransistor 11 c which writes current (voltage) into the drivertransistor 11 a is referred to as a time-controlled drive method.

The time-controlled method is not limited to the pixel configuration inFIG. 32, but it is also applicable to the pixel configuration in FIG. 38and the like. In FIG. 32, the transistor 11 d is the voltage-holdingtransistor. The transistor 11 c is the transistor which writes current(voltage) into the driver transistor 11 a. The transistor 11 d canperform on/off control by means of the turn-on and turn-off voltagesapplied to the gate signal line 17 a 2. The transistor 11 c can performon/off control by means of the turn-on and turn-off voltages applied tothe gate signal line 17 a 1. After programming the pixel 16 with current(during the programming, a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signallines 17 a 1 and 17 a 2, keeping the transistors 11 b and 11 c on), aturn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a 2, and after apredetermined period of time, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 a 1. Through the above operation, appropriate current(voltage) programming can be achieved. The operation, control, etc. ofthe transistor 11 e are the same as in FIG. 1 and the like, and thusdescription thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, the reset driving in FIG. 33 and the time-control drivingmethod in FIG. 32 can achieve better image display if combined with theN-fold pulse driving according to the present invention or withinterlaced driving. Particularly, the configuration in FIG. 22 caneasily implement intermittent N/K-fold pulse driving (this drivingmethod provides two or more illuminated areas in a screen and can beimplemented easily by turning on and off the transistor lid bycontrolling the gate signal line 17 b: this has been described earlier),and thus can achieve proper image display without flickering. This is anexcellent feature of the configuration in FIG. 22 or its modifications.

Needless to say, more excellent image display can be achieved bycombining with a reverse bias driving method, a precharge drivingmethod, a penetration voltage driving method, or the like describedlater. Thus, it goes without saying that reset driving can be performedin combination with other examples according to the present invention.The matters concerning combinations of drive systems also apply to otherexamples of the present invention.

FIG. 34 is a block diagram of a display apparatus which implement resetdriving. The gate driver circuit 12 a controls the gate signal line 17 aand gate signal line 17 b in FIG. 32. By the application of on/offvoltages to the gate signal line 17 a, the transistor 11 b is turned onand off. Also, by the application of on/off voltages to the gate signalline 17 b, the transistor 11 d is turned on and off. The gate drivercircuit 12 b controls the gate signal line 17 c in FIG. 32. By theapplication of on/off voltages to the gate signal line 17 c, thetransistor 11 c is turned on and off.

Thus, the gate signal line 17 a is controlled by the gate driver circuit12 a while the gate signal line 17 c is controlled by the gate drivercircuit 12 b. This makes it possible to freely specify the time to turnon the transistor 11 b and reset the driver transistor 11 a as well asthe time to turn on the transistor 111 c and program the drivertransistor 11 a with current. Other parts of the configuration are thesame as or similar to those described in FIG. 6, etc., and thusdescription thereof will be omitted. Incidentally, the gate drivercircuits 12 are formed using polysilicon technology. Also, needless tosay, the gate driver circuits 12 a and 12 b may be integrated into asingle unit.

FIG. 35 is a timing chart of reset driving. While a turn-on voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 a to turn on the transistor 11 b andreset the driver transistor 11 a, a turn-off voltage is applied to thegate signal line 17 b to keep the transistor 11 d off. This creates thestate shown in FIG. 32(a). A current Ib flows during this period.

For example, looking at the pixel row (1), in the 1st H, a turn-offvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 c, a turn-on voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 a, and a turn-off voltage is appliedto the gate signal line 17 b. Consequently, in the 1st H, the pixel row(1) is in reset mode with the transistor 11 d off and with no currentflowing through the EL element 15.

In the 2nd H, a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 c,a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a, and aturn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b. Consequently,in the 2nd H, the pixel row (1) is in current programming mode with thetransistor lid off and with no current flowing through the EL element15.

In the 3rd H, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17c, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a, and aturn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b. Consequently,in the 3rd H, the pixel row (1) is in image display mode with thetransistor 11 d on and with current flowing through the EL element 15.

Thus, the capacitor 19 is reset for 1 H (one horizontal scanningperiod). Consequently, the gate terminal G of the transistor 11 a has avoltage close to the anode voltage Vdd. Consequently, the transistor 11a is cut off (reset mode). Since the capacitor 19 is reset once toprogram currents, it is possible to achieve accurate currentprogramming. While the capacitor 19 is reset, the pixel is innon-display mode (even if the transistor 11 d is on). This state isclose to a state in which black screen is inserted. Thus, by continuingthe reset state for a certain period or longer, it is possible toeliminate blurred moving pictures.

Although in the timing chart shown in FIG. 35, the reset time is 2 Hs(when a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a and thetransistor 11 b is turned on), this is not restrictive. (However, out of2 Hs, 1 H is a programming period.) The reset time may be 2 Hs orlonger. If a reset can be performed very quickly, the reset time may beless than 1H.

The duration of the reset period can be changed easily using a DATA (ST)pulse period inputted in the gate driver circuit 12. For example, ifDATA inputted in an ST terminal is set high for a period of 2 Hs, thereset period outputted for each gate signal line 17 a is 2 Hs.Similarly, if DATA inputted in the ST terminal is set high for a periodof 5 Hs, the reset period outputted for each gate signal line 17 a is 5Hs.

After a reset period of 1 H, a turn-on voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 c(1) of the pixel row (1). As the transistor 11 c turnson, the programming current Iw applied to the source signal line 18 iswritten into the driver transistor 11 a via the transistor 11 c.

After current programming, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 c of the pixel row (1), the transistor 11 c is turnedoff, and the pixel disconnected from the source signal line. At the sametime, a turn-off voltage is also applied to the gate signal line 17 aand the driver transistor 11 a exits the reset mode (incidentally, theuse of the term “current-programming mode” is more appropriate than theterm “reset mode” to refer to this period). On the other hand, a turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b, the transistor 11 d isturned on, and the current programmed into the driver transistor 11 aflows through the EL element 15. What has been said about the pixel row(1) similarly applies to the pixel row (2) and subsequent pixel rows.Also, their operation is obvious from FIG. 35. Thus, description of (2)and subsequent pixel rows will be omitted.

In FIG. 35, the reset period has been 1 H. FIG. 36 shows an example inwhich the reset period is 5 Hs. The duration of the reset period can bechanged easily using the DATA (ST) pulse period inputted in the gatedriver circuit 12. FIG. 36 shows an example in which DATA inputted inthe ST1 terminal of the gate driver circuit 12 a is set high for aperiod of 5 Hs and the reset period outputted for each gate signal line17 a is 5 Hs. The longer the reset period, the more completely the resetis performed, resulting in a proper black display. Also, blurred movingpictures can be reduced. Other operations and the like in FIG. 36 arethe same as in FIG. 35, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

Display brightness is decreased commensurately with the length of thereset period. However, by using a programming current N times largerthan a predetermined value as in the case of N-fold pulse driving, it ispossible to prevent screen brightness from dropping. Thus, reset drivingis an embodiment of N-fold pulse driving.

In FIG. 36, the reset period has been 5 Hs. Besides, the reset mode iscontinuous. However, the reset mode need not necessarily be continuous.For example, the signal outputted from each gate signal line 17 a may beturned on and off every 1 H. Such on/off operation can be achievedeasily by operating an enable circuit (not shown) formed in the outputstage of the shift register or controlling the DATA (ST) pulses inputtedin the gate driver circuit 12.

In the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 34, the gate driver circuit12 a requires at least two shift register circuits (one for the gatesignal line 17 a, the other for the gate signal line 17 b). Thispresents a problem of an increased circuit scale of the gate drivercircuit 12 a. FIG. 37 shows an example in which the gate driver circuit12 a has only one shift register. A timing chart of output signalsresulting from operation of the circuit in FIG. 37 is shown in FIG. 35.Note that the gate signal lines 17 coming out of the gate drivercircuits 12 a and 12 b are denoted by different symbols between FIGS. 35and 37.

As can be seen from the fact that an OR circuit 371 in FIG. 37 has beenadded, the output from each gate signal line 17 a is logically added tothe output from the preceding stage of the shift register circuit 61 aand a turn-on voltage or turn-off voltage is outputted to the gatesignal line 17 a depending on this result. Incidentally, the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 32 is assumed here for ease of explanation and itis assumed that a turn-on voltage is outputted to the gate signal line17 a when the output from the OR circuit 371 is high (positive logic).

In FIG. 37, the gate signal line 17 a outputs a turn-on voltage for aperiod of 2 Hs. On the other hand, the gate signal line 17 c outputs theoutput of the shift register circuit 61 a as it is. Thus, a turn-onvoltage is applied for a period of 1 H.

For example, if the shift register circuit 61 a outputs a high-levelsignal second, a turn-on voltage is output to the gate signal lines 17 cof the pixel 16(1), which now is in a state of being programmed withcurrent (voltage). At the same time, a turn-on voltage is also output tothe gate signal lines 17 a of the pixel 16(2), turning on the transistor11 b of the pixel 16(2) and resetting the driver transistor 11 a of thepixel 16(2).

Similarly, if the shift register circuit 61 a outputs a high-levelsignal third, a turn-on voltage is output to the gate signal lines 17 cof the pixel 16(2), which now is in a state of being programmed withcurrent (voltage). At the same time, a turn-on voltage is also output tothe gate signal lines 17 a of the pixel 16(3, turning on the transistor11 b of the pixel 16(3) and resetting the driver transistor 11 a of thepixel 16(3). Thus, the gate signal lines 17 a outputs turn-on voltagesfor a period of 2 Hs, and the gate signal lines 17 c receive a turn-onvoltage for a period of 1 H.

In programming mode, since the transistors 11 b and 11 c turn onsimultaneously (FIG. 33(b)), if the transistor 11 c turns off before thetransistor 11 b during transition to non-programming mode (FIG. 33(c),the reset mode in FIG. 33(b) occurs. To prevent this situation, thetransistor 11 c must be turned off after the transistor 11 b. For that,a turn-on voltage needs to be applied to the gate signal line 17 aearlier than the gate signal line 17 c.

The above example concerns the pixel configuration in FIG. 32(basically, in FIG. 1). However, the present invention is not limited tothis. For example, it is also applicable to current-mirror pixelconfigurations such as the one shown in FIG. 38. Incidentally, in FIG.38, by turning on and off the transistor 11 e, N-fold pulse drivingillustrated in FIGS. 13, 15, etc. can be implemented. FIG. 39 is anexplanatory diagram illustrating an example employing the current-mirrorpixel configuration shown in FIG. 38. Reset driving in thecurrent-mirror pixel configuration will be described below withreference to FIG. 39.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), the transistors 11 c and 11 e are turned off andthe transistor 11 d is turned on. Then, the drain (D) terminal and gate(G) terminal of the current-programming transistor 11 b areshort-circuited and a current Ib flows between them as shown in theFigure. Generally, the transistor 11 b has been programmed with currentin the previous field (frame) and is capable of passing current (this isnatural because the gate potential is held in the capacitor 19 for aperiod of 1 F and image is displayed. However, current does not flowduring a completely black display). In this state, as the transistor 11e is turned off and the transistor 11 d is turned on, the drive currentIb flows through the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 a (gate (G)terminal and the drain (D) terminal are short-circuited). Consequently,the gate (G) terminal and drain (D) terminal of the transistor 11 a havethe same potential, resetting the transistor 11 a (to a state in whichno current flows). Since the driver transistor 11 b shares a common gate(G) terminal with the current-programming transistor 11 a, the drivertransistor 11 b is also reset.

The reset mode (in which no current flows) of the transistors 11 a and11 b is equivalent to a state in which a offset voltage is held involtage offset canceling mode described with reference to FIG. 51 andthe like. That is, in the state in FIG. 39(a), the offset voltage isheld between the terminals of the capacitor 19 (the offset voltage is astarting voltage at which a current starts to flow: when a voltage equalto or larger than the starting voltage is applied, a current flowsthrough the transistor 11). The offset voltage varies with thecharacteristics of the transistors 11 a and 11 b. Thus, in FIG. 39(a), astate in which the transistors 11 a and 11 b do not pass current ismaintained in the capacitor 19 in each pixel (the transistors 11 a and11 b pass a black display current close to zero, i.e., they have beenreset to the starting voltage at which a current starts to flow).

In FIG. 39(a), as the reset period becomes longer, a larger Ib currenttends to flow, reducing the terminal voltage of the capacitor 19, as inthe case of FIG. 33(a). Thus, the operation time in FIG. 39(a) should befixed. It has been shown experimentally and analytically that preferablythe operation time in FIG. 39(a) is from 1 H to 10 Hs (ten horizontalscanning periods) both inclusive. More preferably, it should be from 1 Hto 5 Hs or from 20 μsec to 2 msec (both inclusive). This also applies tothe drive system in FIGS. 33 and 34.

As in the case of FIG. 33(a), if the reset mode in FIG. 39(a) issynchronized with the current-programming mode in FIG. 39(b), there isno problem because the period from the reset mode in FIG. 39(a) to thecurrent-programming mode in FIG. 39(b) is fixed (constant). That is,preferably the period from the reset mode in FIG. 33(a) or FIG. 39(a) tothe current-programming mode in FIG. 33(b) or FIG. 39(b) should be from1 H to 10 Hs (ten horizontal scanning periods) both inclusive. Morepreferably, it should be from 1 H to 5 Hs or from 20 μsec to 2 msec(both inclusive). If this period is short, the driver transistors 11 arenot reset completely. If it is too long, the driver transistor 11 isturned off completely, which means that much time is required forcurrent programming. Also, the brightness of the screen 50 is decreased.This is not necessarily true if black insertion is made (non-displayarea 52 is generated) as shown in FIG. 13 because the black insertion(non-display area 52) is used for N-fold pulse driving.

After the state in FIG. 39(a), a state shown in FIG. 39(b) occurs. FIG.39(b) shows a state in which the transistors 11 c and 11 d are turned onand the transistor 11 e is turned off. This is a state in which currentprogramming is being performed. Specifically, a programming current Iwis output (absorbed) from the source driver circuit 14 and passedthrough the current programming transistor 11 a. The potential of thegate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a is set in the capacitor19 so that the programming current Iw will flow.

If the programming current Iw is 0 A (black display), the transistor 11b is held in the state in FIG. 33(a) in which it does not pass current,and thus proper black display is achieved. Also, when performing currentprogramming for white display in FIG. 39(b), the current programming isstarted from offset voltage of completely black display even if thereare variations in the characteristics of driver transistors in pixels(the offset voltage is a starting voltage at which a current specifiedaccording to the characteristics of each driver transistor starts toflow). Thus, the time required to reach a target current value becomesuniform according to gradations. This eliminates gradation errors due tovariations in the characteristics of the transistor 11 a or 11 b, makingit possible to achieve proper image display.

After the current programming in FIG. 39(b), the transistors 11 c and 11d are turned off in sequence and the transistor 11 e is turned on todeliver the programming current Iw (=Ie) to the EL element 15 from thedriver transistor 11 b, and thereby illuminate the EL element 15. Whatis shown in FIG. 39(c) has already been described, and thus detaileddescription thereof will be omitted.

The drive system (reset driving) described with reference to FIGS. 33and 39 consists of a first operation of disconnecting the drivertransistor 11 a or 11 b from the EL element 15 (using the transistor 11e or 11 d so that no current flows) and shorting between the drain (D)terminal and gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor (or between thesource (S) terminal and gate (G) terminal, or generally speaking,between two terminals including the gate (G) terminal of the drivertransistor) and a second operation of programming the driver transistorwith current (voltage) after the first operation. At least the secondoperation is performed after the first operation.

Incidentally, the operation of disconnecting the driver transistor 11 aor 11 b from the EL element 15 in the first operation is not absolutelynecessary. The drain (D) terminal and gate (G) terminal of the drivertransistor are short-circuited in the first operation withoutdisconnecting the driver transistor 1 a or 11 b from the EL element 15,nothing more than some variations in reset mode may result. Whether toomit disconnection should be determined by considering thecharacteristics of the transistors in the constructed array.

The current-mirror pixel configuration in FIG. 39 provides a drivemethod which resets the current-programming transistor 11 a, andconsequently resets the driver transistor 11 b.

With the current-mirror pixel configuration in FIG. 39, it is not alwaysnecessary to disconnect the driver transistor 11 b from the EL element15 in reset mode. Thus, the following operations are performed: a firstoperation of shorting between the drain (D) terminal and gate (G)terminal of the current-programming transistor a (or between the source(S) terminal and gate (G) terminal, or generally speaking, between twoterminals including the gate (G) terminal of the current-programmingtransistor or between two terminals including the gate (G) terminal ofthe driver transistor) and a second operation of programming thecurrent-programming transistor with current (voltage) after the firstoperation. At least the second operation is performed after the firstoperation.

In image display mode (if instantaneous changes can be observed), thepixel row to be programmed with current is reset (black display mode)and is programmed with current after a predetermined H. The pixel row ofblack display moves from top to bottom of the screen and it should lookas if the image were rewritten at the location where the pixel rowpassed by.

Although the above example has been described mainly in relation topixel configuration for current programming, the reset driving accordingto the present invention can also be applied to pixel configuration forvoltage programming. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating apixel configuration (panel configuration) according to the presentinvention used to perform reset driving in a pixel configuration forvoltage programming.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 43, a transistor 11 e which resets adriver transistor 11 a has been formed. When a turn-on voltage isapplied to a gate signal line 17 e, the transistor 11 e turns on,causing a short circuit between the gate (G) terminal and drain (D)terminal of the driver transistor 11 a. Also a transistor 11 d whichcuts off a current path between the EL element 15 and driver transistor11 a has been formed. The reset driving according to the presentinvention in a pixel configuration for voltage programming will bedescribed below with reference to FIG. 44 (FIG. 43 shows a pixelconfiguration for voltage programming.).

As illustrated in FIG. 44(a), the transistors 11 b and lid are turnedoff and the transistor 11 e is turned on. The drain (D) terminal andgate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a are short-circuited anda current Ib flows as shown in the Figure. Consequently, the gate (G)terminal and drain (D) terminal of the transistor 11 a have the samepotential, resetting the transistor 11 a (to a state in which no currentflows). Before resetting the transistor 11 a, the transistor 11 d isturned on, the transistor 11 e is turned off, and current is passedthrough the transistor 11 a in sync with an HD synchronization signal asdescribed with reference to FIG. 33 or 39. Then the operation shown inFIG. 44(a) is performed. It is not strictly necessary that the resettingis synchronized with the HD signal.

The reset mode (in which no current flows) of the transistors 11 a and11 b is equivalent to a state in which a offset voltage is held involtage offset canceling mode described with reference to FIG. 41 andthe like. That is, in the state in FIG. 44(a), the offset voltage (resetvoltage) is held between the terminals of the capacitor 19. This resetvoltage varies with the characteristics of the driving transistors 11 a.Thus, in FIG. 44(a), a state in which the driving transistors 11 a and11 b do not pass current is maintained in the capacitor 19 in each pixel(the transistors 11 a and 11 b pass a black display current close tozero, i.e., they have been reset to the starting voltage at which acurrent starts to flow).

Incidentally, in the pixel configuration for voltage programming, as thereset period becomes longer, a larger Ib current tends to flow, reducingthe terminal voltage of the capacitor 19, as in the case of pixelconfiguration for current programming. Thus, the operation time in FIG.44(a) should be fixed. Preferably, the operation time should be from 0.2H to 5 Hs (five horizontal scanning periods) both inclusive. Morepreferably, it should be from 0.5H to 4 Hs or from 2 μsec to 400 μsec(both inclusive).

Besides, it is preferable that the gate signal line 17 e should beshared with the gate signal line 17 a in a preceding stage. That is thegate signal line 17 e should be shorted to the gate signal line 17 a inthe pixel row in the preceding stage. This configuration is referred toas a preceding-stage gate control system. Incidentally, the stage-stagegate control system uses waveforms of gate signal lines of a pixel rowselected one or more Hs before the pixel row of interest. Thus, thissystem is not limited to the previous pixel row. For example, the drivertransistor 11 a of the pixel row of interest may be reset using thewaveforms of gate signal lines two pixel rows ahead.

The stage-stage gate control system will be described more concretely.Suppose, the pixel row of interest is the (N)-th pixel row whose gatesignal lines are 17 e(N) and 17 a(N). The preceding pixel row selected 1H before is assumed to be the (N−1)-th pixel row whose gate signal linesare 17 e(N−1) and 17 a(N−1). The pixel row selected 1 H after the pixelrow of interest is assumed to be the (N+1)-th pixel row whose gatesignal lines are 17 e(N+1) and 17 a(N+1).

In the (N−1)-th H-period, as a turn-on voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 a(N−1) of the (N−1)-th pixel row, a turn-on voltage isalso applied to the gate signal line 17 e(N) of the (N)-th pixel row.This is because the gate signal line 17 e (N) and the gate signal line17 a (N−1) of the pixel row in the preceding stage are shorted.Consequently, the pixel transistor 11 b(N−1) in the (N−1)-th pixel rowis turned on and the voltage applied to the source signal line 18 iswritten into the gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a(N−1).At the same time, the pixel transistor 11 e(N) in the (N)-th pixel rowis turned on, the gate (G) terminal and drain (D) terminal of the drivertransistor 11 a(N) are shorted, and the driver transistor 11 a(N) isreset.

In the (N)-th H-period which follows the (N−1)-th H-period, as a turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a (N) of the (N)-th pixelrow, a turn-on voltage is also applied to the gate signal line 17 e(N+1)of the (N+1)-th pixel row. Consequently, the pixel transistor 11 b (N)in the (N)-th pixel row is turned on and the voltage applied to thesource signal line 18 is written into the gate (G) terminal of thedriver transistor 11 a (N). At the same time, the pixel transistor 11e(N+1) in the (N+1)-th pixel row is turned on, the gate (G) terminal anddrain (D) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a (N+1) are shorted, andthe driver transistor 11 a(N+1) is reset.

Similarly, in the (N+1)-th period which follows the (N)-th H-period, asa turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a(N+1) of the(N+1)-th pixel row, a turn-on voltage is also applied to the gate signalline 17 e(N+2) of the (N+2)-th pixel row. Consequently, the pixeltransistor 11 b(N+1) in the (N+1)-th pixel row is turned on and thevoltage applied to the source signal line 18 is written into the gate(G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a(N+1). At the same time, thepixel transistor 11 e(N+2) in the (N+2)-th pixel row is turned on, thegate (G) terminal and drain (D) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a(N+2) are shorted, and the driver transistor 11 a(N+2) is reset.

According to the above-described stage-stage gate control system of thepresent invention, the driver transistor 11 a is reset for a period of 1H, and then voltage (current) programming is performed.

As in the case of FIG. 33(a), if the reset mode in FIG. 44(a) issynchronized with the voltage-programming mode in FIG. 44(b), there isno problem because the period from the reset mode in FIG. 44(a) to thecurrent-programming mode in FIG. 44(b) is fixed (constant). If thisperiod is short, the driver transistors 11 are not reset completely. Ifit is too long, the driver transistor 11 a is turned off completely,which means that much time is required for current programming. Also,the brightness of the screen 12 is decreased.

After the state in FIG. 44(a), a state shown in FIG. 44(b) occurs. FIG.44(b) shows a state in which the transistor 11 b is turned on and thetransistors 11 e and 11 d are turned off. This state in FIG. 44(b), is astate in which voltage programming is being performed. Specifically, aprogramming voltage is output from the source driver circuit 14 andwritten into the gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a (thepotential of the gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a is setin the capacitor 19). Incidentally, in the case of voltage programming,it is not always necessary to turn off the transistor 11 d duringvoltage programming. Besides, the transistor 11 e is not necessary ifthere is no need to combine with the N-fold driving shown in FIG. 13,15, or the like or perform intermittent N/K-fold pulse driving (thisdriving method provides two or more illuminated areas in a screen andcan be implemented easily by turning on and off the transistor 11 e).Since this has been described earlier, description thereof will beomitted.

When performing voltage programming for white display using theconfiguration shown in FIG. 43 or drive method shown in FIG. 44, thevoltage programming is started from offset voltage of completely blackdisplay even if there are variations in the characteristics of drivertransistors in pixels (the offset voltage is a starting voltage at whicha current specified according to the characteristics of each drivertransistor starts to flow). Thus, the time required to reach a targetcurrent value becomes uniform according to gradations. This eliminatesgradation errors due to variations in the characteristics of thetransistor 11 a, making it possible to achieve proper image display.

After the current programming in FIG. 44(b), the transistor 11 d isturned off and the transistor 11 d is turned on to deliver theprogramming current to the EL element 15 from the driver transistor 11a, and thereby illuminate the EL element 15, as shown in FIG. 44(c).

As described above, the reset driving according to the present inventionusing the voltage programming shown in FIG. 43 consists of a firstoperation of turning on the transistor 11 d, turning off the transistor11 e, and passing current through the transistor 11 a in sync with theHD synchronization signal; a second operation of disconnecting thetransistor 11 a from the EL element 15 and shorting between the drain(D) terminal and gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a (orbetween the source (S) terminal and gate (G) terminal, or generallyspeaking, between two terminals including the gate (G) terminal of thedriver transistor); and a third operation of programming the drivertransistor 11 a with voltage after the above operations.

In the above example, the transistor 11 d is turned on and off tocontrol the current delivered from the driver transistor 11 a (in thecase of configuration shown in FIG. 1) to the EL element 15. To turn onand off the transistor 11 d, the gate signal line 17 b needs to bescanned, for which the shift register circuit 61 (the gate drivercircuit 12) is required. However, shift register circuits 61 are largein scale and the use of a shift register circuit 61 for the gate signalline 17 b makes it impossible to reduce bezel width. A system describedwith reference to FIG. 40 solves this problem.

Incidentally, although the pixel configuration for current programmingillustrated in FIG. 1 and the like is mainly described herein by way ofexamples, the present invention is not limited to this and it goeswithout saying that the present invention can also be applied to otherconfiguration for current programming (current-mirror pixelconfiguration) described with reference to FIG. 38 and the like.

Also, the technical concept of turning on and off elements as a blockcan also be applied to the pixel configuration for voltage programmingin FIG. 41 and the like. According to the invention, since this methodpasses current through the EL elements 15 intermittently, it can be usedin combination with a method (described with reference to FIG. 50, etc.)which applies a reverse bias voltage. Thus, the present invention can beperformed in combination with other examples.

FIG. 40 shows an example of a block driving system. For ease ofunderstanding, it is assumed that a gate driver circuit 12 is formeddirectly on an array board 71 or that a silicon chip, gate driver IC 12,is mounted on an array board 71. Source driver circuits 14 and sourcesignal lines 18 are omitted to avoid complicating the drawing.

In FIG. 40, gate signal lines 17 a are connected to the gate drivercircuit 12. On the other hand, gate signal lines 17 b are connected toillumination control lines 401. In FIG. 40, four gate signal lines 17 bare connected to one illumination control line 401.

Incidentally, although four gate signal lines 17 b are grouped into ablock here, this is not restrictive and it goes without saying that morethan four gate signal lines 17 b may be grouped into a block. Generally,it is preferable to divide the display area 50 into five or more parts.More preferably, the screen 50 should be divided into ten or more parts.Even more preferably, the screen 50 should be divided into twenty ormore parts. A small number of divisions will make flickeringconspicuous. Too large a number of divisions will increase the number ofillumination control lines 401, making it difficult to lay out theillumination control lines 401.

Thus, in the case of a QCIF display panel, which has 220 verticalscanning lines, at least 220/5=44 or more lines should be grouped into ablock. More preferably, 220/10=11 or more lines should be grouped into ablock. However, if odd-numbered rows and even-numbered rows are groupedinto two different blocks, there is not much flickering even at a lowframe rate, and thus the two blocks are sufficient.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the current flowing through the ELelements 15 are turned on and off on a block-by-block basis by theapplication of either a turn-on voltage (Vgl) or turn-off voltage (Vgh)to illumination control lines 401 a, 401 b, 401 c, 401 d, . . . , 401 nin sequence.

Incidentally, in the example in FIG. 40, the gate signal lines 17 b donot intersect the illumination control lines 401. Thus, there can be nodefect in which a gate signal line 17 b would become short-circuitedwith an illumination control line 401. Also, since there is nocapacitive coupling between gate signal lines 17 b and illuminationcontrol lines 401, addition of capacitance is very small when the gatesignal lines 17 b are viewed from the illumination control lines 401.This makes it easy to drive the illumination control lines 401.

The gate driver circuit 12 is connected with the gate signal lines 17 a.When a turn-on voltage is applied to gate signal lines 17 a, theappropriate pixel rows are selected and the transistors 11 b and 11 c inthe selected pixel rows are turned on. Then, currents (voltage) appliedto the source signal lines 18 are programmed into the capacitors 19 inthe pixels. On the other hand, the gate signal lines 17 b are connectedwith the gate (G) terminals of the transistors lid in the pixels. Thus,when a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the illumination controllines 401, current paths are formed between the driver transistors 11 aand EL elements 15. When a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied, the anodeterminals of the EL elements 15 are opened.

Preferably, control timing of turn-on/turn-off voltages applied to theillumination control lines 401 and a pixel row selection voltage (Vgl)outputted to the gate signal lines 17 a by the gate driver circuit 12are synchronized with one horizontal scanning clock (1 H). However, thisis not restrictive.

The signals applied to the illumination control lines 401 simply turn onand off the current delivered to the EL elements 15. They do not need tobe synchronized with image data outputted from the source drivercircuits 14. This is because the signals applied to the illuminationcontrol lines 401 are intended to control the current programmed intothe capacitors 19 in the pixels 16. Thus, they do not always need to besynchronized with the pixel row selection signal. Even when they aresynchronized, the clock is not limited to a 1-H signal and may be a ½-Hor ¼-H signal.

Even in the case of the current-mirror pixel configuration shown in FIG.38, the transistors 11 e can be turned on and off if the gate signallines 17 b are connected to the illumination control lines 401. Thus,block driving can be implemented.

Incidentally, in FIG. 32, by connecting the gate signal lines 17 a tothe illumination control lines 401 and performing resets, it is possibleto implement block driving. In other words, the block driving accordingto the present invention is a drive method which puts a plurality ofpixel rows in non-illumination (black display) mode simultaneously usingone control line.

In the above example, one selection pixel row is placed (formed) perpixel row. The present invention is not limited to this and a selectiongate signal line may be placed (formed) for two or more pixel rows.

FIG. 41 shows such an example. Incidentally, for ease of explanation,the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 is employed mainly. In FIG. 41, thegate signal line 17 a for pixel row selection selects three pixels (16R,16G, and 16B) simultaneously. Reference character R is intended toindicate something related to a red pixel, reference character Gindicates something related to a green pixel, and reference character Bindicates something related to a blue pixel.

Thus, when the gate signal line 17 a is selected, the pixels 16R, 16G,and 16B are selected and get ready to write data. The pixel 16R writesdata into a capacitor 19R via a source signal line 18R, the pixel 16Gwrites data into a capacitor 19G via a source signal line 18G, and thepixel 16B writes data into a capacitor 19B via a source signal line 18B.

The transistor 11 d of the pixel 16R is connected to a gate signal line17 bR, the transistor 11 d of the pixel 16G is connected to a gatesignal line 17 bG, and the transistor 11 d of the pixel 16B is connectedto a gate signal line 17 bB. Thus, an EL element 15R of the pixel 16R,EL element 15G of the pixel 16G, and EL element 15B of the pixel 16B canbe turned on and off separately. Illumination times and illuminationperiods of the EL element 15R, EL element 15G, and EL element 15B can becontrolled separately by controlling the gate signal line 17 bR, gatesignal line 17 bG, and gate signal line 17 bB.

To implement this operation, in the configuration in FIG. 6, it isappropriate to form (place) four shift register circuits: a shiftregister circuit 61 which scans the gate signal line 17 a, shiftregister circuit 61 which scans the gate signal line 17 bR, shiftregister circuit 61 which scans the gate signal line 17 bG, and shiftregister circuit 61 which scans the gate signal line 17 bB.

Incidentally, although it has been stated that a current N times largerthan a predetermined current is passed through the source signal line 18and that a current N times larger than a predetermined current is passedthrough the EL element 15 for a period of 1/N, this cannot beimplemented in practice. Actually, signal pulses applied to the gatesignal line 17 penetrate into the capacitor 19, making it impossible toset a desired voltage value (current value) on the capacitor 19.Generally, a voltage value (current value) lower than a desired voltagevalue (current value) is set on the capacitor 19. For example, even if10 times larger current value is meant to be set, only approximately 5times larger current value is set on the capacitor 19. For example, evenif N=10 is specified, N=5 times larger current actually flows throughthe EL element 15. Thus, this method sets an N times larger currentvalue to pass a current proportional or corresponding to the N-foldvalue through the EL element 15. Alternatively, this drive methodapplies a current larger than a desired value to the EL element 15 in apulsed manner.

This method performs current (voltage) programming so as to obtaindesired emission brightness of the EL element by passing a currentlarger than a desired value intermittently through the driver transistor11 a (in the case of FIG. 1) (i.e., a current which will give brightnesshigher than the desired brightness if passed through the EL element 15continuously).

Incidentally, a compensation circuit which employs the penetration tothe capacitor 19 is installed in the source driver circuit 14. This willbe described later.

Preferably, N-channel transistors are used as the switching transistors11 b and 11 c, etc. in FIG. 1 and the like. This will reduce penetrationvoltage reaching the capacitor 19. Also, since off-leakage of thecapacitor 19 is reduced, this method can be applied to a 10-Hz or lowerframe rate.

Depending on pixel configuration, if the penetration voltage tends toincrease the current flowing through the EL element 15, white peakvoltage will increase, increasing perceived contrast in image display.This provides for a good image display.

Conversely, it is also useful to use P-channel transistors as theswitching transistors 11 b and 11 c in FIG. 1 to cause penetration, andthereby obtain a proper black display. When the P-channel transistor 11b turns off, the voltage goes high (Vgh), shifting the terminal voltageof the capacitor 19 slightly to the Vdd side. Consequently, the voltageat the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 a rises, resulting in moreintense black display. Also, the current used for first gradationdisplay can be increased (a certain base current can be delivered upuntil gradation 1), and thus shortages of write current can be easedduring current programming.

Besides, it is useful to increase penetration voltage by intentionallyforming a capacitor 19 b between the gate signal line 17 a and the gate(G) terminal of the transistor 11 a (see FIG. 42(a)). Preferably, thecapacitance of the capacitor 19 b is between 1/50 and 1/10 (bothinclusive) of the capacitance of a normal capacitor 19 a. Morepreferably, it is between 1/40 and 1/15 (both inclusive). Alternatively,it should be from 1 to 10 times (both inclusive) the source-gate (orsource-drain (SG) or gate-drain (GD)) capacitance of the transistor 11b. More preferably, it is from 2 to 6 times (both inclusive) the SGcapacitance. Incidentally, the capacitor 19 b may be formed or placedbetween one terminal of the capacitor 19 a (gate (G) terminal of thetransistor 11 a) and source (S) terminal of the transistor 11 d. In thatcase, the capacitance and the like have the same values as thosedescribed above.

Let Cb (pF) denote the capacitance of the penetration-voltage generatingcapacitor 19 b, let Ca (pF) denote the capacitance of the capacitor 19a, let Vw denote the gate (G) terminal voltage of the transistor 11 a inthe case of white peak current (during white raster display at themaximum display brightness), and let Vb denote the gate (G) terminalvoltage in the case of black display current (basically when the currentis O, i.e., during black display), preferably the following relationshipis satisfied.Ca/(200Cb)≦|Vw−Vbl≦Ca/(8Cb)Incidentally, |Vw−Vb| is the absolute value of the difference in theterminal voltage of the driver transistor between white display andblack display (i.e., a variable voltage range).

More preferably the following relationship is satisfied.Ca/(100Cb)≦|Vw−Vb|≦Ca/(10Cb)

The transistor 11 b should be a p-channel transistor and should have atleast two gates. Preferably, it has three or more gates. Morepreferably, it has four or more gates. Capacitors with a capacitance of1 to 10 times the source-gate (SG or gate-drain (GD)) capacitance of thetransistor 11 b (when activated) are placed or formed in series.

Incidentally, the above items apply not only to the pixel configurationin FIG. 1, but also to other pixel configurations. For example, in thecurrent-mirror pixel configuration in FIG. 42(b), a penetration-voltagegenerating capacitor is formed or placed between the gate signal line 17a or 17 b and gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 a. The switchingtransistor 11 c should be an n-channel transistor and should have two ormore gates. Alternatively, switching transistors 11 c and 11 d should bep-channel transistors and should have three or more gates.

In the voltage-programming pixel configuration in 41, apenetration-voltage generating capacitor 19 c is formed or placedbetween the gate signal line 17 c and gate (G) terminal of the drivertransistor 11 a. The switching transistor 11 c should have three or moregates. The penetration-voltage generating capacitor 19 c may be formedor placed between the drain (D) terminal of the transistor 11 c (on theside of the capacitor 19 b) and the gate signal line 17 a. Also, thepenetration-voltage generating capacitor 19 c may be formed or placedbetween the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 a and the gate signalline 17 a. The penetration-voltage generating capacitor 19 c may beformed or placed between the drain (D) terminal of the transistor 11 c(on the side of the capacitor 19 b) and the gate signal line 17 c.

Let Ca denote the capacitance of the charge-holding capacitor 19 a, letCc denote the source-gate capacitance (the capacitance of anypenetration-voltage generating capacitor is added) of the switchingtransistor 11 c or 11 d, let Vgh denote a high voltage signal applied tothe gate signal line, and let Vgl denote a low voltage signal applied tothe gate signal line, proper black display can be achieved if thefollowing relationship is satisfied.0.05 (V)≦(Vgh−Vgl)×(Cc/Ca)≦0.8 (V)

More preferably the following relationship is satisfied.0.1 (V)≦(Vgh−Vgl)×(Cc/Ca)≦0.5 (V)

The above items also apply to the pixel configurations in FIG. 43 andthe like. In the voltage-programming pixel configuration in FIG. 43, thepenetration-voltage generating capacitor 19 b is formed or placedbetween the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 a and the gate signalline 17 a.

Incidentally, the penetration-voltage generating capacitor 19 b isformed by the source wiring and gate wiring of the transistor. However,since the capacitor 19 b is formed by increasing the source width of thetransistor 11 and lapping the source wiring over the gate signal line17, there may be cases in which the capacitor 19 b is not separatedclearly from the transistor in a practical sense.

The approach of constructing a penetration-voltage generating capacitor19 b in appearance by making the switching transistors 11 b and 11 c (inthe configuration in FIG. 1) larger than necessary also belongs to thepresent invention. The switching transistors 11 b and 11 c are oftenformed in such a way as to satisfy a relationship: channel widthW/channel length L=6/6 μm. Increasing the W amounts to constructing apenetration-voltage generating capacitor 19 b. For example, the ratio ofW to L is configured to be between 2:1 and 20:1 (both inclusive).Preferably, the ratio of W to L is between 3:1 and 10:1 (bothinclusive).

Preferably, the size (capacitance) of the penetration-voltage generatingcapacitors 19 b is varied among R, G, and B, which make pixelsmodulated. This is because drive current varies among the EL elements 15of R, G, and B as well as because cutoff voltage varies with the ELelement 15, varying the voltage (current) programmed into the gate (G)terminal of the driver transistor 11 a among the EL elements 15. Forexample, if a capacitor 11 bR for the R pixel is 0.02 pF, capacitors 11bG and 11 bB for the other colors (G and B pixels) should be 0.025 pF.Also, if the capacitor 11 bR for the R pixel is 0.02 pF, the capacitor11 bG for the G pixel should be 0.03 pF and the capacitor 11 bB for theB pixel should be 0.025 pF, for example. By varying the capacitance ofthe capacitors 11 b among the R, G, and B pixels in this way, it ispossible to adjust offset drive current separately for R, G, and B. Thismakes it possible to optimize black display levels for R, G, and B.

It has been described that the capacitance of the penetration-voltagegenerating capacitors 19 b is varied, but the penetration voltage isdetermined relatively depending on relationship between the capacitanceof the charge-holding capacitor 19 a and capacitance of thepenetration-voltage generating capacitor 19 b. Thus, it is not strictlynecessary to vary the capacitors 19 b among the R, G, and B pixels. Thatis, the capacitance of the charge-holding capacitors 19 a may be varied.For example, if the capacitor 11 aR for the R pixel is 1.0 pF, thecapacitor 11 aG for the G pixel may be 1.2 pF and the capacitor 11 bBfor the B pixel may be 0.9 pF. At this time, the capacitance of thepenetration-voltage generating capacitors 19 b should be common among R,G, and B. Thus, according to the present invention, the capacitanceratio between the charge-holding capacitors 19 a and penetration-voltagegenerating capacitors 19 b is varied at least for one of the RGB colors.Incidentally, both the capacitance of the charge-holding capacitors 19 aand capacitance of the penetration-voltage generating capacitors 19 bmay be varied among the R, G, and B pixels.

Also, the capacitance of the penetration-voltage generating capacitors19 b may be varied between the left and right of the screen 50. In thecase of pixels 16 located close to the gate drivers 12, since they areplaced on the signal supply side, gate signals rise quickly (because ofa high through-rate), resulting in a high penetration voltage. Pixelsplaced (formed) at the ends of the gate signal lines 17 have bluntwaveforms (because the gate signal lines 17 have capacitance). This isbecause gate signals rise slowly (because of a low through-rate),resulting in a low penetration voltage. Thus, the penetration-voltagegenerating capacitors 19 b of the pixels 16 close to the side ofconnection with the gate drivers 12 should be downsized. Also,capacitors 19 b at the ends of the gate signal lines 17 should beenlarged. For example, the capacitance of the capacitors is varied byapproximately 10% between the left and right of the screen.

The penetration voltage generated depends on the capacitance ratiobetween the charge-holding capacitors 19 a and penetration-voltagegenerating capacitors 19 b. Thus, although it has been stated that thecapacitance of the penetration-voltage generating capacitors 19 b arevaried between the left and right of the screen, this is notrestrictive. It is also possible to keep the capacitance of thepenetration-voltage generating capacitors 19 b constant between the leftand right of the screen and vary the capacitance of the charge-holdingcapacitors 19 a between the left and right of the screen. Needless tosay, it is also possible to vary both the capacitance of thepenetration-voltage generating capacitors 19 b and capacitance of thecharge-holding capacitors 19 a between the left and right of the screen.

One of the problems with the N-fold pulse driving according to thepresent invention is that the current applied to the EL elements 15 is Ntimes larger than the current applied conventionally althoughinstantaneously. Large current may shorten the life of EL elements. Tosolve this problem, it is useful to apply a reverse bias voltage Vm tothe EL elements 15.

In the above example, RGB image data is rewritten within a field(frame). The RGB data may be rewritten sequentially. The term“sequentially” means rewriting R image data in the first field, G imagedata in the second field, and B image data in the third field assumingthat one frame consists of three fields. This drive method is referredto as sequential driving.

Needless to say, sequential driving may be used in combination withanother drive method according to the present invention such as N-foldpulse driving or reset driving. Display panels employing a combinationof drive methods according to the present invention or display apparatusemploying such a display panel are also included in the presentinvention.

FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display panel whichperforms sequential driving. A source driver circuit 14 outputs R, G,and B data to connection terminals 996 by switching among them. Thus,the source driver circuit 14 only needs ⅓ as many output terminals as inFIG. 48.

Signals outputted from the source driver circuit 14 to the connectionterminals 996 are allocated to 18R, 18G, and 18B by an output switchingcircuit 751. The output switching circuit 751 is formed directly on anarray board 71 by polysilicon technology. Alternatively, it may beformed with silicon chips and mounted on the array board 71 by COGtechnology. Also, the output switching circuit 751 may be incorporatedinto the source driver circuit 14 as a sub-circuit of the source drivercircuit 14.

If a changeover switch 752 is connected to an R terminal, the outputsignal from the source driver circuit 14 is applied to the source signalline 18R. If the changeover switch 752 is connected to a G terminal, theoutput signal from the source driver circuit 14 is applied to the sourcesignal line 18G. If the changeover switch 752 is connected to a Bterminal, the output signal from the source driver circuit 14 is appliedto the source signal line 18B.

Incidentally, in the configuration in FIG. 76, when the changeoverswitch 752 is connected to the R terminal, the G terminal and B terminalof the changeover switch are open. Thus, the current entering the sourcesignal lines 18G and 18B is 0 A. Consequently, the pixels 16 connectedto the source signal lines 18G and 18B provide a black display.

When the changeover switch 752 is connected to the G terminal, the Rterminal and B terminal of the changeover switch are open. Thus, thecurrent entering the source signal lines 18R and 18B is 0 A.Consequently, the pixels 16 connected to the source signal lines 18R and18B provide a black display.

In the configuration in FIG. 76, when the changeover switch 752 isconnected to the B terminal, the R terminal and G terminal of thechangeover switch are open. Thus, the current entering the source signallines 18R and 18G is 0 A. Consequently, the pixels 16 connected to thesource signal lines 18R and 18G provide a black display.

Basically, if one frame consists of three fields, R image data iswritten in sequence into the pixels 16 in the display area 50 in thefirst field. In the second field, G image data is written in sequenceinto the pixels 16 in the display area 50. In the third field, B imagedata is written in sequence into the pixels 16 in the display area 50.

Thus, R data→G data→B data→R data→ . . . are rewritten in sequence inthe appropriate fields to implement sequential driving. Description ofhow N-fold pulse driving is performed by turning on and off theswitching transistor 11 d as shown in FIG. 1 has been given withreference to FIGS. 5, 13, 16, etc. Needless to say, such a drive methodcan be combined with sequential driving.

In the above example, it has been stated that when image data is writteninto the R pixel 16, black data is written into the G pixel and B pixel,that when image data is written into the G pixel 16, black data iswritten into the R pixel and B pixel, and that when image data iswritten into the B pixel 16, black data is written into the R pixel andG pixel. The present invention is not limited to this.

For example, when image data is written into the R pixel 16, the G pixeland B pixel may retain the image data rewritten in the previous field.This can make the screen 50 brighter. When image data is written intothe G pixel 16, the R pixel and B pixel may retain the image datarewritten in the previous field. When image data is written into the Bpixel 16, the G pixel and R pixel may retain the image data rewritten inthe previous field.

In order to retain image data in pixels other than the color pixel beingrewritten, the gate signal line 17 a can be controlled separately forthe R, G, and B pixels. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 75, a gatesignal line 17 aR can be designated as a signal line which turns on andoff the transistors 11 b and 11 c of the R pixel, a gate signal line 17aG can be designated as a signal line which turns on and off thetransistors 11 b and 11 c of the G pixel, and a gate signal line 17 aBcan be designated as a signal line which turns on and off thetransistors 11 b and 11 c of the B pixel. On the other hand, the gatesignal line 17 b can be designated as a signal line which commonly turnson and off the transistors 11 d of the R, G, and B pixels.

With the above configuration, when the source driver circuit 14 outputsR image data and the changeover switch 752 is set to an R contact, aturn-on voltage can be applied to the gate signal line 17 aR and aturn-off voltage can be applied to the gate signal lines aG and aB.Thus, the R image data can be written into the R pixel 16 and the Gpixel 16 and R pixel 16 can retain the image data of the previous field.

When the source driver circuit 14 outputs G image data in the secondfield and the changeover switch 752 is set to a G contact, a turn-onvoltage can be applied to the gate signal line 17 aG and a turn-offvoltage can be applied to the gate signal lines aR and aB. Thus, the Gimage data can be written into the G pixel 16 and the R pixel 16 and Bpixel 16 can retain the image data of the previous field.

When the source driver circuit 14 outputs B image data in the thirdfield and the changeover switch 752 is set to a B contact, a turn-onvoltage can be applied to the gate signal line 17 aB and a turn-offvoltage can be applied to the gate signal line aR and aG. Thus, the Bimage data can be written into the B pixel 16 and the R pixel 16 and Gpixel 16 can retain the image data of the previous field.

In the example shown in FIG. 75, the gate signal lines 17 a are placed(formed) in such a way as to turns on and off the transistors 11 b ofthe R, G, and B pixels 16 separately. However, the present invention isnot limited to this. For example, a gate signal line 17 a common to theR, G, and B pixels 16 may be formed of placed as illustrated in FIG. 76.

In relation to the configuration in FIG. 75 and the like, it has beenstated that when the R source signal line is selected by the changeoverswitch 752, the G and B source signal lines are open. However, the openstate is an electrically floating state and is not desirable.

FIG. 76 shows a configuration in which measures are taken to eliminatesuch floating state. A terminal a of a changeover switch 752 of anoutput switching circuit 751 is connected to a Vaa voltage (voltage forblack display). A terminal b is connected to an output terminal of thesource driver circuit 14. The changeover switch 752 is installed foreach of the R, G, and B pixels.

In the state shown in FIG. 76, a changeover switch 752R is connected toa Vaa terminal. Thus, the Vaa voltage (voltage for black display) isapplied to the source signal line 18R. A changeover switch 752G isconnected to a Vaa terminal. Thus, the Vaa voltage (voltage for blackdisplay) is applied to the source signal line 18G. A changeover switch752B is connected to the output terminal of the source driver circuit14. Thus, a B image signal is applied to the source signal line 18B.

In the above state, the B pixel is being rewritten and a black displayvoltage is applied to the R pixel and G pixel. As the changeoverswitches 752 are controlled in the above manner, an image composed ofthe pixels 16 are rewritten. Incidentally, control of the gate signallines 17 b is the same as in the examples described above, and thusdetailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above example, the R pixel 16 is rewritten in the first field,the G pixel 16 is rewritten in the second field, and the B pixel 16 isrewritten in the third field. That is, the color of the pixel rewrittenchanges every field. The present invention is not limited to this. Thecolor of the pixel rewritten may be changed every horizontal scanningperiod (1 H). For example, a possible drive method involves rewritingthe R pixel in the first H, the G pixel in the second H, the B pixel inthe third H, the R pixel in the fourth H, and so on. Of course, thecolor of the pixel rewritten may be changed every two horizontalscanning periods or every ⅓ field.

FIG. 77 shows an example, in which the color of the pixel rewrittenchanges every 1 H. Incidentally, in FIGS. 77 to 79, the oblique hatchingindicates that the pixels 16 either retain image data from the previousfield instead of being rewritten or are displayed in black. Of course,the black display of the pixels and retention of image data from theprevious field may be repeated alternately.

Needless to say, in the drive system in FIGS. 75 to 79, it is alsopossible to use the N-fold pulse driving in FIG. 13 or simultaneousM-row driving. FIGS. 75 to 79, and the like, show writing of pixels 16.Although illumination control of the EL elements 15 is not described, itgoes without saying that this example can be used in combination withexamples described earlier or later.

One frame need not necessarily consist of three fields and may consistof two fields or four or more fields. In one example illustrated herein,one frame consists of two fields and the R and G pixels out of the threeprimary RGB colors are rewritten in the first field and the B pixel isrewritten in the second field. In another example illustrated herein,one frame consists of four fields and the R pixel out of the threeprimary RGB colors is rewritten in the first field, the G pixel isrewritten in the second field, and the B pixel is rewritten in the thirdand fourth field. In these sequences, white balance can be achieved moreefficiently if the luminous efficiencies of the R, G, and B EL elements15 are taken into consideration.

In the above example, the R pixel 16 is rewritten in the first field,the G pixel 16 is rewritten in the second field, and the B pixel 16 isrewritten in the third field. That is, the color of the pixel rewrittenchanges every field.

According to the example shown in FIG. 77, in the first field, an Rpixel is rewritten in the first H, a G pixel is rewritten in the secondH, a B pixel is rewritten in the third H, an R pixel is rewritten in thefourth H, and so on. Of course, the color of the pixel rewritten may bechanged every two or more horizontal scanning periods or every ⅓ field.

According to the example shown in FIG. 77, in the first field, an Rpixel is rewritten in the first H, a G pixel is rewritten in the secondH, a B pixel is rewritten in the third H, and an R pixel is rewritten inthe fourth H. In the second field, a G pixel is rewritten in the firstH, a B pixel is rewritten in the second H, an R pixel is rewritten inthe third H, and a G pixel is rewritten in the fourth H. In the thirdfield, a B pixel is rewritten in the first H, an R pixel is rewritten inthe second H, a G pixel is rewritten in the third H, and a B pixel isrewritten in the fourth H.

Thus, by rewriting the R, G, and B pixels in each field arbitrarily orwith some regularity, it is possible to prevent separation among the R,G, and B colors. Also, flickering is reduced.

In FIG. 78, a plurality of pixel 16 colors are rewritten every 1 H. InFIG. 77, in the first field, the pixel 16 rewritten in the first H is anR pixel, the pixel 16 rewritten in the second H is a G pixel, the pixel16 rewritten in the third H is a B-pixel, the pixel 16 rewritten in thefourth H is an R pixel.

In FIG. 78, positions of the different-colored pixels rewritten arechanged every 1 H. By assigning R, G, and B pixels to different fields(needless to say, this may be done with some regularity) and rewritingthem in sequence, it is possible to prevent separation among the R, G,and B colors as well as to reduce flickering.

Incidentally, even in the example in FIG. 78, the R, G, and B pixelsshould have the same illumination time or luminous intensity in eachpicture element, which is a set of R, G, and B pixels. Needless to say,this is also done in the examples in FIGS. 76, 77, and the like to avoidcolor irregularities.

As shown in FIG. 78, in order to rewrite pixels of different colors ineach H (three colors—R, G, and B—are rewritten in the first H in thefirst field in FIG. 78), in FIG. 75, the source driver circuit 14 can beconfigured to output image signals of arbitrary colors (or colorsdetermined with some regularity) to the terminals and the changeoverswitches 752 can be configured to connect to the R, G, and B contactsarbitrarily (or with some regularity).

The panel in an example in FIG. 79 has W (white) pixels 16W in additionto the three primary colors RGB. By forming or placing pixels 16W, it ispossible to achieve peak brightness of colors properly as well as toachieve a high brightness-display. FIG. 79(a) shows an example in whichR, G, B, and W pixels 16 are formed in each pixel row. FIG. 79(b) showsan example in which R, G, B, and W pixels are placed in turns indifferent pixel rows.

Needless to say, the drive method in FIG. 79 can incorporate the drivemethods in FIGS. 77, 78, etc. Also, it goes without saying that N-foldpulse driving, simultaneous M-row driving, etc. can be incorporated.These matters can easily be implemented by those skilled in the artbased on this specification, and thus description thereof will beomitted.

Incidentally, for ease of explanation, it is assumed that the displaypanel according to the present invention has the three primary colorsRGB, but this is not restrictive. The display panel may have cyan,yellow, and magenta in addition to R, G, and B, or it may have any oneof R, G, and B or any two of R, G, and B.

Also, although it has been stated that the sequential driving systemhandles R, G, and B in each field, it goes without saying that thepresent invention is not limited to this. Besides, the examples in FIGS.75 to 79 illustrate how image data is written into pixels 16. They donot illustrate (although, of course, they are related to) a method ofdisplaying images by operating the transistors lid and passing currentthrough the EL elements 15 unlike in FIG. 1. In the configuration shownin FIG. 1, current is passed through the EL elements 15 by controllingthe transistors 11 d.

Also, the drive methods in FIGS. 77, 78, etc. can display RGB images insequence by controlling the transistors 11 d (in the case of FIG. 1).For example, in FIG. 80(a), an R display area 53R, G display area 53G,and B display area 53B are scanned from top to bottom (or from bottom totop) of the screen during one frame (one field) period. The remainingarea becomes a non-display area 52. That is, intermittent driving isperformed.

FIG. 80(b) shows an example in which a plurality of RGB display areas 53are generated during one field (one frame) period. This drive method isanalogous to the one shown in FIG. 16. Thus, it will require noexplanation. In FIG. 80(b), by dividing the display area 53, it ispossible to eliminate flickering even at a lower frame rate.

FIG. 81(a) shows a case in which R, G, and B display areas 53 havedifferent sizes (needless to say, the size of a display area 53 isproportional to its illumination period). In FIG. 81(a), the R displayarea 53R and G display area 53G have the same size. The B display area53B has a larger size than the G display area 53G. In an organic ELdisplay panel, B often has a low light emission efficiency. By makingthe B display area 53B larger than the display areas 53 of other colorsas shown in FIG. 81(a), it is possible to achieve a white balanceefficiently.

FIG. 81(b) shows an example in which there are a plurality of B displayperiods 53B (53B1 and 53B2) during one field (one frame) period. WhereasFIG. 81(a) shows a method of varying the size of one B display area 53Bto allow the white balance to be adjusted properly, FIG. 81(b) shows amethod of displaying multiple B display areas 53B having the samesurface area to achieve a proper white balance.

The drive system according to the present invention is not limited toeither FIG. 81(a) or FIG. 81(b). It is intended to generate R, G, and Bdisplay areas 53 and create an intermittent display, and thereby correctblurred moving pictures and insufficient writing into the pixels 16.With the drive method in FIG. 16, independent display areas 53 for R, G,and B are not generated. R, G, and B are displayed simultaneously (itshould be stated that a W display area 53 is presented). Incidentally,it goes without saying that FIG. 81(a) and FIG. 81(b) may be combined.For example, it is possible to combine the drive method of using displayareas 53 of different sizes for R, G, and B in FIG. 81(a) with the drivemethod of generating multiple display areas 53 for R, G, or B in FIG.81(b).

Incidentally, the drive method in FIGS. 80 and 81 is not limited to thedrive methods in FIGS. 75 to 79 according to the present invention.Needless to say, with a configuration in which the currents flowingthrough the EL elements 15 (EL elements 15R, EL elements 15G, and ELelements 15B) are controlled separately for R, G, and B as shown in FIG.41, the drive method in FIGS. 80 and 81 can be implemented easily. Byapplying turn-on/turn-off voltages to the gate signal line 17 bR, it ispossible to turn on and off the R pixel 16R. By applyingturn-on/turn-off voltages to the gate signal line 17 bG, it is possibleto turn on and off the G pixel 16G. By applying turn-on/turn-offvoltages to the gate signal line 17 bB, it is possible to turn on andoff the B pixel 16B.

The above driving can be implemented by forming or placing a gate drivercircuit 12 bR which controls the gate signal line 17 bR, a gate drivercircuit 12 bG which controls the gate signal line 17 bG, and a gatedriver circuit 12 bB which controls the gate signal line 17 bB, asillustrated in FIG. 82. By driving the gate driver circuits 12 bR, 12bG, and 12 bB in FIG. 82 by the method described in FIG. 6 or the like,the drive method in FIGS. 80 and 81 can be implemented. Of course, itgoes without saying that the drive methods in FIG. 16 and the like canbe implemented using the configuration of the display panel in FIG. 82.

Also, with the configuration shown in FIGS. 75 to 78, the drive methodin FIGS. 80 and 81 can be implemented using a gate signal line 17 bcommon to the R, G, and B pixels without using a gate signal line 17 bRwhich controls the EL elements 15R, a gate signal line 17 bG whichcontrols the EL elements 15G, and a gate signal line 17 bB whichcontrols the EL elements 15B as long as black image data can be writteninto pixels 16 other than the pixels 16 whose image data is rewritten.

In the EL element 15, electrons are injected into an electron transportlayer from the negative pole (cathode) while at the same time positiveholes are injected into a positive hole transport layer from thepositive pole (anode). The injected electrons and positive holes move tothe opposite pole under the influence of applied electric fields. In sodoing, electrons and positive holes are trapped in an organic layer, andcarriers are accumulated due to difference in energy levels onboundaries of a light-emitting layer.

It is known that accumulation of space charges in the organic layercauses molecules to be oxidized or reduced, producing unstable radicalanion molecules or radical cation molecules, which in turn degrademembrane quality, resulting in reduced brightness and increased drivevoltage during constant-current driving. To prevent this, devicestructure is changed and reverse voltage is applied, for example.

Application of a reverse bias voltage means application of a reversecurrent, and thus injected electrons and positive holes are drawn to thenegative and positive poles, respectively. This makes it possible tocancel formation of space charge in the organic layer and reduceelectro-chemical degradation, thereby prolonging the life.

FIG. 45 shows reverse bias voltage Vm versus changes in terminal voltageof the EL element 15. The terminal voltage results when a rated currentis applied to the EL element 15. In FIG. 45, the current density of thecurrent passed through the EL element 15 is 100 A per square meter. Thetrend in FIG. 45 shows little difference from the trend observed whenthe current density is 50 to 100 A per square meter. Thus, it ispresumed that this method can be applied to a wide range of currentdensity.

The vertical axis represents the ratio of the terminal voltage after2500 hours to the initial terminal voltage of the EL element 15. Forexample, if the terminal voltage is 8 V and 10 V, respectively, when acurrent with a current density of 100 A per square meter is applied attime 0 (zero) and after 2500 hours, the terminal voltage ratio is10/8=1.25.

The horizontal axis represents the ratio of the product of the reversebias voltage Vm and its application duration t1 in a period to a ratedterminal voltage V0. For example, if the reverse bias voltage Vm isapplied at 60 Hz (60 Hz has no particular meaning) for ½ (half) aperiod, then t1=0.5. Also, if the terminal voltage (rated terminalvoltage) is 8 V when a current with a current density of 100 A persquare meter is applied at time 0 (zero) and if the reverse bias voltageVm is 8 V, then |reverse bias voltage×t1|/(rated terminalvoltage×t2)=|−8 (V)×0.5|/(8(V)×0.5)=1.0.

In FIG. 45, the terminal voltage ratio stops to change when |reversebias voltage×t1|/(rated terminal voltage×t2) is 1.0 or larger (no changeto the initial rated terminal voltage). Consequently, the application ofthe reverse bias voltage Vm works well. However, the terminal voltageratio tends to increase when |reverse bias voltage×t1|/(rated terminalvoltage×t2) is 1.75 or larger. Thus, the reverse bias voltage Vm and theapplication duration rate t1 (or t2 or the ratio between t1 and t2)should be determined in such a way as to make |reverse biasvoltage×t1|/(rated terminal voltage×t2) equal to or larger than 1.0.Preferably, the reverse bias voltage Vm and the application durationrate t1 should be determined in such a way as to make |reverse biasvoltage×t1|/(rated terminal voltage×t2) equal to or smaller than 1.75.

However, for bias driving, the reverse bias Vm and rated current shouldbe applied alternately. To equalize average brightness of samples A andB over a unit time as shown in FIG. 46 by the application of the reversebias voltage Vm, it is necessary to pass a larger currentinstantaneously than when no reverse bias voltage is applied.Consequently, the application of the reverse bias voltage Vm (sample Ain FIG. 46) also increases the terminal voltage of the EL element 15.

However, in FIG. 45, even with the drive method which involves applyingthe reverse bias voltage, the rated terminal voltage V0 should satisfythe average brightness (i.e., illuminate the EL element 15). (Accordingto examples cited herein, such a terminal voltage is obtained when acurrent with a current density of 200 A per square meter is applied.However, since the duty ratio is ½ the average brightness over one cycleis equal to the brightness at a current density of 200 A per squaremeter.)

The above description assumes white raster display (maximum voltage isapplied to all the EL elements 15 in the screen). However, video displayon an EL display apparatus is provided as gradation display of naturalimages. Thus, it is not that a white peak current (a current which flowsduring maximum white display, or a current with an average currentdensity of 100 A per square meter according to the examples describedherein) always flows through the EL elements 15.

Generally, in the case of video display, the current applied to (passedthrough) each EL element 15 is approximately 0.2 of a white peak current(a current which flows at a rated terminal voltage, or a current with acurrent density of 100 A per square meter according to examples citedherein).

Therefore, for video display in the example in FIG. 45, the value of thehorizontal axis should be multiplied by 0.2. Thus, the reverse biasvoltage Vm and the application duration rate t1 (or t2 or the ratiobetween t1 and t2) should be determined in such a way as to make|reverse bias voltage×t1|/(rated terminal voltage×t2) equal to 0.2 orlarger. Preferably, the reverse bias voltage Vm and the applicationduration rate t1 should be determined in such a way as to make |reversebias voltage×t1|/(rated terminal voltage×t2) equal to 0.35 (=1.75×0.2)or smaller.

That is, on the horizontal axis (|reverse bias voltage×t1|/(ratedterminal voltage×t2)) in FIG. 45, the value of 1.0 should be changed to0.2. Thus, if video is displayed on the display panel (probably this isnormally the case and white raster is not likely to be displayedconstantly), the reverse bias voltage Vm should be applied for apredetermined time t1 in such a way as to make |reverse biasvoltage×t1|/(rated terminal voltage×t2) equal to 0.2 or larger. Even ifthe value of |reverse bias voltage×t1|/(rated terminal voltage×t2) isincreased, the terminal voltage ratio does not increase greatly as shownin FIG. 45. Thus, an upper limit should be set to make |reverse biasvoltage×t1|/(rated terminal voltage×t2) equal to 1.75 or smaller byallowing for white raster display. Basically, according to the presentinvention, a reverse bias voltage Vm (current) is applied during periodsin which current does not flow through the EL element 15. However, thisis not restrictive. For example, a reverse bias voltage Vm (current) maybe applied forcibly when current flows through the EL element 15. Inthat case, however, the current will stop flowing through the EL element15 as a result, bringing about non-illumination mode (black displaymode). Also, although description herein is focused on application of areverse bias voltage Vm in a current-programming pixel configuration,this is not restrictive.

In a pixel configuration for reverse bias driving, an N-channeltransistor 11 g is used as shown in FIG. 47. Of course, this may be aP-channel transistor.

In FIG. 47, as the voltage applied to a gate potential control line 473is set higher than the voltage applied to a reverse bias line 471, thetransistor 11 g (N) turns on and the reverse bias voltage Vm is appliedto the anode electrode of the EL element 15.

In the pixel configuration in FIG. 47 and the like, the gate potentialcontrol line 473 may be operated constantly at a fixed potential. Forexample, in FIG. 47, when voltage Vk is 0 (V), the potential of the gatepotential control line 473 is set to 0 (V) or higher (preferably, 2 V orhigher). Incidentally, this potential is denoted by Vsg. In this state,as the potential of the reverse bias line 471 is set to the reverse biasvoltage Vm (0 V or lower, and preferably −5 V or lower than Vk), thetransistor 11 g (N) turns on and the reverse bias voltage Vm is appliedto the anode electrode of the EL element 15. As the voltage of thereverse bias line 471 is set higher than the voltage applied to the gatepotential control line 473 (i.e., the gate (G) terminal voltage of thetransistor 11 g), the transistor 11 g stays off and the reverse biasvoltage Vm is not applied to the anode electrode of the EL element 15.Of course, it goes without saying that in this state, the reverse biasline 471 may be put into a high-impedance state (such as an open state).

Also, a gate driver circuit 12 c may be formed or placed separately tocontrol the reverse bias line 471 as illustrated in FIG. 48. The gatedriver circuit 12 c operates by shifting in sequence as in the case ofthe gate driver circuit 12 a and the location of application of thereverse bias voltage is shifted in sync with the shift operation.

The drive method described above makes it possible to apply the reversebias voltage Vm to the EL element 15 by varying only the potential ofthe reverse bias line 471 with the gate (G) terminal of the transistor11 g set at a fixed potential. This makes it easy to control theapplication of the reverse bias voltage Vm. Also, the voltage appliedbetween the source (S) terminal and gate (G) terminal of the transistor11 g can be decreased. This similarly applies when the transistor 11 gis a p-channel transistor.

The reverse bias voltage Vm is applied when current is not passedthrough the EL element 15. This can be done by turning on the transistor11 g when the transistor 11 d is off. That is, the reverse of on/offlogic of the transistor 11 d can be applied to the gate potentialcontrol line 473. For example, in FIG. 47, the gate (G) terminal of thetransistors 11 d and 11 g can be connected to the gate signal line 17 b.Since the transistor 11 d is a P-channel transistor and the transistor11 g is an N-channel transistor, they turn on and off in the oppositemanner.

FIG. 49 is a timing chart of reverse bias driving. In the chart, thesubscripts such as (1) and (2) indicate pixel row numbers. It is assumedfor ease of explanation that (1) indicates the first pixel row while (2)indicates the second pixel row, but this is not restrictive. It is alsopossible to consider that (1) indicates the N-th pixel row while (2)indicates the (N+1)-th pixel row. The same applies to other examplesexcept for some special cases. Although examples in FIG. 49 and the likeare described by citing the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 and the like,this is not restrictive. They are also applicable, for example, to thepixel configurations in FIGS. 41, 38, etc.

When a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gate signal line 17 a (1)in the first pixel row, a turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gatesignal line 17 b (1) in the first pixel row. Thus, the transistor 11 dis off and current does not flow through the EL element 15.

A voltage Vsl (which turns on the transistor 11 g) is applied to areverse bias line 471(1). Thus, the transistor 11 d is on and a reversebias voltage is applied to the EL element 15. The reverse bias voltageis applied a predetermined period ( 1/200 of 1 H or longer; or 0.5 μsec)after the turn-off voltage (Vgh) is applied to the gate signal line 17b. The reverse bias voltage is turned off a predetermined period ( 1/200of 1 H or longer; or 0.5 psec) before the turn-on voltage (Vgl) isapplied to the gate signal line 17 b. This is done in order to preventthe transistors 11 d and 11 g from turning on simultaneously.

In the next 1 H (horizontal scanning period), a turn-off voltage (Vgh)is applied to the gate signal line 17 a, and the second pixel row isselected. That is, a turn-on voltage is applied to a gate signal line 17b(2). On the other hand, a turn-on voltage (Vgl) is applied to the gatesignal line 17 b, the transistor lid is turned on, and a current fromthe transistor 11 a flows through the EL element 15, causing the ELelement 15 to emit light. Also, a turn-off voltage (Vsh) is applied tothe reverse bias line 471(1) stopping the reverse bias voltage frombeing applied to the EL elements 15 in the first pixel row (1). Thevoltage Vsl (reverse bias voltage) is applied to a reverse bias line471(2) in the second pixel row.

As the above operations are repeated in sequence the images on theentire screen is rewritten. In the above example, a reverse bias voltageis applied while the pixels are being programmed. However, the circuitconfiguration in FIG. 48 is not limited to this. It is obvious that areverse bias voltage may be applied to a plurality of pixel rowscontinuously. It is also obvious that the reverse bias driving may beused in combination with block driving (see FIG. 40), N-fold pulsedriving, reset driving, or dummy pixel driving.

Reverse bias voltage can be applied not only during image display. Thereverse bias voltage may be applied for a predetermined period after theEL display apparatus is turned off.

Although the above example has been described with reference to thepixel configuration in FIG. 1, it goes without saying that the use ofreverse bias voltage is also applicable to the pixel configurations inFIGS. 38 and 41 and the like. For example, FIG. 50 shows a pixelconfiguration for current programming.

FIG. 50 shows a pixel configuration of a current mirror. The transistor11 c is a pixel selection element. As a turn-on voltage is applied to agate signal line 17 a 1, the transistor 11 c turns on. The transistor 11d is a switching element which is equipped with a reset function as wellas a function to short-circuit the drain (D) terminal and gate (G)terminal of the transistor 11 a. The transistor lid turns on when aturn-on voltage is applied to a gate signal line 17 a 2.

The transistor 11 d turns on 1 H (horizontal scanning period, i.e., onepixel row) or more before the given pixel is selected. Preferably, itturns on at least 3 Hs before. In that case, the transistor 11 d turnson 3 Hs before selection of the pixel, short-circuiting the gate (G)terminal and drain (D) terminal of the transistor 11 a. Consequently,the transistor 11 a is turned off. Thus, the current stops flowingthrough the transistor 11 b and the EL element 15 is turned off.

When the EL element 15 is not illuminated, the transistor 11 g turns on,applying a reverse bias voltage to the EL element 15. Thus, the reversebias voltage is applied while the transistor lid is on. Consequently,the transistor lid and transistor 11 g turn on simultaneously in logicalterms.

The voltage Vsg is applied continuously to the gate (G) terminal of thetransistor 11 g. The transistor 11 g turns on when a reverse biasvoltage sufficiently smaller than the voltage Vsg is applied to thereverse bias line 471.

Subsequently, when there comes a horizontal scanning period in which avideo signal is applied to (written into) the pixel, a turn-on voltageis applied to a gate signal line 17 a 1, turning on the transistor 11 c.Thus, a video signal voltage outputted from the source driver circuit 14to the source signal line 18 is applied to the capacitor 19 (thetransistor 11 d remains on).

When the transistor 11 d is turned on, the pixel is put into blackdisplay mode. The longer the conduction period of the transistor 11 d inone field (one frame) period, the larger the proportion of the blackdisplay period. Thus, the brightness during a display period needs to beincreased to obtain a desired average brightness over one field (oneframe) in spite of the black display period. That is, the current to bepassed through the EL element 15 during the display period needs to beincreased. This operation is based on the N-fold pulse driving accordingto the present invention. Thus, an operation characteristic of thepresent invention is implemented by a combination of the N-fold pulsedriving and driving which involves creating a black display by turningon the transistor 11 d. Also, a configuration (method) characteristic ofthe present invention involves applying a reverse bias voltage to the ELelement 15 when the EL element 15 is not illuminated.

Although in the above example, a reverse bias voltage is applied whenpixels are not illuminated during image display, the configuration inwhich a reverse bias voltage is applied is not limited to this. There isno need to form a reverse-biasing transistor 11 g in each pixel as longas a reverse bias voltage is applied when no image is displayed. Thephrase “not illuminated” means a configuration in which a reverse biasvoltage is applied after or before using the display panel.

For example, in the pixel configuration in FIG. 1, the pixel 16 isselected (the transistors 11 b and 11 c are turned on) and a low voltageV0 (e.g., GND voltage) which the source driver IC (circuit) 14 canoutput is outputted from the source driver IC and applied to the drain(D) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a. If the transistor 11 d isturned on as well in this state, the voltage V0 is applied to the anodeterminal of the EL element. At the same time, if a voltage Vm lower thanthe voltage V0 by −5 to −15 V is applied to the cathode Vk of the ELelement 15, a reverse bias voltage is applied to the EL element 15.Also, if a voltage lower than the voltage V00 by 0 to −5 V is applied asthe Vdd voltage, the transistor 11 a is turned off. Thus, by outputtinga voltage from the source driver circuit 14 and thereby controlling thegate signal line 17, it is possible to apply a reverse bias voltage tothe EL element 15.

The N-fold pulse driving allows a predetermined current (programmedcurrent (at a voltage held in the capacitor 19)) to be passed throughthe EL element 15 again during one field (one frame) period even after ablack display is created once. With the configuration in FIG. 50,however, once the transistor 11 d turns on, since the capacitor 19 isdischarged (or its charge is reduced), it is not possible to pass apredetermined current (programmed current) through the EL element 15.However, this configuration features ease of circuit operation.

Incidentally, although the above example uses a pixel configuration forcurrent programming, the present invention is not limited to this and isapplicable to other current-based pixel configurations such as thoseshown in FIGS. 38 and 50. It is also applicable to a pixel configurationfor voltage programming such as the one shown in FIGS. 51, 54, and 62.

FIG. 51 shows pixel configurations for voltage programming. Thetransistor 11 b acts as a selection switching element while thetransistor 11 a acts as a driver transistor which applies current to theEL element 15. This configuration contains a transistor (switchingelement) 11 g which applies a reverse bias voltage to the anode of theEL element 15.

With the pixel configuration in FIG. 51, the current to be passedthrough the EL element 15 is applied to the source signal line 18. Then,it is applied to the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 a as thetransistor 11 b is selected.

To describe the configuration in FIG. 51, basic operation will bedescribed first with reference to FIG. 52. The pixel configuration inFIG. 51 is of a voltage offset canceling type and operates in fourstages: initialization operation, reset operation, programmingoperation, and light-emitting operation.

The initialization operation is performed after a horizontalsynchronization signal (HD) is provided. A turn-on voltage is applied tothe gate signal line 17 b, turning on the transistor 11 g. Besides, aturn-on voltage is also applied to the gate signal line 17 a, turning onthe transistor 11 c. At this time, a voltage Vdd is applied to thesource signal line 18. Thus, the voltage Vdd is applied to a terminal aof the capacitor 19 b. In this state, the driver transistor 11 a turnson and a small current flows through the EL element 15. This currentmakes the voltage on the drain (D) terminal of the driver transistor 11a larger in absolute value than at least the voltage at an operatingpoint of the driver transistor 11 a.

Next, the reset operation is performed. A turn-off voltage is applied tothe gate signal line 17 b, turning off the transistor 11 e. On the otherhand, a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 c for aperiod of T1, turning on the transistor 11 b. The period T1 correspondsto a reset period. A turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line17 a continuously for a period of 1 H. Preferably, the period T1 isbetween 20% and 90% (both inclusive) of 1 H or between 20 μsec and 160μsec (both inclusive). Preferably, a capacitance ratio Ca/Cb between acapacitor 19 b (Cb) and capacitor 19 a (Ca) is between ⅙ and 2/1 (bothinclusive).

During a reset period, the transistor 11 b turns on, short-circuitingthe gate (G) terminal and drain (D) terminal of the driver transistor 11a. Thus, the voltages at the gate (G) terminal and drain (D) terminal ofthe transistor 11 a become equal, putting the transistor 11 a in anoffset mode (reset mode: a state in which no current flows). In thereset mode, the voltage at the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 aapproaches a starting voltage at which a current starts to flow. A gatevoltage which maintains the reset mode is held at a terminal b of thecapacitor 19 b. Thus, the capacitor 19 holds an offset voltage (resetvoltage).

In a next programming mode, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 c, turning off the transistor 11 b. On the other hand,DATA voltage is applied to the source signal line 18 for a period of Td.Thus, the sum of the DATA voltage and offset voltage (reset voltage) isapplied to the gate (G) terminal of the driver transistor 11 a. Thisallows the driver transistor 11 a to pass a programmed current.

After the programming period, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gatesignal line 17 a, turning off the transistor 11 c and cutting off thedriver transistor 11 a from the source signal line 18. Besides, aturn-off voltage is also applied to the gate signal line 17 c, turningoff the transistor 11 b, which remains off for a period of 1 F. On theother hand, a turn-on voltage and turn-off voltage are applied to thegate signal line 17 b periodically, as required. Thus, if combined withN-fold pulse driving in FIGS. 13, 15, etc. or with interlaced driving,this method can achieve even better image display. This method can alsobe combined with reverse bias driving. Thus, the drive system accordingto the present invention is not limited to current-driven pixelconfigurations such as the one shown in FIG. 1, but it is alsoapplicable to voltage-programming pixel configurations.

With the drive system in FIG. 52, in reset mode, the capacitor 19 holdsa starting current voltage (offset voltage, reset voltage) of thetransistor 11 a. Thus, the darkest black display is created when thereset voltage is being applied to the gate (G) terminal of the drivertransistor 11 a. However, coupling between the source signal line 18 andpixel 16, penetration voltage to the capacitor 19, or punch-through of atransistor causes excessive brightness (reduced contrast) resulting in awhitish screen. Therefore, the drive method described with reference toFIG. 53 cannot achieve high display contrast.

To apply the reverse bias voltage Vm to the EL element 15, it isnecessary to turn off the transistor 11 a. To turn off the transistor 1a, the Vdd terminal and gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 a can beshort-circuited. This configuration will be described with reference toFIG. 53 later.

Alternatively, it is possible to apply the Vdd voltage or a voltagewhich turns off the transistor 11 a to the source signal line 18, turnon the transistor 11 b, and apply the voltage to the gate (G) terminalof the transistor 11 a. This voltage turns off the transistor 11 a (ormakes it pass almost no current (almost off: the transistor 11 a is in ahigh-impedance state)) Subsequently, the transistor 11 g is turned onand a reverse bias voltage is applied to the EL element 15. The reversebias voltage Vm may be applied to all the pixels simultaneously.Specifically, a voltage which almost turns off the transistors 11 a isapplied to the source signal lines 18 and the transistors 11 b in allthe pixel rows are turned on. Consequently, the transistors 11 a areturned off. Then, the transistors 11 g are turned on and a reverse biasvoltage is applied to the EL elements 15. Then, video signals areapplied to one after another of the pixel rows to display images on thedisplay apparatus.

Next, reset driving in the pixel configuration in FIG. 51 will bedescribed. FIG. 53 shows an example. As shown in FIG. 53, the gatesignal line 17 a connected to the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11c in a pixel 16 a is also connected to the gate (G) terminal of thereset transistor 11 b in a pixel 16 b in the next stage. Similarly, thegate signal line 17 a connected to the gate (G) terminal of thetransistor 11 c in the pixel 16 b is also connected to the gate (G)terminal of the reset transistor 11 b in a pixel 16 c in the next stage.

Thus, when a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 aconnected to the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 c in the pixel16 a, the pixel 16 a enters voltage programming mode, the resettransistor 11 b of the pixel 16 b in the next stage turns on, and thedriver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 b is reset. Similarly, when aturn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a connected to thegate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 c in the pixel 16 b, the pixel 16b enters current programming mode, the reset transistor 11 b of thepixel 16 c in the next stage turns on, and the driver transistor 11 a ofthe pixel 16 c is reset. Thus, reset driving by way of a preceding-stagegate control system can be implemented easily. Also, the number of leadsfrom a gate signal line per pixel can be reduced.

More detailed description will be provided. Suppose voltage is appliedto gate signal lines 17 as shown in FIG. 53(a). Specifically, a turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a of the pixel 16 a and aturn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 a of otherpixels 16. Also, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal lines17 b of the pixels 16 a and 16 b while a turn-on voltage is applied tothe gate signal lines 17 b of the pixels 16 c and 16 d.

In this state, the pixel 16 a is in voltage programming mode and is notilluminated, the pixel 16 b is in reset mode and not illuminated, thepixel 16 c is pending current programming and is illuminated, and thepixel 16 d is pending current programming and is illuminated.

After 1 H, data in a shift register 61 circuit of the controlling gatedriver circuit 12 is shifted one bit to enter a state shown in FIG.53(b). In FIG. 53(b), the pixel 16 a is pending current programming andis illuminated, the pixel 16 b is current programming mode and is notilluminated, the pixel 16 c is in reset mode and is not illuminated, andthe pixel 16 d is pending programming and is illuminated.

Thus, it can be seen that the voltage applied to the gate signal line 17a of each pixel resets the driver transistor 11 a of the pixel in thenext stage to perform voltage programming in the next horizontalscanning period sequentially.

The pixel configuration for voltage programming in FIG. 43 can alsoimplement preceding-stage gate control. FIG. 54 shows an example inwhich a connection method of a preceding-stage gate control system isused for the pixel configuration in FIG. 43.

In FIG. 54, the gate signal line 17 a connected to the gate (G) terminalof the transistor 11 b in the pixel 16 a is connected to the gate (G)terminal of the reset transistor 11 e in the pixel 16 b in the nextstage. Similarly, the gate signal line 17 a connected to the gate (G)terminal of the transistor 11 b in the pixel 16 b is connected to thegate (G) terminal of the reset transistor 11 e in the pixel 16 c in thenext stage.

Thus, when a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 aconnected to the gate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 b in the pixel16 a, the pixel 16 a enters voltage programming mode, the resettransistor 11 e of the pixel 16 b in the next stage turns on, and thedriver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 b is reset. Similarly, when aturn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a connected to thegate (G) terminal of the transistor 11 b in the pixel 16 b, the pixel 16b enters current programming mode, the reset transistor 11 e of thepixel 16 c in the next stage turns on, and the driver transistor 11 a ofthe pixel 16 c is reset. Thus, reset driving by way of a preceding-stagegate control system can be implemented easily.

More detailed description will be provided. Suppose voltage is appliedto gate signal lines 17 as shown in FIG. 55(a). Specifically, a turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a of the pixel 16 a and aturn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 a of otherpixels 16. It is assumed that all the transistors 11 g for reversebiasing are off.

In this state, the pixel 16 a is in voltage programming mode, the pixel16 b is in reset mode, the pixel 16 c is pending current programming,and the pixel 16 d is pending current programming.

After 1 H, data in the shift register 61 circuit of the controlling gatedriver circuit 12 is shifted one bit to enter a state shown in FIG.55(b). In FIG. 55(b), the pixel 16 a is pending current programming, thepixel 16 b is in current programming mode, the pixel 16 c is in resetmode, and the pixel 16 d is pending programming.

Thus, it can be seen that the voltage applied to the previous stage forthe gate signal line 17 a of each pixel resets the driver transistor 11a of the pixel in the next stage to perform voltage programming in thenext horizontal scanning period sequentially.

For completely black display in current driving, the driver transistors11 of the pixels are programmed with 0 current. That is, the sourcedriver circuit 14 delivers no current. When no current is delivered,parasitic capacitance caused in the source signal line 18 cannot bedischarged and the potential of the source signal line 18 cannot bevaried. Consequently, the gate potential of the driver transistors alsoremains unchanged and the potential in the previous frame (field) (1 F)remains accumulated in the capacitor 19. For example, if the previousframe contains white display, the white display is retained even if thecurrent frame contains completely black display.

To solve this problem, according to the present invention, a black levelvoltage is written into the source signal line 18 at the beginning ofone horizontal scanning period (1 H) before the current to be programmedis output to the source signal line 18. For example, if image dataconsists of the 0th to 7th gradations close to black level, a blacklevel voltage is written only during a certain period at the beginningof one horizontal scanning period to reduce the load of currentprogramming and makeup for insufficient writing. Incidentally,completely black display corresponds to the 0th gradation and whitedisplay corresponds to the 63rd gradation (in the case of 64-gradationdisplay).

Preferably, gradations for which precharging is performed should belimited to a black display region. Specifically, precharging isperformed by selecting gradations in a black region (low brightnessregion, in which only a small (weak) write current flows in the case ofcurrent driving) from write image data (selective precharging). Ifprecharging is performed over the entire range of gradations, brightnesslowers (a target brightness is not reached) in a white display region.Also, vertical streaks may be displayed in some cases.

Preferably, selective precharging is performed for ⅛ of all thegradations beginning with the 0th gradation (e.g., in the case of 64gradations, image data is written after precharging for the 0th to 7thgradations). More preferably, selective precharging is performed for1/16 of all the gradations beginning with the 0th gradation (e.g., inthe case of 64 gradations, image data is written after precharging forthe 0th to 3rd gradations).

A method which performs precharging by detecting only the 0th gradationis also effective in enhancing contrast, especially in black display. Itachieves an extremely good black display. The problem is that the screenappears whitish in hue when the entire screen displays the 1st andsecond gradations. Thus, selective precharging is performed in apredetermined range: ⅛ of all the gradations beginning with the 0thgradation.

Incidentally, it is also useful to vary the precharge voltage andgradation range among R, G, and B because emission start voltage andemission brightness of EL display elements 15 vary among R, G, and B.For example, selective precharging is performed for ⅛ of all thegradations beginning with the 0th gradation (e.g., in the case of 64gradations, image data is written after precharging for the 0th to 7thgradations) in the case of R. In the case of other colors (G and B),selective precharging is performed for 1/16 of all the gradationsbeginning with the 0th gradation (e.g., in the case of 64 gradations,image data is written after precharging for the 0th to 3rd gradations).Regarding the precharge voltage, if 7 V is written into the sourcesignal lines 18 for R, 7.5 V is written into the source signal lines 18for the other colors (G and B). Optimum precharge voltage often varieswith the production lot of the EL display panel. Thus, preferablyprecharge voltage is adjustable with an external regulator or the like.Such a regulator circuit can be also implemented easily using anelectronic regulator circuit.

A charge-holding capacitor 19 has been formed in the pixel 16. If 10% ormore of the electric charges held in the capacitor 19 is dischargedduring one field (one frame) period, black display mode cannot bemaintained. Regarding image display condition, pixels which containtransistors 11 with poor turn-off characteristics produce bright spots(referred to as off-leakage bright spots). Thus, it is necessary to usetransistors with good turn-off characteristics, especially in the caseof the transistor 11 b in FIG. 1.

To solve this problem, the present invention turns off activetransistors 11 d for a short period of time by operating the gate signallines 17 b. This drive method can reduce off-leakage bright spots evenif the voltage-holding transistors 11 b have poor turn-offcharacteristics. Also, by varying the OFF period of the voltage-holdingtransistors 11 b, it is possible to control the extent to whichoff-leakage bright spots are reduced.

As illustrated in FIG. 115(a), off-leakage bright spots are believed tooccur as the electric charges held in the capacitor 19 leak via thetransistor 11 b. This is because basically the potential at point A islow when the transistor 11 d is on. Thus, if the transistor 11 d remainson for a long period of time, the capacitor 19 is discharged rapidly,causing off-leakage bright spots. When a display area 53 and non-displayarea 52 repeat at short intervals as shown in FIG. 16, if thenon-display area 52 has a larger proportion as shown in FIG. 13, nooff-leakage bright spot occurs. However, if the display area 53continues for a long time as shown in FIG. 5, off-leakage bright spotsoccur.

Also, the drive method for a display panel according to the presentinvention displays images by switching among the conditions in FIGS. 5,13, and 16 according to contents of image data. Thus, the displaycondition in FIG. 5 can continue depending on contents of image display.If the condition in FIG. 5 occurs, the drive method described below iseffective. That is, there is no need to always carry out the methoddescribed in the example below. It can be carried out when thetransistor 11 d remains on for a certain period.

When the transistor 11 d turns off, the potential at point A rises atleast once. Consequently, as illustrated in FIG. 115(b), current flowsfrom point A to point B, recharging the capacitor 19. Thus, nooff-leakage bright spot occurs. That is, as the transistor 11 d isturned on and off, the capacitor 19 is charged.

Incidentally, the above description is derived from theoreticalconsiderations of a phenomenon. Thus, there might be mistakenunderstanding. However, it is true that the use of the drive methodaccording to the present invention in an actual panel is effective inreducing off-leakage bright spots.

In the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 (FIG. 115), the driver transistor11 a and switching transistor 11 d are p-channel transistors. Thus, whenthe transistor 11 d is on, the transistor 11 b leaks. On the other hand,when the transistor 11 d turns off, the potential at point A rises,reducing leakage of electric charges or recharging the capacitor. Thus,if the transistor 11 d is an n-channel transistor, electric charges leakfrom the capacitor 19 when the transistor 11 d is off and the capacitor19 is recharged when the transistor 11 d is on. Incidentally, if thedriver transistor is an n-channel transistor, off-leakage bright spotsdo not occur, but brightness increases further in white display.Needless to say, the present invention can deal with this situation aswell.

Now, a concept of “duty” will be introduced for ease of explanation. Theterm “duty” according to the present invention differs from a term“duty” used in relation to STN liquid crystal display panels. A dutyratio of 1/1 according to the present invention means a drive mode inwhich current flows through the EL elements 15 for a period of one field(one frame). That is, the duty ratio of 1/1 means a state in which thenon-display area 52 takes up 0% of the display screen 50. Actually,however, since the pixel rows being programmed with current (voltage)are in non-display mode, the duty ratio of 1/1 in a strict sense cannotoccur in the pixel configuration in FIG. 1. However, since there are 200or more pixel rows in a display panel, a non-display area of one pixelrow or so is within tolerances. On the other hand a duty ratio of 0/1means a state in which no current flows through the EL elements 15 for aperiod of one field (one frame). That is, the duty ratio of 0/1 means astate in which the non-display area 52 takes up 100% of the displayscreen 50. In the following description, it is assumed that there are220 pixel rows in the EL display panel.

For example, a duty ratio of 220/220 is reduced to a duty ratio of 1/1.Also, a duty ratio of 55/220 is reduced to a duty ratio of 1/4. When theduty ratio is 1/4, 3/4 of the screen is taken up by a non-display area52. Thus, in N-fold pulse driving, a target (predetermined) displaybrightness can be obtained when N=4. A duty ratio of 110/220 is reducedto a duty ratio of 1/2. When the duty ratio is 1/2, 50% of the screen istaken up by a non-display area 52. Thus, in N-fold pulse driving, apredetermined display brightness can be obtained when N=2.

In the description of the display panel according to the presentinvention, it is assumed that the pixel rows to be programmed withcurrent are selected by the gate signal line 17 a (in the case of FIG.1). The output from the gate driver circuit 12 a which controls the gatesignal line 17 a is referred to as a WR-side selection signal line.Also, it is assumed that EL elements 15 are selected by the gate signalline 17 b (in the case of FIG. 1). The output from the gate drivercircuit 12 b which controls the gate signal line 17 b is referred to asa gate signal line 17B (EL-side selection signal line).

The gate driver circuits 12 are fed a start pulse, which is shifted asholding data in sequence within a shift register. Based on the holdingdata in the shift register of the gate driver circuit 12 a, it isdetermined whether to output a turn-on voltage (Vgl) or turn-off voltage(Vgh) to the WR-side selection signal line. An OEV1 circuit (not shown)which turns off output forcibly is formed or placed in an output stageof the gate driver circuit 12 a. When the OEV1 circuit is low, a WR-sideselection signal which is an output of the gate driver circuit 12 a isoutputted as it is to the gate signal line 17 a. The above relationshipis illustrated logically in FIG. 116(a). Incidentally, the turn-onvoltage is set at logic level L (0) and the turn-off voltage is set atlogic level H (1).

That is, when the gate driver circuit 12 a outputs a turn-off voltage,the turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a. When thegate driver circuit 12 a outputs a turn-on voltage (logic low), it isORed with the output of the OEV1 circuit by the OR circuit and theresult is outputted to the gate signal line 17 a. That is, when the OEV1circuit is high, the turn-off voltage (Vgh) is outputted to the gatedriver signal line 17 a.

Based on holding data in a shift register of the gate driver circuit 12b, it is determined whether to output a turn-on voltage (Vgl) orturn-off voltage (Vgh) to the gate signal line 17B (EL-side selectionsignal line). An OEV2 circuit (not shown) which turns off outputforcibly is formed or placed in an output stage of the gate drivercircuit 12 b. When the OEV2 circuit is low, an output of the gate drivercircuit 12 b is outputted as it is to the gate signal line 17 b. Theabove relationship is illustrated logically in FIG. 116(a).Incidentally, the turn-on voltage is set at logic level L (0) and theturn-off voltage is set at logic level H (1).

That is, when the gate driver circuit 12 b outputs a turn-off voltage(an EL-side selection signal is a turn-off voltage), the turn-offvoltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b. When the gate drivercircuit 12 b outputs a turn-on voltage (logic low), it is ORed with theoutput of the OEV2 circuit by the OR circuit and the result is outputtedto the gate signal line 17 b. That is, when an input signal is high, theOEV2 circuit outputs the turn-off voltage (Vgh) to the gate driversignal line 17 b. Thus, even if the EL-side selection signal from theOEV2 circuit is a turn-on voltage, the turn-off voltage (Vgh) isoutputted forcibly to the gate signal line 17 b. Incidentally, if aninput to the OEV2 circuit is low, the EL-side selection signal isoutputted directly to the gate signal line 17 b.

In the example described below, to deal with off-leakage bright spots,the states in FIG. 115 are created by operating the OEV2 circuit.Specifically, even if the gate signal line 17B (EL-side selection signalline) continues to output a turn-on voltage, logic high is inputted inthe OEV2 circuit periodically to turn off the transistor 11 d. Byforcibly turning off the transistor 11 d in this way, it is possible tosolve the problem of off-leakage bright spots.

FIG. 116 shows an example of a drive method according to the presentinvention. Since the OEV1 circuit is low, pixel rows are selected one byone and programmed with current (voltage) based on the output from thegate driver circuit 12 a. Thus, the signal used to select the pixel rowsis identical with a pixel-side selection signal. The gate driver circuit12 b (EL-side selection signal line) applies logic high to the OEV2circuit every horizontal scanning period (1 H) by operating the OEV2circuit as illustrated in FIG. 116, and thereby applies a turn-offvoltage forcibly to the gate signal line 17B (EL-side selection signalline). Thus, even if the gate driver circuit 12 b always outputs aturn-on voltage (Vgl), a turn-off voltage is outputted to the gatesignal line 17 b for a certain period every 1 H due to a signal from theOEV2 circuit. The application of the turn-off voltage by the OEV2circuit reduces discharge from the capacitor 19 (see FIG. 115), andthereby reduces off-leakage bright spots.

FIG. 116 illustrates changes in output voltage to the gate signal line17 a caused by OEV1 and changes in output voltage to the gate signalline 17 b caused by OEV2. Regarding the gate signal line 17 a, sinceOEV1 is always low, the waveform of the WR-side selection signal linebecomes the waveform of the gate signal line 17 a directly. Regardingthe gate signal line 17 b, since OEV2 alternates between high and low,the output of the gate signal line 17B (EL-side selection signal line)is ORed with the output of the OEV2 circuit to produce a waveform to beapplied to the gate signal line 17 b. Thus, referring to FIG. 116, aturn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b for a periodequal to the sum (A+B) of an interval (indicated by A) during which thehigher voltage is applied to the OEV2 circuit and an interval (indicatedby B) during which a turn-off voltage is applied to the EL selectionsignal line. Also, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line17 b during a period in which the higher voltage is applied to the OEV2circuit.

By operating the OEV2 circuit, it is possible to control theillumination period of the EL elements 15. Thus, the brightness of thescreen 50 can be varied through the control of the OEV2 circuit. Thatis, the OEV2 circuit has the effect of reducing off-leakage bright spotsand controlling the screen brightness.

In FIG. 117, a turn-on voltage is constantly applied to the gate signalline 17B (EL-side selection signal line) (this corresponds to a dutyratio of 1/1 in conventional drive methods). With the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 1, however, when a turn-on voltage is applied tothe WR-side selection signal line, a turn-off voltage must be applied tothe gate signal line 17B (EL-side selection signal line). Consequently,when a turn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a, aturn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b.

Driving with a duty ratio of 1/1 causes off-leakage bright spots. Thisis because the transistor 11 b leaks due to a high inter-channel (SD)voltage of the transistor 11 b. As illustrated in FIG. 117, if OEV2 iskept high for a predetermined period during 1 H, a turn-off voltage isapplied to the gate signal line 17 b. Consequently, the transistor 11 dturns on and off creating the states in FIG. 115. When the transistor 11d turns off, the inter-channel (SD) voltage of the transistor 11 b isdecreased and the state in FIG. 115(b) is created. This reduces leakagefrom the transistor 11 b and either eliminates or greatly reducesoff-leakage bright spots.

Incidentally, although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 117that the OEV2 circuit is operated every 1 H, this is not restrictive.Needless to say, for example, the transistor 11 d may be turned on andoff every 2 Hs or more as illustrated in FIG. 118. Of course, thetransistor 11 d may be turned on and off for a predetermined period oncein every 3 Hs or more by controlling the OEV2 circuit. Needless to say,the present invention is also applicable to cases in which two pixelrows are selected at a time by the application of a turn-off voltage toa gate signal line 17 b which covers two pixel rows (see FIG. 24, etc.).

FIG. 119 shows a case in which a turn-on voltage and turn-off voltageare applied to the gate signal line 17 b periodically. A turn-on voltageand turn-off voltage are applied periodically to the gate signal line 17b rather than a turn-on voltage is applied continuously. Even when aturn-on voltage and turn-off voltage are applied to the gate signal line17 b, off-leakage bright spots may occur if a turn-on voltage continuesto be applied for a certain period or more. Again, by operating the OEV2circuit, a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b atpredetermined intervals. Consequently, the transistor 11 d is turned offperiodically. This reduces leakage from the transistor 11 b and eithereliminates or greatly reduces off-leakage bright spots.

It has been stated with reference to FIGS. 117, 118, etc. that aturn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b periodically bysetting OEV2 to high at the beginning or end of 1 H. However, thepresent invention is not limited to this. For example, as illustrated inFIG. 120, a turn-off voltage may be applied to the gate signal line 17 bin the middle of 1 H.

Thus, by applying a turn-off voltage to the gate signal line 17 b, it ispossible to reduce off-leakage bright spots. However, if the turn-offvoltage applied to the gate signal line 17 b is too short, it is noteffective in reducing off-leakage bright spots. FIG. 121 illustratesrelationship between the duration during which a turn-off voltage orturn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b and effects onreduction of off-leakage bright spots.

Off-leakage bright spots occur in black display. Off-leakage brightspots increase black illuminance (illuminance obtained by measuring thedisplay screen of the display panel with an illuminance meter)(excessive brightness resulting in a whitish screen). FIG. 121(a) showsa voltage waveform applied to a gate signal line 17 b. The applicationduration of a turn-off voltage is denoted by C and one cycle of theapplied turn-off voltage is denoted by C. Incidentally, although it isassumed here that the cycle C corresponds to a period of 1 H, this isnot restrictive.

In FIG. 121, when C/S is 0.02 or less, black illuminance is high (thereare many off-leakage bright spots), but when C/S approaches 0.02, theblack illuminance approaches 0 (there is no off-leakage bright spot). If1 H═S=100 μsec, then C/S=0.02, that is, C/S becomes 0.02 μsec. Thus,when 1 H=100 μsec, off-leakage bright spots can be eliminated byapplying a turn-off voltage to the gate signal line 17 b for a periodequal to approximately 2% of 1 H even if the duty ratio is 1/1.

Referring to FIG. 122, a signal waveform of the gate signal line 17 b(A) is obtained when the drive method according to the present inventionis not used. A signal waveform of the gate signal line 17 b(B) isobtained when a turn-on voltage and turn-off voltage are applied byoperating the OEV2 circuit based on the drive method according to thepresent invention.

In the above example, the OEV2 circuit is controlled over an entirefield (frame) period without using duty ratio control. However, thepresent invention is not limited to this. OEV2 circuit control may beperformed based on image data only when the duty ratio is 1/1.Alternatively, OEV2 circuit control may be performed when a certaincondition—e.g., a duty ratio of 1/1—continues for a certain period.

It has been shown analytically that preferably the OEV2 circuit isoperated when the duty ratio is between 1/1 and 1/2 (both inclusive),and more preferably when the duty ratio is between 1/1 and 3/4 (bothinclusive). It is also preferable to perform OEV2 circuit control whenthe duty ratio remains to be between 1/1 and 1/2 (both inclusive) for aperiod of 10 frames (fields).

Also, screen brightness can be adjusted by operating OEV2. Increasingthe duration during which OEV2 is high decreases screen brightness.Decreasing the duration during which OEV2 is high increases screenbrightness. The method of adjusting (changing) screen brightness throughoperation of OEV2 is a major feature of the drive method according tothe present invention.

In the above example, off-leakage bright spots are reduced by theapplication of a turn-off voltage to the gate signal lines 17 b.However, this is applicable only when pixels are composed of p-channeltransistors as with the pixel configuration in FIG. 1. If pixels arecomposed of n-channel transistors, a turn-on voltage is applied to thegate signal lines 17 b. As described above, the present inventionreduces off-leakage bright spots by providing periods in which a highervoltage is applied to point A than the voltage applied to the capacitor19 (point B) as illustrated in FIG. 115 rather than by applying aturn-on voltage and turn-off voltage to the gate signal lines 17 b.Also, it reduces off-leakage by providing periods in which theinter-channel voltage (SD voltage) of the holding transistor 11 b isdecreased.

The methods in FIGS. 116 to 122 reduce off-leakage bright spots, byapplying a turn-off voltage to the gate signal line 17 b periodicallythrough the operation of OEV2. However, the drive method according tothe present invention is not limited to this. A turn-off voltage may beapplied to the gate signal line 17 b at predetermined intervals throughoperation of the gate driver circuit 12 b without operating the OEV2circuit. FIG. 123 shows an example.

In FIG. 123, a non-display area 52 consisting of one pixel row isgenerated at predetermined intervals and is scanned. With the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 1, the non-display area 52 as well as the gatesignal lines 17 are not limited to a single pixel row and may cover twoor more pixel rows in generating the non-display area 52.

In FIG. 123, the non-display area 52 moves as shown by FIG.123(a)→123(b)→123(c). Preferably, the non-display area 52 repeats fouror more times in one field (one frame) as illustrated in FIG. 124.

Incidentally, in the example in FIGS. 123 and 124, the period duringwhich a turn-off voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 b is notlimited to 1 H. This period may be shorter than 1 H, as exemplified byperiod E in FIG. 125.

The above example prevents off-leakage bright spots by applying aturn-off voltage for a predetermined period through operation of theOEV2 circuit when a turn-on voltage continues to be applied to the gatesignal line 17 b (the gate signal line 17 b in FIG. 1) for a certainperiod.

As a measure against off-leakage bright spots in pixel 16 design, theturn-off characteristics of the transistor 11 b can be improved. Thiscan be done, for example, by placing a plurality of transistors 11 b inseries as illustrated in FIG. 150. It has been shown analytically thatpreferably three or more transistors 11 b are placed or formed inseries. More preferably, five or more transistors are placed or formedin series as illustrated in FIG. 150.

Incidentally, although examples in FIGS. 115 to 126 have been describedby citing the pixel configuration in FIG. 1, this is not restrictive.The drive method described with reference to FIG. 115 and the likeprevents leakage of electric charges from the capacitor 19. Thus, it isapplicable to any pixel configuration that contains a capacitor 19 andholding transistor 11 b as in FIG. 1.

The pixel configuration in FIG. 38, for example, also contains acapacitor 19 and holding transistor lid. Thus, effect of the drivemethod according to the present invention can also be achieved with thepixel configuration in FIG. 38 by controlling the transistor 11 e.Similarly, the pixel configuration in FIG. 43 also contains a capacitor19 and holding transistor 11 e. Thus, the effect of the presentinvention can be achieved by operating the transistor 11 d.

The pixel configuration in FIG. 51 also contains a capacitor 19 a andholding transistor 11 b. Thus, the effect of the present invention canbe achieved by operating the transistor 11 e. This similarly applies toFIG. 50 and the like. Furthermore, this similarly applies to the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 63. The pixel configuration in FIG. 63 alsocontains a capacitor 19 and holding transistor 11 b. Therefore, byoperating the switch 631 and affecting the transistor element 11 b viathe EL element 15, it is possible to enhance holding effect as a result.Thus, the effect of the present invention can be achieved.

A problem with the pixel configuration in FIG. 1, 38, or the like isthat the amplitude of the gate signal line 12 a causes changes to theelectric charges in the capacitor 19, making it impossible to obtainpredetermined gradations. Description will be given citing the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 1 for ease of explanation. FIG. 138 illustrateschanges in the potential of pixels 16 in the case of conventionalcurrent programming with the pixel configuration in FIG. 1.

Referring to FIG. 138, Gate Signal Line 17 a(1) represents a signalwaveform of the gate signal line 17 a of a pixel (1). Gate Signal Line17 a(2) represents a signal waveform of the gate signal line 17 a of apixel (2) next to the pixel (1). Gate Signal Line 17 a(3) represents asignal waveform of the gate signal line 17 a of a pixel (3) next to thepixel (2). Source Signal Line 18 represents a voltage (current) waveformapplied to the source signal line. The pixel potential illustrates acapacitor potential of the pixel (2) (voltage waveform of the gateterminal G of the driver transistor 11 a. The gate signal lines 17 a arescanned in the order: (1)→(2)→(3)→(4)→(5)→ . . . (1)→(2)→ . . . .

With the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 (although not limited to thepixel configuration in FIG. 1), parasitic capacitance 1381 is producedbetween the gate G and source S terminals of the transistor 11 b. Whenthe gate signal line 17 a changes from Vgh (turn-off voltage) to Vgl(turn-on voltage) or from Vgl to Vgh, the voltage change is transmittedto the gate G terminal of the transistor 11 a (capacitor 19 terminal)via the parasitic capacitance 1381. The potential change at the gateterminal of the driver transistor 11 a causes the current value (voltagevalue) programmed into the driver transistor 11 a to deviate from apredetermined value. The deviation from the predetermined value dependson a capacitance ratio between the parasitic capacitance 1381 andcapacitor 19. The deviation from the predetermined value decreases withdecreases in the capacitance of the parasitic capacitance 1381 or withincreases in the capacitance of the capacitor 19.

Noteworthy are changes in the pixel potential at points A and B. Atpoint A, the gate signal line 17 a(2) changes from Vgh to Vgl. At pointB, the gate signal line 17 a(2) changes from Vgl to Vgh (see PixelPotential in FIG. 138).

At point A, with a change in the potential of the gate signal line 17 afrom Vgh (turn-off voltage) to Vgl (turn-on voltage), the potential atthe gate terminal G of the driver transistor 11 a falls. However, sincethe transistors 11 b and 11 c are on, the potential (current) of thesource signal line 18 is written into the pixel 16 and the capacitor 19is charged (discharged). As the capacitor 19 is charged (discharged),the driver transistor 11 a is programmed to pass a predetermined current(the pixel potential becomes equal to voltage Vb). Since pixel design issuch that programming is completed within a period of 1 H, the drivertransistor 11 a passes the predetermined current at point C.

At point B, the potential of the gate signal line 17 a changes from Vgl(turn-on voltage) to Vgh (turn-off voltage). With this voltage change,the potential at the gate terminal G of the driver transistor 11 a rises(the pixel potential becomes equal to voltage Vc). When the potential ofthe gate signal line 17 a changes to Vgh (turn-off voltage), thetransistors 11 b and 11 c turn off, cutting off the capacitor 19terminal from the source signal line 18 and consequently holding thevoltage Vc.

Thus, although the pixel potential which causes programming current toflow equals the voltage Vb, the pixel potential actually held equals thevoltage Vc. Consequently, the programming current flowing through the ELelement 15 has a value different from the desired one.

A drive method which solves this problem will be described withreference to FIG. 139. However, the drive method in FIG. 138 notnecessarily presents a problem. First, reasons for that will bedescribed.

In relation to the driver transistor 11 a, the potential of the gatesignal line 17 a changes from Vgl (turn-on voltage) to Vgh (turn-offvoltage) and this state is maintained for one frame (field) period. Asthe gate signal line 17 a changes from Vgl (turn-on voltage) to Vgh(turn-off voltage), the potential of the driver transistor 11 a shiftsto the anode voltage Vdd.

Since the driver transistor 11 a is a p-channel transistor, the shift tothe anode voltage Vdd works to prevent current flow. Current programmingmethod has a problem of small programming current during black displayas described earlier herein. To deal with this problem the presentinvention uses N-fold pulse driving and the like. In FIG. 138, however,the pixel potential is finally shifted to, and held at, the black side,making it possible to achieve proper black display.

The present invention can achieve the above effect through a synergy ofthe following: each pixel driver transistor 11 a is a p-channeltransistor, the anode voltage is higher than the cathode voltage, thecurrent applied to the source signal line 18 is passed through thedriver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 when the WR-side selection signalline (the gate signal line 17 a) is low (Vgl), and the pixel 16 is cutoff from the source signal line 18 when the WR-side selection signalline (the gate signal line 17 a) is high (Vgh). Thus, it is important touse p-channel transistors as the transistors 11 b and 11 c (see FIG. 1).Also, as described with reference to FIG. 111, the synergy is enhancedif p-channel transistors are used for the gate driver circuits 12.

Also, for proper current programming, it is important to use p-channeltransistors for the transistors lid which cut off the paths to the ELelements 15. Furthermore, the synergy is further enhanced by the factthat the gate terminal G of the switching transistor lid is held high(Vgh) for a certain period (at least 2 Hs) by N-fold pulse driving,maintaining the drain terminal D of the driver transistor 11 a at arelatively high voltage because leakage from the transistor 11 b isreduced. Thus, a combination of the configuration in FIG. 1 and thesystem in FIG. 138 or the like is a configuration characteristic of thepresent invention.

Next, the drive method in FIG. 139 will be described. Incidentally, asdescribed earlier herein, the OEV1 circuit is formed in the output stageof the gate driver circuit 12 a (see FIG. 116, etc.), and a Vgh voltageis applied to the gate signal line 17 a when a high-level signal isapplied to the OEV1 circuit. By the application of the Vgh voltage, thetransistors 11 b and 11 c are turned off. (in the case of the pixelconfiguration in FIG. 1 or the like).

The OEV1 circuit, to which the higher voltage is applied once in every 1H, outputs Vgh (turn-off voltage) to the gate signal line 17 a. However,non-selected gate signal lines 17 a go through no output change becauseno turn-off voltage (Vgh) is outputted to them 17 a from the beginningIn the case of a selected gate signal line 17 a, to which a turn-onvoltage (Vgl) is applied, a Vgh (turn-off voltage) period is inserted bythe application of the higher voltage to the OEV1 circuit.

As the higher voltage is applied to the OEV1 circuit, a turn-off voltage(Vgh) is applied to all the gate signal lines 17 a. The source drivercircuit 14 absorbs programming current from the source signal line (inthe case of the pixel configuration in FIG. 1) and supplies programmingcurrent to the source signal line 18 via the anode terminal Vdd of theselected pixel 16, driver transistor 11 a, and switching transistor 11c. Thus, if all the gate signal lines 17 a turn off while the sourcedriver circuit 14 is absorbing programming current, there is no longer asupply route for the programming current. Consequently, the sourcedriver circuit 14 absorbs electric charges from the parasiticcapacitance of the source signal line 18 and the potential of the sourcesignal line 18 falls with time.

A problem with the drive method in FIG. 138 is that when the gate signalline 17 a changes from on to off, its voltage penetrates to thecapacitor 19 due to the parasitic capacitance 1381 (penetration voltage)and is held at a level higher than a predetermined voltage.

It is possible to hold a voltage approximately equal to thepredetermined voltage in the capacitor 19 by lowering the potential ofthe source signal line 18 through control of the OEV1 circuit, andthereby compensating for the penetration voltage due to the parasiticcapacitance 1381. The drive method in FIG. 139 is based on thisprinciple.

As can be seen from FIG. 139, through control of the OEV1 circuit, aperiod t1 in which a turn-off voltage is applied is inserted in a period(1 H) during which a selection voltage (turn-on voltage: Vgl) is appliedto the gate signal line 17 a (t1 corresponds to a period during whichthe higher voltage is applied to the OEV1 circuit). The period t1 isreferred to as a gate-open period. The gate-open period ends earlierthan the end of 1 H by a period of t2. Also, the gate-open period startslater than the start of 1 H by a period of t3. Thus, a period of 1H=t3+t1+t2.

Referring to FIG. 139, Gate Signal Line 17 a(1) represents a voltagewaveform of the gate signal line 17 a of a pixel (1). Gate Signal Line17 a(2) represents a voltage waveform of the gate signal line 17 a of apixel (2) next to the pixel (1). Gate Signal Line 17 a(3) represents avoltage waveform of the gate signal line 17 a of a pixel (3) next to thepixel (2). Source Signal Line 18 represents a voltage (current) waveformapplied to the source signal line. The pixel potential illustrates acapacitor potential of the pixel (3) (voltage waveform of the gateterminal G of the driver transistor 11 a). The gate signal lines 17 aare scanned in the order: (1)→(2)→(3)→(4)→(5)→ . . . (1)→(2)→ . . . .

Description will be given assuming that the pixel potential is thepotential of the pixel (3) and citing the pixel configuration in FIG. 1.In the 1st H and 2nd H, the pixel potential (3) retains the potentialfrom the previous field (frame). In the 3rd H, a turn-on voltage (Vgl)is applied to the gate signal line 17 a(3), and the transistors 11 b and11 c of the pixel row (3) turn on.

At point A in FIG. 139, with a change in the potential of the gatesignal line 17 a from Vgh (turn-off voltage) to Vgl (turn-on voltage),the potential at the gate terminal of the driver transistor 11 a falls.However, since the transistors 11 b and 11 c are on, the potential(current) of the source signal line 18 is written into the pixel 16 andthe capacitor 19 is charged (discharged). As the capacitor 19 is charged(discharged), the driver transistor 11 a is programmed to pass apredetermined current (the pixel potential becomes equal to voltage Vb).Since pixel design is such that programming is completed within a periodof 1 H, the driver transistor 11 a passes the predetermined current atpoint C.

At point B, the writing of the programming current into the pixel iscompleted and the pixel potential becomes equal to voltage Va (it isassumed that the voltage Va is a target voltage. See FIG. 142(a)). Atpoint C, the potential of the gate signal line 17 a changes from Vgl(turn-on voltage) to Vgh (turn-off voltage). With this voltage change,the potential at the gate terminal of the driver transistor 11 a rises(the pixel potential (3) becomes equal to voltage Vd due to penetrationvoltage). When the potential of the gate signal line 17 a changes to Vgh(turn-off voltage), the transistors 11 b and 11 c turn off, cutting offthe capacitor 19 terminal from the source signal line 18 andconsequently holding the pixel potential at the voltage Vd for thegate-open period t1.

During the gate-open period t1, the potential of the source signal line18 falls because the source driver circuit 14 continues to absorb theprogramming current and after a lapse of the period t1, it becomes equalto the voltage Vc as shown under Source Signal Line Potential (see FIG.142(b)). Next, during the period t2, a turn-on voltage is applied to thegate signal line 17 a(3) again, and the transistors 11 b and 11 c turnon. As the transistors 11 b and 11 c are on, the potential of the sourcesignal line 18 is written into the capacitor 19 of the pixel.Consequently, the pixel potential (3) becomes equal to the voltage Vc.In the period t2, the current-programming mode is entered again and thepixel potential (3) changes to Vb. However, the period t2 is short, onlyenough for voltage programming, and thus the amount of change fromvoltage Vc to voltage Vb is slight (the period t2 is set so that theamount of change will be slight. It has been shown analytically that theperiod t2 should be set between 0.5 and 5 μsec (both inclusive)). On theother hand, it is appropriate to set the period t1 between 0.5 and 10μsec (both inclusive).

At point E, the potential of the gate signal line 17 a(3) changes fromVgl (turn-on voltage) to Vgh (turn-off voltage). With this voltagechange, the potential at the gate terminal of the driver transistor 11 arises (the pixel potential becomes equal to the voltage Va). When thepotential of the gate signal line 17 a changes to Vgh (turn-offvoltage), the transistors 11 b and 11 c turn off, cutting off thecapacitor 19 terminal from the source signal line 18 and consequentlyholding the voltage Va. Thus, the pixel potential (3) which causesprogramming current to flow is held at the voltage Va (this means thatpenetration voltage has been compensated for).

The drive method in FIG. 139 is characterized in that it can adjust anamount of compensation for penetration voltage according to video signaldata (programming current). The magnitude of penetration voltagebasically depends on the potential difference between Vgh and Vgl,parasitic capacitance 1381, and capacitance of the capacitor 19(although there are some differences due to the gate terminal voltage ofthe driver transistor 11 a). Therefore, the magnitude of penetrationvoltage is a fixed value. If the duration during which the highervoltage is applied to the OEV1 circuit is also constant, when theprogramming current is intended for black display, the amount of currentabsorbed by the source driver circuit 14 is small. Thus, when the imagedata written into pixels is intended for black display, the potentialdrop in the source signal line 18 is also small. When the programmingcurrent is intended for white display, the amount of current absorbed bythe source driver circuit 14 is large. Thus, when the image data writteninto pixels is intended for white display, the potential drop in thesource signal line 18 is large.

On the other hand, the penetration voltage caused by the gate signalline 17 a is a fixed value. Thus, when the programming current writteninto pixels carries black display data, only a small amount ofcompensation is made for penetration voltage through control of the OEV1circuit. The penetration voltage caused by the gate signal line 17 abecomes predominant. This provides more complete black display. In blackdisplay, which is characterized by a low luminosity factor, there is noproblem even if penetration voltage causes a large deviation from apredetermined value.

When the programming current written into pixels carries white displaydata, a large amount of compensation is made for penetration voltagethrough control of the OEV1 circuit. This is because the potential ofthe source signal line 18 drops in a short time when the OEV1 circuit ishigh. Thus, by controlling the duration during which the OEV1 circuit ishigh so that the voltage drop caused through the control of the OEV1circuit and the penetration voltage caused by the gate signal line 17 awill be equal in magnitude, it is possible to eliminate the effect ofthe penetration voltage completely. Consequently, in white display,penetration voltage can be compensated for completely. For whitedisplay, which is characterized by a high luminosity factor, a drivemethod which cancels out penetration voltage works well.

Thus, the drive method according to the present invention can adjust theamount of compensation for penetration voltage according to imagedisplay data.

Incidentally, the duration during which the OEV1 circuit is high may bevaried according to image display data. A possible method involves, forexample, summing up image display data, determining screen brightnessfrom the sum, and controlling the duration during which the OEV1 circuitis high based on the determined screen brightness.

Incidentally, the amount of compensation for penetration voltage can bechanged if the gate-open period t1 and period t2 are made adjustable.This makes it possible to optimize the amount of compensation forpenetration voltage according to characteristics of the panel. However,the period t2 does not need to be established exactly.

Although it has been stated in the example in FIG. 139 that thegate-open period t1 is provided when the gate signal line 17 a isselected through the control of the OEV1 circuit. However, the presentinvention is not limited to this. It is also possible to determine foreach horizontal scanning period or each pixel row whether to provide agate-open period t1 or not for driving.

For example, a conceivable drive method involves not providing agate-open period when the image data of a pixel row consists almostentirely of black display data, providing a gate-open period when theimage data of a pixel row consists almost entirely of white displaydata, and providing a gate-open period longer than usual when the imagedata of a pixel row consists entirely of white display data.

FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a drive method accordingto the present invention. No gate-open period is provided in the 1st Hand 5th H. A gate-open period is provided in the 2nd H to 4th H, andconsequently there are potential drops in the source signal line 18.

There is a correlation between the gate-open period t1 (B in FIG.141(a)) and current programming period (in FIG. 141(a)). In a graph inFIG. 141(b), the vertical axis represents difference (%) from apredetermined brightness. However, numerals are expressed in absoluteterms. The difference from a predetermined brightness is the differencein percentage terms (%) between a target brightness and actualbrightness affected by penetration voltage and the like during currentprogramming. As can also be seen from FIG. 141(b), the error almostreaches a minimum when B/A is 0.02 or above (where B=t1, A=1 H, and C=2μsec). Therefore, preferably, B/A is 0.02 or above. However, if B is toolarge, current programming time is reduced, resulting in insufficientwriting. Thus, preferably B/A is not larger than 0.3.

By switching among modes of B/A, it is possible to adjust the effect ofpanel penetration voltage (where B is the duration during which the OEV1circuit is high, that is, the duration during which a selected gatesignal line 17 a is off while A is 1 H (one horizontal scanningperiod)). Preferably, B/A is varied according to gradations (see FIG.145). Generally, it is preferable to decrease B/A for low gradations(black display=gradations 1, 2, 3, . . . ) and increase B/A for highgradations (white display=gradations 62, 63, 64, . . . ) Preferably,approximately four modes of B/A are provided to switch among themaccording to image scenes, contents, etc.

FIG. 145 shows MODE1, MODE2, MODE3, and MODE4. MODE1 corresponds to B=0(i.e., the OEV1 circuit remains low and the selected gate signal line 17a remains off). MODE2 corresponds to B=0 on a low-gradation side (i.e.,the OEV1 circuit remains low and the selected gate signal line 17 aremains on) and B/A=0.05 H on a high-gradation side. MODE3 correspondsto B/A=0.05 over all the gradations. MODE4 is a mode in which the valueof B/A is varied according to gradations.

Also, the mode may be switched by selecting the value of B according tothe average gradation level of image data in each pixel row. Also, OEV1control may be changed above a certain gradation. It is also possible tostop using OEV1 below a certain gradation level.

The above example involves controlling the OEV1 circuit of the gatedriver circuit 12, thereby changing the potential of the source signalline 18, and thereby dealing with effects of penetration voltage and thelike. FIG. 143 shows how square waves are applied to source signal lines18 from outside to deal with effects of penetration voltage and thelike.

In FIG. 143, a capacitor driver 1431 generates square waves (referred toas source coupling signals. See FIG. 144.), which are applied bycoupling capacitors 1434 to the source signal lines 18. One end of eachcoupling capacitor 1433 is connected to a capacitor signal line 1433.The square waves are applied to the capacitor signal line 1433. Thesource coupling signals are applied to the source signal lines in syncwith horizontal synchronization signals.

For ease of explanation, description will be given with a focus on pixelpotential (2). In the 3rd H, a turn-on voltage is applied to the gatesignal line l7 a(2). Upon the application of the turn-on voltage, thetransistors 11 b and 11 c of the pixel (2) turn on and the currentapplied to the source signal line 18 is applied to the driver transistor11 a (point A). At point B, the source coupling signal applied to thecapacitor signal line 1433 changes from Vsl to Vsh. Consequently, thesource coupling signal couples (penetrates) to the source signal line18, causing the pixel potential (2) to leap to the voltage Va. However,this leap is cancelled out by the programming current in a short periodof time and the pixel potential (2) reaches a target potential Vb atpoint C at the latest.

At point C, the source coupling signal applied to the capacitor signalline 1433 changes from Vsh to Vsl. Consequently, the source couplingsignal couples (penetrates) to the source signal line 18, causing thepixel potential (2) to fall to the voltage Vc. At point C, since aturn-on voltage is applied to the gate signal line 17 a(2), the voltageVc is changed by the programming current. However, the voltage Vcchanges little if the time between point C and point D is short.

At point D, since the voltage applied to the gate signal line 17 a (2)changes from turn-on voltage to turn-off voltage, the pixel (2)potential shifts to the voltage Vb due to penetration voltage.Consequently, the target voltage Vb is held in the pixel 16. Thus, bycoupling the source coupling signal to the source signal line 18, it ispossible to compensate for penetration voltage. Needless to say, byvarying the amplitude of the source coupling signal, it is possible toadjust a compensation ratio of the penetration voltage.

FIG. 139 above shows how the potential of the source signal line 18 ischanged by controlling OEV1. However, the potential of the source signalline 18 can also be changed using the source driver circuit 14 side. Asillustrated in FIG. 147, the source driver circuit 14 has an analogswitch 752 formed or placed between a terminal 1471 connected to thesource signal line 18 and a current output circuit 1461 (see FIG. 146).Parasitic capacitance 1472 is produced in the source driver circuit 14as well.

With the switch 752 closed, the programming current Iw flows into thecurrent output circuit 1461 as illustrated in FIG. 147(a). When theswitch 752 opens (see FIG. 147(b)), the current output circuit 1461,which is a constant-current circuit, absorbs the programming current Iwcontinuously. Consequently, the electric charges in the parasiticcapacitance 1472 is absorbed, lowering the potential of internal wiring1473. In this state, if the switch 752 is turned on (see FIG. 147(c)),the programming current Iw branches into the parasitic capacitance 1472to charge it and current output circuit. This lowers the potential ofthe source signal line 18. If the situations of the potential drops inthe source signal line 18 are applied to the situations at point C topoint D in FIG. 139, the lowered potential of the source signal line 18can be written into the pixel 16 as in the case of FIG. 139.

FIG. 143 above shows a configuration in which a signal is applied to thesource signal line 18 via the capacitor signal line 1433 to compensatefor penetration voltage. FIG. 151 shows a configuration in whichpenetration voltage is compensated for in each pixel row.

In FIG. 151, one end of the capacitor 19 is connected to the drivertransistor 11 a and the other end is connected to a common signal line1511. The common signal line 1511 is a signal line shared by one pixelrow. The common signal line 1511 is connected to a common driver circuit1512. As illustrated in FIG. 152, the common driver circuit 1512 outputsa square wave signal and applies it to each common signal line 1511. Theother part of the configuration is the same as that shown in FIG. 1, andthus description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 152, Gate Signal Line 17 a(1) represents a voltagewaveform of the gate signal line 17 a of a pixel (1). Gate Signal Line17 a(2) represents a voltage waveform of the gate signal line 17 a of apixel (2) next to the pixel (1). Gate Signal Line 17 a(3) represents avoltage waveform of the gate signal line 17 a of a pixel (3) next to thepixel (2).

Common Signal Line (1) represents a voltage waveform of the commonsignal line 1511 of the pixel (1). Similarly, Common Signal Line (2)represents a voltage waveform of the common signal line 1511 of thepixel (2) and Common Signal Line (3) represents a voltage waveform ofthe common signal line 1511 of the pixel (3).

Source Signal Line 18 represents a voltage (current) waveform applied tothe source signal line. The pixel potential (2) illustrates a capacitorpotential of the pixel (2) (voltage waveform of the gate terminal G ofthe driver transistor 11 a. The gate signal lines 17 a are scanned inthe order: (1)→(2)→(3)→(4)→(5)→ . . . . (1)→(2)→ . . . . The commonsignal lines 1511 are also scanned in the order: (1)→(2)→(3)→(4)→(5)→ .. . (1)→(2)→ . . . . For ease of explanation, description will be givenwith a focus on the pixel potential of the pixel (2) (the potential atthe gate terminal G of the driver transistor 11 a). First, image data ofall the fields is held in the pixel 16.

At point A, with a change in the potential of the gate signal line 17 afrom Vgh (turn-off voltage) to Vgl (turn-on voltage), the potential atthe gate terminal G of the driver transistor 11 a falls (Va→Vc). Sincethe transistors 11 b and 11 c are on, the potential (current) of thesource signal line 18 is written into the pixel 16 and the capacitor 19begins to charge (discharge). Incidentally, the potential of the commonsignal line 1511 is assumed to be Vcl at the start of 1H (Vcl<Vch).

After a period of Ta from the start of 1 H, the potential of the commonsignal line 1511 changes from Vcl to Vch (see point B in FIG. 152).Needless to say, however, the above operation may be performed at thestart of 1 H. The change in the potential of the common signal line 1511causes the potential (pixel potential(2)) of the capacitor 19 to shiftto voltage Ve. Since the transistors 11 b and 11 c are on, the potential(current) of the source signal line 18 is written into the pixel 16, thecapacitor 19 is charged (discharged), and at point C at the end of 1 H,the target voltage Vb is written into the pixel 16. Incidentally, thetime Ta may be 0 sec. (at the start of 1 H). Preferably, the time Ta isset to between 0 and ⅕ of 1 H (both inclusive). This is becauseextending the time Ta decreases the current programming period itself.

At point C, the potential of the gate signal line 17 a changes from Vgl(turn-on voltage) to Vgh (turn-off voltage). This voltage change acts aspenetration voltage and changes the pixel potential (2) via parasiticcapacitance 1381. With this change in the potential, the pixel potential(2) becomes equal to voltage Vd. At point C, when the potential of thegate signal line 17 a changes to Vgh (turn-off voltage), the transistors11 b and 11 c turn off, cutting off the capacitor 19 terminal from thesource signal line 18 and consequently holding the voltage Vd.

After a lapse of Tb from the completion of 1 H (selection period ofpixel (2)), the potential of the common signal line 1511 changes fromVch to Vcl (see point D in FIG. 152). The change in the potential of thecommon signal line 1511 causes the potential (pixel potential(2)) of thecapacitor 19 to shift to the target voltage Vb. Through the aboveoperation, the capacitor 19 holds the voltage Vb so that a predeterminedcurrent based on image data flows through the driver transistor 11 a.

As can be seen from the above operation, the penetration voltage causedby the parasitic capacitance 1381 and the like is compensated for by theapplication of a signal to the common signal line 1511. Thiscompensation allows accurate current programming of the pixels 16.Incidentally, it has been stated that the potential of the common signalline 1511 changes from Vch to Vcl after a lapse of Ta from thecompletion of 1 H. However, Tb may be either 0 sec. (immediately upontermination of 1 H) or 1 H or longer.

In this way, the drive method according to the present invention changesthe potential of the common signal line from Vcl to Vch within a pixelselection period (if the potential is changed before the selectionperiod, there is no problem because current programming is performedwithin the selection period). Thus, the potential of the common signalline can be changed from Vcl to Vch before the current programming ofthe given pixel is finished. After the pixel selection period (orimmediately upon termination of the selection period), the drive methodchanges the potential of the common signal line from Vch to Vcl.

Incidentally, the amplitudes (Vch and Vcl) of the common signal line1511 are configured to be changeable by a regulator of a voltagegenerator circuit (not shown). The configuration and operation of thecommon driver circuit 1512 is the same as or similar to those of thegate driver circuit 12, and thus description thereof will be omitted.Also, the other part of the operation is the same as that shown in FIG.139, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 151 and 152 above show a system which compensates for penetrationvoltage by the operation of the common signal lines. FIG. 153 shows aconfiguration in which penetration voltage is compensated for by theoperation of the gate signal line 17 a in the preceding stage of a pixelwithout using a common driver circuit 1512.

In FIG. 153, one end of the capacitor 19 is connected to the drivertransistor 11 a and the other end is connected to the gate signal line17 a in the preceding stage (the last pixel selected). The electrode atone end of the capacitor 19 is the gate signal line 17 a. The other partof the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 1, 151, etc.

Referring to FIG. 154, Gate Signal Line 17 a(1) represents a voltagewaveform of the gate signal line 17 a of a pixel (1). Gate Signal Line17 a(2) represents a voltage waveform of the gate signal line 17 a of apixel (2) next to the pixel (1). Gate Signal Line 17 a(3) represents avoltage waveform of the gate signal line 17 a of a pixel (3) next to thepixel (2).

Source Signal Line 18 represents a voltage (current) waveform applied tothe source signal line. The pixel potential (2) illustrates a capacitorpotential of the pixel (2) (voltage waveform of the gate terminal G ofthe driver transistor 11 a. The gate signal lines 17 a are scanned inthe order: (1)→(2)→(3)→(4)→(5)→ . . . (1)→(2)→ . . . .

For ease of explanation, description will be given with a focus on thepixel potential of the pixel (2) (the potential at the gate terminal Gof the driver transistor 11 a). First, image data of all the fields isheld in the pixel 16. In the example in FIG. 153, the gate drive circuit12 a applies one turn-on voltage (Vgl) and two turn-off voltages (Vgh2and Vgh1) to the gate signal lines 17 a. Assuming that the turn-offvoltage Vgh2>the turn-off voltage Vgh1, the following condition issatisfied: 0.02 (V)<Vgh2−Vgh1<0.4 (V).

At point A, with a change in the potential of the gate signal line 17 a(0.1) in the preceding stage from Vgh1 (turn-off voltage) to Vgl(turn-on voltage), the potential of the capacitor 19 of the pixel (2)changes (the pixel potential changes from Ve to Vd). Consequently, thepotential at the gate terminal G of the driver transistor 11 a falls.

At point B, with a change in the potential of the gate signal line 17 aof the pixel (2) from Vgh1 (turn-off voltage) to Vgl (turn-on voltage),the pixel potential changes. Since the transistors 11 b and 11 c are on,the potential (current) of the source signal line 18 is written into thepixel 16 and the capacitor 19 begins to charge (discharge). Within aselection period of 1 H, the target voltage Vb is reached. Through theabove operation, the capacitor 19 is set such that a predeterminedcurrent based on image data flows through the driver transistor 11 a.

At point C, the potential of the gate signal line 17 a(2) changes fromVgl (turn-on voltage) to Vgh2 (turn-off voltage). This voltage changeacts as penetration voltage and changes the pixel potential (2) viaparasitic capacitance 1381. With this change in the potential, the pixelpotential (2) becomes equal to voltage Vc. At point C, when thepotential of the gate signal line 17 a changes to Vgh (turn-offvoltage), the transistors 11 b and 11 c turn off, cutting off thecapacitor 19 terminal from the source signal line 18 and consequentlyholding the voltage Vc.

After a lapse of 1 H (point D in FIG. 154) from the completion of 1 H(selection period of pixel (2)), the potential of the gate signal line17 a (2) changes from Vgh2 to Vgh1 (see point D in FIG. 152). The changein the potential of the gate signal line 17 a(2) causes the potential(pixel potential(2)) of the capacitor 19 to shift to the target voltageVb. Through the above operation, the capacitor 19 holds the voltage Vbso that a predetermined current based on image data flows through thedriver transistor 11 a.

As can be seen from the above operation, the penetration voltage causedby the parasitic capacitance 1381 and the like is compensated for by theapplication of three voltages (Vgh1, Vgh2, and Vgl) to the gate signallines 17 a. This compensation allows accurate current programming of thepixels 16. Incidentally, although it has been stated that the potentialof the gate signal line 17 a (2) changes from Vgh2 to Vgh1 after a lapseof 1 H (point D in FIG. 154) from the selection period, this is notrestrictive. For example, the potential may be changed after a lapse oftime Ta within 1 H (see point D in FIG. 155) as illustrated in FIG. 155.Alternatively, it may be changed after a lapse of 1 H or more.

Although in FIG. 153, the gate signal line 17 a in the previous stage isused as the terminal electrode of the capacitor 19 in the subsequentstage, the present invention is not limited to this. As illustrated inFIG. 156, the gate signal line 17 a in a stage before the previous stagemay be used as the electrode of the capacitor 19. A timing chart forthis is shown in FIG. 157.

At point A, with a change in the potential of the gate signal line 17a(1) in the stage before the preceding stage from Vgh1 (turn-offvoltage) to Vgl (turn-on voltage), the potential of the capacitor 19 ofthe pixel (3) changes (the pixel potential changes from Va to Ve).Consequently, the potential at the gate terminal G of the drivertransistor 11 a falls.

At point B, with a change in the potential of the gate signal line 17a(1) in the stage before the preceding stage from Vgl (turn-on voltage)to Vgh2 (turn-off voltage), the potential of the capacitor 19 of thepixel (3) changes (the pixel potential changes from Ve to Va).Consequently, the potential at the gate terminal G of the drivertransistor 11 a rises.

At point C, with a change in the potential of the gate signal line 17 a(3) from Vgh1 (turn-off voltage) to Vgl (turn-on voltage), the potentialof the capacitor 19 of the pixel (3) changes. Since the transistors 11 band 11 c are on, the potential (current) of the source signal line 18 iswritten into the pixel 16 and the capacitor 19 begins to charge(discharge). Within a selection period of 1 H, the target voltage Vc isreached.

Through the above operation, the capacitor 19 is set such that apredetermined current based on image data flows through the drivertransistor 11 a.

At point D, the potential of the gate signal line 17 a(3) changes fromVgl (turn-on voltage) to Vgh2 (turn-off voltage). This voltage changeacts as penetration voltage and changes the pixel potential (3) viaparasitic capacitance 1381. With this change in the potential, the pixelpotential (3) becomes equal to voltage Vb. At point C, when thepotential of the gate signal line 17 a changes to Vgh (turn-offvoltage), the transistors 11 b and 11 c turn off, cutting off thecapacitor 19 terminal from the source signal line 18 and consequentlyholding the voltage Vb.

After a lapse of 1 H (point D in FIG. 157) from the completion of 1 H(selection period of pixel (3)), the potential of the gate signal line17 a (3) changes from Vgh2 to Vgh1 (see point D in FIG. 157). With thechange in the potential of the gate signal line 17 a(3), the potential(the pixel potential (3)) of the capacitor 19 shifts to the targetvoltage Vc. Through the above operation, the capacitor 19 holds thevoltage Vc so that a predetermined current based on image data flowsthrough the driver transistor 11 a.

As can be seen from the above operation, the penetration voltage causedby the parasitic capacitance 1381 and the like is compensated for by theapplication of three voltages (Vgh1, Vgh2, and Vgl) to the gate signallines 17 a. This compensation allows accurate current programming of thepixels 16.

The above example compensates for the effect of penetration voltagethrough improvement or invention of a drive system. Penetration voltagecan also be suppressed using pixel 16 configuration. In FIG. 146,ap-channel transistor 11 bn and n-channel transistor 11 bn are used inplace of the p-channel switching transistor 11 b in FIG. 1. Theyconstitute an analog switch. An inverter 1481 is placed to turn on thep-channel transistor 11 bn and n-channel transistor 11 bnsimultaneously.

As the transistor 11 b is composed of the p-channel transistor andn-channel transistor as illustrated in FIG. 148, voltages applied to thetwo transistors by the gate signal line 17 a cancel each other. Thismakes it possible to reduce potential shift due to penetration voltagegreatly. Needless to say, as illustrated in FIG. 149, this effect canalso be achieved if the transistor 11 bn and the like are configured bydiodes.

Thus, by using the pixel configuration shown in FIGS. 148, 149, or thelike, it is possible to compensates for the effect of penetrationvoltage. Also, when this method is used in combination with the methoddescribed with reference to FIG. 139 or the like, it is possible tocompensate for penetration voltage and achieve uniform image display dueto synergism.

The above example has been described with a focus on the gate signallines 17 a (WR-side selection signal lines). Now, a drive method of gatesignal lines 17 b (EL-side selection signal lines) will be describedadditionally. The gate signal lines 17 b (EL-side selection signallines) are signal lines which control the current passed through ELelements 15. In FIG. 63, however, the current passing through the ELelement 15 is controlled by turning on and off the switch 631. Thus, thecontrol method of the gate signal lines 17 b (EL-side selection signallines) described below additionally can be restated as a method ofcontrolling the timing or time to pass current through the EL elements15. For ease of explanation, a gate signal line 17 b (EL-side selectionsignal line) will be cited as an example in the following description.Needless to say, the items described below apply to all the drivesystems according to the present invention.

It has been stated with reference to FIGS. 15, 18, 21, etc. that thegate signal line 17 b (EL-side selection signal line) applies a turn-onvoltage (Vgl) and turn-off voltage (Vgh) every horizontal scanningperiod (1 H). However, in the case of a constant current, light emissionquantity of the EL elements 15 is proportional to the duration of thecurrent Thus the duration is not limited to 1 H.

FIG. 158 shows 1/4-duty driving. A turn-on voltage is applied to thegate signal line 17 b (EL-side selection signal line) every 4 Hs and thelocations to which the turn-on voltage is applied are scanned in syncwith a horizontal synchronization signal (HD). Thus, the unit length ofa conduction period is 1 H.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. The duration ofthe conduction period may be less than 1 H (½ H in FIG. 161) as shown inFIG. 161 or it may be equal to or less than 1 H. In short, the unitlength of the conduction period is not limited to 1 H and a unit lengthother than 1 H can be generated easily using the OEV2 circuit formed orplaced in the output stage of the gate driver circuit 12 b (circuitwhich controls the gate signal line 17 b). The OEV2 circuit is similarto the OEV1 circuit described earlier, and thus description thereof willbe omitted.

In FIG. 159, the conduction period of the gate signal line 17 b (EL-sideselection signal line) does not have a unit length of 1 H. A turn-onvoltage little shorter than 1 H is applied to the gate signal lines 17 b(EL-side selection signal lines) in odd-numbered pixel rows. A turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 b (EL-side selectionsignal lines) in even-numbered pixel rows for a very short period. Theduration T1 of the turn-on voltage applied to the gate signal lines 17 b(EL-side selection signal lines) in odd-numbered pixel rows plus theduration T2 of the turn-on voltage applied to the gate signal lines 17 b(EL-side selection signal lines) in even-numbered pixel rows is designedto be 1 H. FIG. 159 shows a state of the first field.

In the second field which follows the first field, a turn-on voltagelittle shorter than 1 H is applied to the gate signal lines 17 b(EL-side selection signal lines) in even-numbered pixel rows. A turn-onvoltage is applied to the gate signal lines 17 b (EL-side selectionsignal lines) in odd-numbered pixel rows for a very short period. Theduration T1 of the turn-on voltage applied to the gate signal lines 17 b(EL-side selection signal lines) in even-numbered pixel rows plus theduration T2 of the turn-on voltage applied to the gate signal lines 17 b(EL-side selection signal lines) in odd-numbered pixel rows is designedto be 1 H.

The sum duration of turn-on voltage applications to gate signal lines 17b in a plurality of pixel rows may be designed to be constant.Alternatively, the illumination time of each EL element 15 in each pixelrow in each field may be designed to be constant.

FIG. 160 shows a case in which the conduction period of the gate signalline 17 b (EL-side selection signal line) is 1.5 Hs. The rise and fallof the gate signal line 17 b at point A are designed to overlap. Thegate signal line 17 b (EL-side selection signal line) and source signalline 18 are coupled. Thus, any change in a waveform of the gate signalline 17 b (EL-side selection signal line) penetrates to the sourcesignal line 18. Consequently, any potential fluctuation in the sourcesignal line 18 lowers accuracy of current (voltage) programming, causingirregularities in the characteristics of the driver transistors 11 a toappear in the display.

Referring to FIG. 160, at point A, the voltage applied to the gatesignal line 17B (EL-side selection signal line) (1) changes from turn-onvoltage (Vgl) to turn-off voltage (Vgh). The voltage applied to the gatesignal line 17B (EL-side selection signal line) (2) changes fromturn-off voltage (Vgh) to turn-on voltage (Vgl). Thus, at point A, thesignal waveform of the gate signal line 17B (EL-side selection signalline) (1) and the signal waveform of the gate signal line 17B (EL-sideselection signal line) (2) cancel out each other. Consequently, even ifthe gate signal line 17B (EL-side selection signal line) and sourcesignal line 18 are coupled, changes in the waveform of the gate signalline 17 b (EL-side selection signal line) do not penetrate to the sourcesignal line 18. This improves the accuracy of current (voltage)programming, resulting in a uniform image display.

Incidentally, in the example in FIG. 160, the conduction period is 1.5Hs. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Needless tosay, the duration of application of the turn-on voltage may be 1 H orless as illustrated in FIG. 162.

By adjusting the duration of application of the turn-on voltage to thegate signal line 17B (EL-side selection signal line), it is possible toadjust the brightness of the display screen 50 linearly. This can bedone easily through control of the OEV2 circuit. Referring to FIG. 163,for example, display brightness in FIG. 163(b) is lower than in FIG.163(a). Also, display brightness in FIG. 163(c) is lower than in FIG.163(b).

As shown in FIG. 164, multiple sets of turn-on voltage and turn-offvoltage may be applied in a period of 1 H. FIG. 164(a) shows an examplein which six sets are applied. FIG. 164(b) shows an example in whichthree sets are applied. FIG. 164(c) shows an example in which one set isapplied. In FIG. 164, display brightness is lower in FIG. 164(b) than inFIG. 164(a). It is lower in FIG. 164(c) than in FIG. 164(b). Thus, bycontrolling the number of conduction periods, display brightness can beadjusted (controlled) easily.

Also, it is possible to allow selection from different drive modes: adrive mode for controlling non-display areas 52 and display areas 53regularly as illustrated in FIG. 98(a), a drive mode for controllingnon-display areas 52 and display areas 53 randomly as illustrated inFIG. 98(c), and a drive mode for repeating a non-display area 52 anddisplay area 53 every other frame (field) as illustrated in FIG. 98(b).It is also possible to switch among modes in FIGS. 98(a), 98(b), and98(c) under user control or according to image data.

FIG. 184 is a block diagram showing a current-driven source driver IC(circuit) 14 according to one example of the present invention. FIG. 184shows a multi-stage current mirror circuit comprising three-stagecurrent sources (1841, 1842, 1843).

In FIG. 184, the current value of the current source 1841 in the firststage is copied by the current mirror circuit to N current sources 1842in the second stage (where N is an arbitrary integer). The currentvalues of the second-stage current sources 1842 are copied by thecurrent mirror circuit to M current sources 1843 in the third stage(where M is an arbitrary integer). Consequently, this configurationcauses the current value of the first-stage current source 1841 to becopied to N×M third-stage current sources 1843.

For example, when driving the source signal lines 18 with one sourcedriver IC 14, there are 176 outputs (because the source signal linesrequire a total of 176 outputs for R, G, and B). Here it is assumed thatN=16 and M=11. Thus, 16×11=176 and the 176 outputs can be covered. Inthis way, by using a multiple of 8 or 16 for N or M, it becomes easierto lay out and design the current sources of the driver IC.

The current-driven source driver IC (circuit) 14 employing themulti-stage current mirror circuit according to the present inventioncan absorb variations in transistor characteristics because it has thesecond-stage current sources 1842 in between instead of copying thecurrent value of the first-stage current source 1841 directly to N×Mthird-stage current sources 1843 using the current mirror circuit.

In particular, the present invention is characterized in that afirst-stage current mirror circuit (current source 1841) andsecond-stage current mirror circuits (current sources 1842) are placedclose to each other. If a first-stage current source 1841 are connectedwith third-stage current sources 1843 (i.e., in the case of two-stagecurrent mirror circuit), the second-stage current sources 1843 connectedto the first-stage current source are large in number, making itimpossible to place the first-stage current source 1841 and third-stagecurrent sources 1843 close to each other.

The source driver circuit 14 according to the present invention copiesthe current value of the first-stage current mirror circuit (currentsource 1841) to the second-stage current mirror circuits (currentsources 1842), and the current values of the second-stage current mirrorcircuits (current sources 1842) to the third-stage current mirrorcircuits (current sources 1842). With this configuration, thesecond-stage current mirror circuits (current sources 1842) connected tothe first-stage current mirror circuit (current source 1841) are smallin number. Thus, the first-stage current mirror circuit (current source1841) and second-stage current mirror circuits (current sources 1842)can be placed close to each other.

If transistors composing the current mirror circuits can be placed closeto each other, naturally variations in the transistors are reduced, andso are variations in current values. The number of the third-stagecurrent mirror circuits (current sources 1843) connected to thesecond-stage current mirror circuits (current sources 1842) are reducedas well. Consequently, the second-stage current mirror circuits (currentsources 1842) and third-stage current mirror circuits (current sources1843) can be placed close to each other.

That is, transistors in current receiving parts of the first-stagecurrent mirror circuit (current source 1841), second-stage currentmirror circuits (current sources 1842), and third-stage current mirrorcircuits (current sources 1843) can be placed close to each other on thewhole. In this way, transistors composing the current mirror circuitscan be placed close to each other, reducing variations in thetransistors and greatly reducing variations in current signals fromoutput terminals (high precision).

In the present invention, the terms “current sources 1841, 1842, and1843” and “current mirror circuits” are used interchangeably. That is,current sources are a basic construct of the present invention and thecurrent sources are embodied into current mirror circuits.

FIG. 185 is a structural drawing of a more concrete source driver IC(circuit) 14. It illustrates part of third current sources 1843. This isan output part connected to one source signal line 18. It is composed ofmultiple current mirror circuits (unit transistors 484 (1 unit)) of thesame size as a current mirror configuration in the final stage. Theirnumber is bit-weighted according to the data size of image data.

Incidentally, the transistors composing the source driver IC (circuit)14 according to the present invention are not limited to a MOS type andmay be a bipolar type. Also, they are not limited to siliconsemiconductors and may be gallium arsenide semiconductors. Also, theymay be germanium semiconductors. Alternatively, they may be formeddirectly on a substrate using low-temperature polysilicon technology,other polysilicon technology, or amorphous silicon technology.

FIG. 185 illustrates an example of the present invention which handles6-bit digital input. Six bits are the sixth power of two, and thusprovide a 64-gradation display. This source driver IC 14, when mountedon an array board, provides 64 gradations each of red (R), green (G),and blue (B), meaning 64×64×64=approximately 260,000 colors.

Sixty-four (64) gradations require 1 D0-bit unit transistor 1854, twoD1-bit unit transistors 1854, four D2-bit unit transistors 1854, eightD3-bit unit transistors 1854, sixteen D4-bit unit transistors 1854, andthirty-two D5-bit unit transistors 1854 for a total of 63 unittransistors 1854. Thus, the present invention produces one output usingas many unit transistors 1854 as the number of gradations (64 gradationsin this example) minus 1. Incidentally, even if one unit transistor isdivided into a plurality of sub-unit transistors, this simply means thata unit transistor is divided into sub-unit transistors, and makes nodifference in the fact that the present invention uses as many unittransistors as the number of gradations minus 1.

In FIG. 185, D0 represents LSB input and D5 represents MSB input. When aD0 input terminal is high (positive logic), a switch 1851 a is closed(the switch 1851 a is an on/off means and may be constructed of a singletransistor or may be an analog switch consisting of a P-channeltransistor and N-channel transistor. Then, current flows to a currentsource (single-unit) 1854 composing a current mirror. The current flowsthrough internal wiring 1853 in the IC 14. Since the internal wiring1853 is connected to the source signal line 18 via a terminal electrodeof the IC 14, the current flowing through internal wiring 1853 providesa programming current for the pixels 16.

For example, when a D1 input terminal is high (positive logic), a switch1851 b is closed. Then, current flows to two current sources(single-unit) 1854 composing a current mirror. The current flows throughthe internal wiring 1853 in the IC 14. Since the internal wiring 1853 isconnected to the source signal line 18 via a terminal electrode of theIC 14, the current flowing through internal wiring 1853 provides aprogramming current for the pixels 16.

The same applies to the other switches 1851. When a D2 input terminal ishigh (positive logic), a switch 1851 c is closed. Then, current flows tofour current sources (single-unit) 1854 composing a current mirror. Whena D5 input terminal is high (positive logic), a switch 1851 f is closed.Then, current flows to 32 (thirty-two) current sources (single-unit)1854 composing a current mirror.

In this way, based on external data (D0 to D5), current flows to thecorresponding current sources (single-unit). That is, current flows to 0to 63 current sources (single-unit) depending on the data.

Incidentally, for ease of explanation, it is assumed that there are 63current sources for a 6-bit configuration, but this is not restrictive.In the case of 8-bit configuration, 255 unit transistors 1854 can beformed (placed). For a 4-bit configuration, 15 unit transistors 1854 canbe formed (placed). The transistors 1854 constituting the unit currentsources have a channel width W and channel width L. The use of equaltransistors makes it possible to construct output stages with smallvariations.

Besides, not all the unit transistors 1854 need to pass equal current.For example, individual unit transistors 1854 may be weighted. Forexample a current output circuit may be constructed using a mixture ofsingle-unit unit transistors 1854, double-sized unit transistors 1854,quadruple-sized unit transistors 1854, etc. However, if unit transistors1854 are weighted, the weighted current sources may not provide theright proportions, resulting in variations. Thus, even when usingweighting, it is preferable to construct each current source fromtransistors each of which corresponds to a single-unit current source.

The unit transistor 1854 should be equal to or larger than a certainsize. The smaller the transistor size, the larger the variations inoutput current. The size of a transistor 1854 is given by the channellength L multiplied by the channel width W. For example, if W=3 μm andL=4 μm, the size of the unit transistor 1854 constituting a unit currentsource is W×L=12 square μm. It is believed that crystal boundaryconditions of silicon wafers have something to do with the fact that asmaller transistor size results in larger variations. Thus, variationsin output current of transistors are small when each transistor isformed across a plurality of crystal boundaries.

Preferably, the unit transistor 1854 is an n-channel transistor.P-channel unit transistors have 1.5 times as large variations in outputcurrent as n-channel unit transistors.

Since it is preferable that the unit transistors 1854 of the sourcedriver IC 14 are n-channel transistors, the source driver IC 14 drawsprogramming current from the pixels 16. Thus, the driver transistors 11a of the pixels 16 are p-channel transistors. The switching transistorlid in FIG. 1 is also a p-channel transistor.

Thus, the configuration in which the unit transistor 1854 in the outputstage of the source driver IC (circuit) 14 is an n-channel transistorand the driver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 is a p-channel transistoris characteristic of the present invention. Incidentally, it ispreferable that all the transistors 11 (transistors 11 a, 11 b, 11 c,and 11 d) composing the pixel 16 are p-channel transistors. Since thiscan eliminate the process of forming n-channel transistors, it ispossible to achieve low costs and high yields.

Incidentally, although it has been stated that the unit transistor 1854is formed in the IC 14, this is not restrictive. The source drivercircuit 14 may be formed by low-temperature polysilicon technology. Inthat case again, it is preferable that the unit transistors 1854 in thesource driver circuit 14 are n-channel transistors.

P-channel transistors are used as the transistors 11 of pixels 16 andfor the gate driver circuits 12. This makes it possible to reduce thecost of the board 71. However, in the source driver circuit 14, the unittransistors 1854 must be n-channel transistors. Thus, the source drivercircuit 14 cannot be formed directly on a board 71. Thus, the sourcedriver circuit 14 is made of a silicon chip and the like separately andmounted on the board 71. In short, the present invention is configuredto mount the source driver IC 14 (means of outputting programmingcurrent as video signals) externally.

If the gate driver circuits 12 are constructed from p-channeltransistors, it becomes easy to hold (maintain) the turn-off voltage(Vgh). As the driver transistors 11 a, 11 b, and 11 c of the pixels 16can be held readily at the turn-off potential, the gate driver circuits12 match well, and achieve synergy, with the pixel configurationaccording to the present invention consisting of p-channel transistors.

Incidentally, although it has been stated that the source driver circuit14 is made of a silicon chip, this is not restrictive. For example, alarge number of source driver circuits may be formed on a glasssubstrate simultaneously using low-temperature polysilicon technology orthe like, cut off into chips, and mounted on a board 71. Incidentally,although it has been stated that a source driver circuit is mounted on aboard 71, this is not restrictive. Any form may be adopted as long asthe output terminals of the source driver circuit 14 are connected tothe source signal lines 18 on the board 71. For example, the sourcedriver circuit 14 may be connected to the source signal lines 18 usingTAB technology. By forming a source driver circuit 14 on a silicon chipseparately, it is possible to reduce variations in output current andachieve proper image display as well as to reduce costs.

The configuration in which p-channel transistors are used as selectiontransistors of pixels 16 and for gate driver circuits is not limited toorganic EL or other self-luminous devices (display panels or displayapparatus). For example, it is also applicable to liquid crystal displaydevices and FEDs (field emission displays).

If the switching transistors 11 b and 11 c of a pixel 16 are p-channeltransistors, the pixel 16 becomes selected at Vgh, and becomesdeselected at Vgl. As described earlier, when the gate signal line 17 achanges from on (Vgl) to off (Vgh), voltage penetrates (penetrationvoltage). If the driver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 is a p-channeltransistor, the penetration voltage more tightly restricts the flow ofcurrent through the transistor 11 a in black display mode. This makes itpossible to achieve a proper black display. The problem with thecurrent-driven system is that it is difficult to achieve a blackdisplay.

According to the present invention, if p-channel transistors are usedfor the gate driver circuits 12, the turn-on voltage corresponds to Vgh.Thus, the gate driver circuits 12 match well with the pixels 16constructed from p-channel transistors. Also, to improve black display,it is important that the programming current Iw flows from the anodevoltage Vdd to the unit transistors 1854 of the source driver circuit 14via the driver transistors 11 a and source signal lines 18, as is thecase with the pixel 16 configuration shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. Thus, agood synergistic effect can be produced if p-channel transistors areused for the gate driver circuits 12 and pixels 16, the source drivercircuit 14 is mounted on the substrate, and n-channel transistors areused as the unit transistors 1854 of the source driver circuit 14.Besides, unit transistors 1854 formed of n-channel transistors havesmaller variations in output current than unit transistors 1854 formedof p-channel transistors. N-channel unit transistors 1854 have 1/1.5 to½ as large variations in output current as p-channel unit transistors1854 when they have the same area (W·L). For this reason, it ispreferable that n-channel transistors are used as the unit transistors1854 of the source driver IC 14.

FIG. 186 is an exemplary circuit diagram showing 176 outputs (N×M=176)of a three-stage current mirror circuit. In FIG. 186, the current source1841 constituted of the first-stage current mirror circuit is referredto as a parent current source, the current sources 1842 constituted ofthe second-stage current mirror circuits are referred to as childcurrent sources, and the current sources 1843 constituted of thethird-stage current mirror circuits are referred to as grandchildcurrent sources. The use of an integral multiple for the third-stagecurrent mirror circuits which are the final-stage current mirrorcircuits makes it possible to minimize variations in the 176 outputs andproduce high-accuracy current outputs.

Incidentally, dense placement means placing the first current source1841 and the second current sources 1842 (the current or voltage outputand current or voltage input) at least within a distance of 8 mm. Morepreferably, they are placed within 5 mm. It has been shown analyticallythat when placed at this density, the current sources can fit into asilicon chip with little difference in transistor characteristics (Vtand mobility (μ)). Similarly, the second current sources 1842 and thirdcurrent sources 1843 (the current output and current input) are placedat least within a distance of 8 mm. More preferably, they are placedwithin 5 mm. Needless to say, the above items also apply to otherexamples of the present invention.

The current or voltage output and current or voltage input mean thefollowing relationships. In the case of voltage-based delivery shown inFIG. 187, the transistor 1841 (the output) of the (I)-th current sourceand the transistor 1842 a (the input) of the (I+1)-th current source areplaced close to each other. In the case of current-based delivery shownin FIG. 188, the transistor 1841 a (the output) of the (I)-th currentsource and the transistor 1842 b (the input) of the (I+1)-th currentsource are placed close to each other.

Incidentally, although it is assumed in FIGS. 186, 187, etc. that thereis one transistor 1841, this is not restrictive. For example, it is alsopossible to form a plurality of small sub-transistors 1841 and connectthe source or drain terminals of the sub-transistors with the register491 to form a unit transistor 1854. By connecting the plurality of smallsub-transistors in parallel, it is possible to reduce variations of theunit transistor 1854.

Similarly, although it is assumed that there is one transistor 1842 a,this is not restrictive. For example, it is also possible to form aplurality of small sub-transistors 1842 a and connect the gate terminalsof the transistors 1842 a with the gate terminal of the transistor 1841.By connecting the plurality of small transistors 1842 a in parallel, itis possible to reduce variations of the transistor 1842 a.

Thus, according to the present invention, the following configurationscan be illustrated: a configuration in which one transistor 1841 isconnected with a plurality of transistors 1842 a, a configuration inwhich a plurality of transistors 1841 are connected with one transistor1842 a, and a configuration in which a plurality of transistors 1841 areconnected with a plurality of transistors 1842 a. These examples will bedescribed in more detail below.

The above items also apply to a configuration of transistors 1843 a and1843 b in FIG. 189. Possible configurations include a configuration inwhich one transistor 1843 a is connected with a plurality of transistors1843 b, a configuration in which a plurality of transistors 1843 a areconnected with one transistor 1843 b, and a configuration in which aplurality of transistors 1843 a are connected with a plurality oftransistors 1843 b. By connecting the plurality of small transistors1843 in parallel, it is possible to reduce variations of the transistor1843.

The above items also apply to relationship between transistors 1842 aand 1842 b in FIG. 189. Also, preferably a plurality of transistors 1843b are used in FIG. 185.

Although it has been stated that the source driver IC 14 consists of asilicon chip, this is not restrictive. The source driver IC 14 may beconstructed of another semiconductor chip formed on a gallium substrateor germanium substrate. Also, the unit transistor 1854 may be a bipolartransistor, CMOS transistor, FET, Bi-CMOS transistor, or DMOStransistor. However, in terms of reducing variations in the output ofthe unit transistor 1854, preferably a CMOS transistor is used for theunit transistor 1854.

Preferably, the unit transistor 1854 is an N-channel transistor. Theunit transistor consisting of a P-channel transistor has 1.5 timeslarger output variations than the unit transistor consisting of anN-channel transistor.

Since it is preferable that the unit transistor 1854 of the sourcedriver IC 14 is an N-channel transistor, the programming current of thesource driver IC 14 is a current drawn from the pixel 16. Thus, thedriver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 is a P-channel transistor. Theswitching transistor 11 d in FIG. 1 is also a P-channel transistor.

Thus, the configuration in which the unit transistor 1854 in the outputstage of the source driver IC (circuit) 14 is an N-channel transistorand the driver transistor 11 a of the pixel 16 is a P-channel transistoris characteristic of the present invention. Incidentally, it ispreferable that all the transistors (transistors 11 a, 11 b, 11 c, and11 d) composing the pixel 16 are P-channel transistors. This eliminatesthe process of forming N-channel transistors, resulting in low costs andhigh yields.

Incidentally, although it has been stated that the unit transistor 1854is formed in the IC 14, this is not restrictive. The source drivercircuit 14 may be formed by low-temperature polysilicon technology. Inthat case again, it is preferable that the unit transistors 1854 in thesource driver circuit 14 are N-channel transistors.

FIG. 188 shows an example of configuration for current-based delivery.FIG. 187 also shows an example of configuration for current-baseddelivery. FIGS. 187 and 188 are similar in terms of circuit diagrams anddiffer in layout configuration, i.e., wiring layout. In FIG. 187,reference numeral 1841 denotes a first-stage n-channel current sourcetransistor, 1842 a denotes a second-stage n-channel current sourcetransistor, and 1842 b denotes a second-stage p-channel current sourcetransistor.

In FIG. 188, reference numeral 1841 a denotes a first-stage N-channelcurrent source transistor, 1842 a denotes a second-stage N-channelcurrent source transistor, and 1842 b denotes a second-stage P-channelcurrent source transistor.

In FIG. 187, the gate voltage of the first-stage current sourceconsisting of a variable register 491 (used to vary current) and theN-channel transistor 1841 is delivered to the gate of the N-channeltransistor 1842 a of the second-stage current source. Thus, this is alayout configuration of a voltage-based delivery type.

In FIG. 188, the gate voltage of the first-stage current sourceconsisting of a variable register 491 and the N-channel transistor 1841a is applied to the gate of the N-channel transistor 1842 a of theadjacent second-stage current source, and consequently the value of thecurrent flowing through the transistor is delivered to the P-channeltransistor 1842 b of the second-stage current source. Thus, this is alayout configuration of a current-based delivery type.

Incidentally, although this example of the present invention focuses onrelationship between the first current source and second current sourcefor ease of explanation or understanding, this is not restrictive and itgoes without saying that this example also applies (can be applied) torelationship between the second current source and third current sourceas well as relationship between other current sources.

In the layout configuration of the current mirror circuit of thevoltage-based delivery type shown in FIG. 187, the N-channel transistor1841 of the first-stage current source and the N-channel transistor 1842a of the second-stage current source composing the current mirrorcircuit are separated (or liable to get separated, to be precise), andthus the two transistors tend to differ in characteristics.Consequently, the current value of the first-stage current source is nottransmitted correctly to the second-stage current source and there canbe variations.

In contrast, in the layout configuration of the current mirror circuitof the current-based delivery type shown in FIG. 188, the N-channeltransistor 1841 a of the first-stage current source and the N-channeltransistor 1842 a of the second-stage current source composing thecurrent mirror circuit are located adjacent to each other (easy to placeadjacent to each other), and thus the two transistors hardly differ incharacteristics. Consequently, the current value of the first-stagecurrent source is transmitted correctly to the second-stage currentsource and there can be little variations.

In view of the above circumstances, it is preferable to use a layoutconfiguration of the current-based delivery type instead of thevoltage-based delivery type for the circuit configuration of themulti-stage current mirror circuit according to the present invention(the source driver IC (circuit) 14 of the current-based delivery typeaccording to the present invention) in terms of reduced variations.Needless to say the above example can be applied to other examples ofthe present invention.

Incidentally, although delivery from the first-stage current source tothe second-stage current source has been cited for the sake ofexplanation, the same applies to delivery from the second-stage currentsource to the third-stage current source, delivery from the third-stagecurrent source to the fourth-stage current source, and soon. Also, itgoes without saying that the present invention may adopt a single-stagecurrent source configuration.

FIG. 189 shows a current-based delivery version of three-stage currentmirror circuit (three-stage current source) shown in FIG. 186 (which,therefore shows a circuit configuration of a voltage-based deliverytype).

In FIG. 189, a reference current is created first by the variableregister 491 and N-channel transistor 1841. Incidentally, although it isstated that the reference current is adjusted by the variable register491, actually the source voltage of the transistor 1841 is set andregulated by an electronic regulator formed (or placed) in the sourcedriver IC (circuit) 14. Alternatively, the reference current is adjustedby directly supplying the source terminal of the transistor 1841 withcurrent outputted from a current-type electronic regulator consisting ofa large number of unit transistors (single-unit) 1854 as shown in FIG.185.

The gate voltage of the first-stage current source constituted of thetransistor 1841 is applied to the gate of the N-channel transistor 1842a of the adjacent second-stage current source, and the currentconsequently flowing through the transistor is delivered to theP-channel transistor 1842 b of the second-stage current source. Also,the gate voltage of the P-channel transistor 1842 b of the second-stagecurrent source is applied to the gate of the N-channel transistor 1843 aof the adjacent third-stage current source, and the current consequentlyflowing through the transistor is delivered to the N-channel transistor1843 b of the third-stage current source. A large number of N-channelunit transistors 1854 are formed (placed) at the gate of the N-channeltransistor 1843 b of the third-stage current source according to therequired bit count as illustrated in FIG. 185.

The display panel according to the present invention will be describedbelow. In the display panel according to the present invention, pixelsand the gate driver circuits 12 are formed using polysilicon technology.The source driver circuit 14 is constructed from an IC chip fabricatedfrom a silicon wafer. Thus, the source driver circuit 14 is a sourcedriver IC. The source driver IC 14 is mounted on the array board 71using COG technology. Thus, there is a space under the source driver IC14. Anode wiring is formed in this space (on a surface of the arrayboard).

As illustrated in FIG. 83, anode lines 832 are wired from an anodeconnection terminal and the anode lines 832 formed on both sides of thesource driver IC are connected electrically by means of an anodecoupling line 835 formed under the IC 14.

A common anode line 833 is formed or placed on the output side of the IC14. Anode wires 834 branch off from the common anode line 833. There are528 (=176×RGB) anode wires 834 in a QCIF panel. The voltage Vdd (anodevoltage) illustrated in FIG. 1 and the like is supplied via the anodewires 834. A current of up to 200 μA flows through one anode wire 834 ifthe EL elements 15 are made of low molecular weight-material. Therefore,a current of approximately 100 mA (200 μA×528) flows through the commonanode line 833.

To reduce voltage drops in the common anode line 833 to within 0.2 V, itis necessary to reduce the resistance value of the largest current pathto 2 Ω or less (assuming that a current of 100 mA flows).

The anode coupling line 835 is formed (placed) under the IC chip 14.Needless to say, its line width should be as thick as possible to reduceresistance. Besides, preferably the anode coupling line 835 is providedwith a light shielding function. This is intended to preventmalfunctions caused by a photoconductive phenomenon in the source driverIC 14, which in turn would be caused by light emitted by EL elements 15.Needless to say, if the anode coupling line 835 is formed of a metalmaterial to a required film thickness, it will have a light shieldingfunction.

If the anode coupling line 835 cannot be made thick enough or is made oftransparent material such as ITO, light-absorbing film orlight-reflecting film is stacked in a single or multiple layers underthe IC chip 14 and on the anode coupling line 835 (basically, on thesurface of the array board 71). The anode coupling line 835 does notneed to shield light perfectly. It may have openings. Also, it may havediffraction effect or scattering effect. Also, light-shielding filmconsisting of multilayer optical interference film may be formed orplaced by stacking on the anode coupling line 835.

Of course, a reflector plate (sheet) or light-absorbing plate (sheet)made of a metal foil, plate, or sheet may be placed, inserted or formedin the space between the array board 71 and IC chip 14. Needless to say,it is also possible to place, insert or form a reflector plate (sheet)or light-absorbing plate (sheet) made of a foil, plate or sheet oforganic or inorganic material rather than a metal foil. Alternatively,light-absorbing material or light-reflecting material in a gel or liquidstate may be inserted or formed in the space between the array board 71and IC chip 14. Preferably, light-absorbing material or light-reflectingmaterial in the gel or liquid state are solidified by heating or byexposure to light. Incidentally, it is assumed for ease of explanationthat the anode coupling line 835 is made of a light-shielding film(light-reflecting film).

The anode coupling line 835 is formed on the surface of the array board71 (not limited to the surface). The idea of a light-shielding film orlight-reflecting film can be satisfied if light does not reach the rearsurface of the IC chip 14. Thus, needless to say, the anode couplingline 835 and the like may be formed on an inner surface or inner layerof the array board 71. Alternatively, the anode coupling line 835 (anarrangement or structure which functions as a reflecting film orlight-shielding film) may be formed on the rear surface of the arrayboard 71 as long as it can prevent or reduce entrance of light into theIC 14.

Although it has been stated with reference to FIG. 83 and the like thatthe light-shielding film and the like are formed on the array board 71,this is not restrictive and the light-shielding film and the like may beformed directly on the rear surface of the IC chip 14. In that case, aninsulating film (not shown) is formed on the rear surface of the IC chip14 and the light-shielding film, reflecting film, or the like is formedon the insulating film.

When forming the source driver circuit 14 directly on the array board 71(driver construction by low-temperature polysilicon technology,high-temperature polysilicon technology, solid-phase growth technology,or amorphous silicon technology), the source driver circuit 14 can beformed (placed) on the light-shielding film, light-absorbing film, orreflecting film which is formed on the array board 71.

A large number of transistor elements, such as current output circuit1461, which pass minute current are formed on the IC chip 14 (in FIG.146). When light enters transistor elements which pass minute current, aphotoconduction phenomenon and the like occur, making values of outputcurrent (programming current Iw), etc. abnormal (causing variations, andthe like). In the case of organic EL or other self-luminous elements, inparticular, light produced by the EL elements 15 is reflected diffuselywithin the array board 71, causing intense light to be radiated fromplaces other than the display area 50. The radiated light, upon enteringthe circuit forming section 1461 of the IC chip 14, causes thephotoconduction phenomenon. Thus, measures against the photoconductionphenomenon are measures peculiar to EL display devices.

To deal with this problem, the present invention constructs the anodecoupling line 835 on the array board 71 and uses it as a light-shieldingfilm. The formation area of the anode coupling line 835 covers thecircuit forming section 1461 as illustrated in FIG. 83. By forming thelight-shielding film (anode coupling line 835) in this way, it ispossible to prevent the photoconduction phenomenon completely. As thescreen is refreshed, current flows through EL power lines such as theanode coupling line 835, in particular, causing some changes to theirpotential. However, since the potential changes little by little everyhorizontal scanning period, it can be regarded as ground potential(meaning that there is virtually no change in the potential). Thus, theanode coupling line 835 performs not only a light-shielding function,but also an electric shielding function.

To reduce voltage drops in the common anode lines 832 and anode wires834, it is recommended to form a common anode line 832 a on the upperside of the display screen 50, form a common anode line 832 b on thelower side of the display screen 50, and short-circuit the anode wires834 at the top and bottom, as illustrated in FIG. 84.

It is also preferable to place source driver circuits 14 at the top andbottom of the screen 50 as illustrated in FIG. 85. Also, as illustratedin FIG. 86, it is possible to divide the display screen 50 into adisplay screen 50 a and display screen 50 b and drive the display screen50 a with a source driver circuit 14 a, and the display screen 50 b witha source driver circuit 14 b.

In the case of organic EL or other self-luminous elements, lightproduced by the EL elements 15 is reflected diffusely within the arrayboard 71, causing intense light to be radiated from places other thanthe display area 50. To prevent or reduce the diffusely reflected light,it is preferable that light-absorbing films 1011 are formed inineffective areas which do not pass light effective for image display.The light-absorbing films are formed on an outer surface of a sealinglid 85, inner surface of the sealing lid 85, side face of the board 70,area on the board other than the image display area (light-absorbingfilm 1011 b), etc. Incidentally, instead of light-absorbing films,light-absorbing sheets or light-absorbing walls may be installed.Besides, the concept of light absorption also includes schemes orstructures which diverge light by scattering it. In a broader sense, italso includes schemes or structures which confine light throughreflection.

Possible materials for light-absorbing films include, for example,organic material such as acrylic resin containing carbon, organic resinwith a black pigment dispersed in it, and gelatin or casein colored witha black acidic dye as with a color filter. Besides, they also include afluorine-based pigment which singly develops a black color as well asgreen and red pigments which develop a black color when mixed.Furthermore, they also include PrMnO3 film formed by sputtering,phthalocyanine film formed by plasma polymerization, etc.

FIG. 94 is a block diagram of the power supply circuit according to thepresent invention. Reference numeral 942 denotes a control circuit,which controls the midpoint potential of resistances 945 a and 945 bandoutputs agate signal of a transistor 946. A power supply Vpc is appliedto the primary side of a transformer 941 and primary current istransmitted to the secondary side under on/off control of the transistor946. Reference numeral 943 denotes a rectifying diode and 944 denotes asmoothing capacitor.

Anode voltage Vdd has its output voltage adjusted to a resistor 945 b.Vss denotes cathode voltage. One of two voltages can be outputselectively as the cathode voltage Vss as illustrated in FIG. 95. Aswitch 951 is used for the selection. In FIG. 95, −9 (V) is selected bythe switch 951.

The switch 951 is operated according to output from a temperature sensor952. When panel temperature is low, −9(V) is selected as the voltageVss. When the panel temperature is equal to or higher than a certainlevel, −6(V) is selected. This is because EL elements 15 havetemperature dependence and terminal voltage of the EL elements 15becomes higher on a low temperature side. Incidentally, although it hasbeen stated with reference to FIG. 95 that one of two voltages isselected as Vss (the cathode voltage), this is not restrictive and thevoltage Vss may be selected from three voltages. The above itemssimilarly apply to Vdd.

By allowing a voltage to be selected from a plurality of voltages basedon panel temperature as shown in FIG. 95, it is possible to reduce powerconsumption of the panel. This is because the voltage Vss can be loweredwhen the temperature is equal to or lower than a certain level.Normally, the lower Vss (=−6(V)) can be used. Incidentally, the switch951 may be configured as illustrated in FIG. 96. A plurality of voltagesVss can be generated easily by using intermediate taps of a transformer941 in FIG. 96. This similarly applies to the anode voltage Vdd.

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram illustrating potential setting. Thesource driver IC 14 is based on GND. The power supply for the sourcedriver IC 14 is Vcc. Vcc may be brought to coincide with the anodevoltage (Vdd). According to the present invention, Vcc<Vdd from theviewpoint of power consumption.

The turn-off voltage Vgh of the gate driver circuit 12 is set to equalto or higher than the voltage Vdd. Preferably, Vdd+0.5 (V)<Vgh<Vdd+2.5(V) is satisfied. The turn-on voltage Vgl may be brought to coincidewith Vss, but preferably Vss (V)<Vgl <−0.5 (V) is satisfied. The voltagesettings above are important when the pixel configuration in FIG. 1 isused.

Although organic EL display apparatus are described herein, the displaypanels used for the organic EL display apparatus are not limited toorganic EL display panels. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 99, adisplay apparatus may be composed of an organic EL display panel used asa main display panel and a liquid crystal display panel 991 used as asub display panel.

FIG. 100 is a constructional diagram of an EL display panel whichemploys an array board 71 a for main display and an array board 71 b forsub display. A desiccant 107 is placed (sealed) between the array board71 a and array board 71 b (see FIG. 101).

Reference numeral 1001 denotes connector resin such as ACF. A signalfrom source driver circuit 14 is transmitted to the source signal line18 on the array board 71 b via the source signal line 18 on the arrayboard 71 a and the connector resin 1001.

Reference numeral 1004 denotes a polarizing plate or circular polarizingplate. A dispersing agent 1003 is placed or formed between thepolarizing plates 1004 and array boards 71. The dispersing agent 1003also functions as an adhesive which bonds the polarizing plates 1004 andarray boards 71 together. The dispersing agent 1004 may be, for example,an acrylic adhesive containing fine-powdered titanium oxide or anacrylic adhesive containing fine-powdered calcium carbonate Thedispersing agent 1004 improves the efficiency of extracting lightproduced by the EL elements 15.

FIG. 101 shows a configuration in which a glass ring 1011 is placedbetween the array board 71 a and array board 17 b. The use of the glassring 1011 makes it possible to set the distance between the array board71 a and array board 17 b freely.

FIG. 102 is a constructional diagram of a panel module according to thepresent invention. A flexible board 1021 has a function to transmitsignals inputted in a connector terminal 1023 to the source driver IC 14and gate driver circuits 12. Reference numeral 1022 denotes a controlIC.

The control IC 1022 converts serial video data into parallel data andinputs the resulting data in the source driver ICs 14. Also, it has thefunction of decoding panel control data and controlling the sourcedriver circuits 14 and the like.

FIG. 103 shows the flow of signals schematically. Serial data 1031 isinputted in the control IC 1022 via wiring on the flexible board 1021.The control IC 1022 performs serial/parallel data conversion to produceparallel video data 1032 and gate driver circuit control data 1033.

FIG. 104 shows data produced by the control IC 1022. Inputs are serialvideo signal DATA, serial control data ID, and a clock CLK. Outputs areparallel video data (RDATA (red data), GDATA (green data), and BDATA(blue data)), precharge voltage (RPV (precharge voltage for red), GPV(precharge voltage for green), and BPV (precharge voltage for blue)), aclock (CLK), an inversion signal (UD), an EL-side gate circuit controlsignal (ELCNTL), a WR-side gate circuit control signal (WRCNTL), etc.

FIG. 108 is a timing chart of input data signals. When ID is low, DATAis a video signal. When ID is high, DATA is control data. Data isdetected on rising edges of CLK. FIG. 109 shows an example in which thecontrol data ID is also inputted serially. FIG. 110 shows an example inwhich input signals are LVDS signals.

FIG. 105 is a constructional diagram of a display panel according to thepresent invention. FIG. 105(a) shows the back of the display panel andFIG. 105(b) is a sectional view taken along the line A-A′. A radiatorplate 1051 is mounted on the back of the display panel. Also, thin filmencapsulation described with reference to FIG. 11 is provided. Theradiator plate 1051 is bonded to a thin encapsulation film 111 with asilicon-based adhesive (not shown). The adhesive also acts as aconductor of heat generated by the EL elements 15. A plurality of holes1052 are formed in the radiator plate. Air passes through the holes 1052to release heat from the panel.

As illustrated in FIG. 106, there are surface-mount components 1061 on acircuit board (printed board) 1062. The circuit board 1062 is attachedvia a panel connection terminal and the flexible board 1021. Thus,signals from the circuit board 1062 are transmitted to the panel board 7l via the flexible board 1021.

Cushioning members (cushioning bumps) 1063 are formed on the printedboard 1062 to prevent the printed board 1062 from coming into contactwith the board 71, damaging the thin encapsulation film 111 (FIG.106(a)). The cushioning members 1063 may be formed of acrylic resin,polyurethane resin, or polyimide resin. Incidentally, the cushioningmembers 1063 may be formed on the panel board 71 as illustrated in FIG.106(b). When placing the panel board 71 on a casing 573, it isrecommended to place the cushioning members 1063 between the casing 573and panel board 71.

Next, description will be given of examples of display devices accordingto the present invention which run the drive systems according to thepresent invention. FIG. 57 is a plan view of a cell phone which is anexample of an information terminal. An antenna 571, numeric keys 572,etc. are mounted on a casing 573. Reference numerals 572 and the likedenote a display color switch key, power key, and frame rate switch key.

The key 572 may be configured to switch among color modes as follows:pressing it once enters 8-color display mode, pressing it again enters256-color display mode, and pressing it again enters 4,096-color displaymode. The key is a toggle switch which switch among color display modeseach time it is pressed. Incidentally, a display color change key may beprovided separately. In that case, three (or more) keys 572 are needed.

In addition to a push switch, the key 572 may be a slide switch or othermechanical switch. Speech recognition may also be used for switching.For example, the switch may be configured such that display colors onthe display screen 50 of the display panel will change as the userspeaks a phrase such as “high-definition display,” “256-color mode,” or“low-color display mode” into the phone. This can be implemented easilyusing existing speech recognition technology.

Also, display colors may be switched electrically. It is also possibleto employ a touch panel which allows the user to make a selection bytouching a menu presented on the display part 21 of the display panel.Besides, display colors may be switched based on the number of times theswitch is pressed or based on a rotation or direction as is the casewith a click ball.

A key which changes frame rate or a key which switches between movingpictures and still pictures many be used in place of the display colorswitch key 572. A key may switch two or more items at the same time: forexample, among frame rates and between moving pictures and stillpictures. Also, the key may be configured to change the frame rategradually (continuously) when pressed and held. For that, among acapacitor C and a resistor R of an oscillator, the resistor R can bemade variable or replaced with an electronic regulator. Alternatively, atrimmer capacitor may be used as a capacitor C of the oscillator. Such akey can also be implemented by forming a plurality of capacitors in asemiconductor chip, selecting one or more capacitors, and connecting thecapacitors in parallel.

Incidentally, the technical idea of changing frame rates according todisplay color and the like is not limited to cell phones, but is widelyapplicable to devices with a display screen such as palmtop computers,notebook personal computers, desktop personal computers, and portablewatches.

The cell phone according to the present invention described withreference to FIG. 57 is equipped with a CCD camera on the backside ofthe casing although not shown in the figure. Images taken by the CCDcamera can be displayed on the display screen 50 of the display panelinstantly. Data picked up by the CCD camera can be displayed on thedisplay screen 50. The image data of the CCD camera can be switchedamong 24-bit (16,700,000 colors), 18-bit (260,000 colors), 16-bit(65,000 colors), 12-bit (4,096 colors), and 8-bit (256 colors) usinginput from keys 572.

FIG. 58 is a sectional view of a viewfinder according to an embodimentof the present invention. It is illustrated schematically for ease ofexplanation. Besides, some parts are enlarged, reduced, or omitted. Forexample, an eyepiece cover is omitted in FIG. 58. The above items alsoapply to other drawings.

Inner surfaces of a body 573 are dark- or black-colored. This is toprevent stray light emitted from an EL display panel (EL displayapparatus) 574 from being reflected diffusely inside the body 573 andlowering display contrast. A phase plate (λ/4) 108, polarizing plate109, and the like are placed on an exit side of the display panel. Thishas also been described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11.

An eye ring 581 is fitted with a magnifying lens 582. The observerfocuses on a display image 50 on the display panel 574 by adjusting theposition of the eye ring 581 in the body 573.

If a convex lens 583 is placed on the exit side of the display panel 574as required, principal rays entering the magnifying lens 582 can be madeto converge. This makes it possible to reduce the diameter of themagnifying lens 582, and thus reduce the size of the viewfinder.

FIG. 59 is a perspective view of a video camera. A video camera has ataking (imaging) lens 592 and a video camera body 573. The taking lens592 and viewfinder 573 are mounted back to back with each other. Theviewfinder 573 (see also FIG. 58) is equipped with an eyepiece cover.The observer views the image 50 on the display panel 574 through theeyepiece cover.

The EL display panel according to the present invention is also used asa display monitor. The display part 50 can pivot freely on a point ofsupport 591. The display part 50 is stored in a storage compartment 593when not in use.

A switch 594 is a changeover switch or control switch and performs thefollowing functions. The switch 594 is a display mode changeover switch.The switch 594 is also suitable for cell phones and the like. Now thedisplay mode changeover switch 594 will be described.

The drive methods according to the present invention include the onethat passes an N times larger current through EL elements 15 toilluminate them for a period equal to 1/M of 1 F. By varying thisillumination period, it is possible to change brightness digitally. Forexample, designating that N=4, a four times larger current is passedthrough the EL elements 15. If the illumination period is 1/M, byswitching M among 1, 2, 3, and 4, it is possible to vary brightness from1 to 4 times. Incidentally, M may be switched among 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5,6, and so on.

The switching operation described above is used for cell phones, whichdisplay the display screen 50 very brightly at power-on and reducedisplay brightness after a certain period to save power. It can also beused to allow the user to set a desired brightness. For example, thebrightness of the screen is increased greatly outdoors. This is becausethe screen cannot be seen at all outdoors due to bright surroundings.However, the EL elements 15 deteriorate quickly under conditions ofcontinuous display at high brightness. Thus, the screen 50 is designedto return to normal brightness in a short period of time if it isdisplayed very brightly. A button which can be pressed to increasedisplay brightness should be provided, in case the user wants to displaythe screen 50 at high brightness again.

Thus, it is preferable that the user can change display brightness withthe button switch 1594, that the display brightness can be changedautomatically according to mode settings, or that the display brightnesscan be changed automatically by detecting the brightness of extraneouslight. Preferably, display brightness settings such as 50%, 60%, 80%,etc. are available to the user.

Preferably, the display screen 50 employs Gaussian display. That is, thecenter of the display screen 50 is bright and the perimeter isrelatively dark. Visually, if the center is bright, the display screen50 seems to be bright even if the perimeter is dark. According tosubjective evaluation, as long as the perimeter is at least 70% asbright as the center, there is not much difference. Even if thebrightness of the perimeter is reduced to 50%, there is almost noproblem. The self-luminous display panel according to the presentinvention generates a Gaussian distribution from top to bottom of thescreen using the N-fold pulse driving described above (a method whichpasses an N times larger current through EL elements 15 to illuminatethem for a period equal to 1/M of 1 F).

Specifically, the value of M is increased in upper and lower parts ofthe screen and decreased in the center of the screen. This isaccomplished by modulating the operating speed of a shift register ofthe gate driver circuits 12. The brightness at the left and right of thescreen is modulated by multiplying video data by table data. By reducingperipheral brightness (at an angle of view of 0.9) to 50% through theabove operation, it is possible to reduce power consumption by 20%compared to brightness of 100%. By reducing peripheral brightness (at anangle of view of 0.9) to 70%, it is possible to reduce power consumptionby 15% compared to brightness of 100%.

Preferably a changeover switch is provided to enable and disable theGaussian display. This is because the perimeter of the screen cannot beseen at all outdoors if the Gaussian display is used. Thus, it ispreferable that the user can change display brightness with the buttonswitch, that the display brightness can be changed automaticallyaccording to mode settings, or that the display brightness can bechanged automatically by detecting the brightness of extraneous light.Preferably, display brightness settings such as 50%, 60%, 80%, etc. areavailable to the user.

Liquid crystal display panels generate a fixed Gaussian distributionusing a backlight. Thus, they cannot enable and disable the Gaussiandistribution. The capability to enable and disable Gaussian distributionis peculiar to self-luminous display devices.

A fixed frame rate may cause interference with illumination of an indoorfluorescent lamp or the like, resulting in flickering. Specifically, ifthe EL elements 15 operate on 60-Hz alternating current, a fluorescentlamp illuminating on 60-Hz alternating current may cause subtleinterference, making it look as if the screen were flickering slowly. Toavoid this situation, the frame rate can be changed. The presentinvention has a capability to change frame rates. Also, it allows thevalue of N or M to be changed in N-fold pulse driving (a method whichpasses an N times larger current through EL elements 15 to illuminatethem for a period equal to 1/M of 1 F).

The above capabilities are implemented by way of the switch 594. Theswitch 594 switches among the above capabilities when pressed more thanonce, following a menu on the screen 50.

Incidentally, the above items are not limited to cell phones. Needlessto say, they are applicable to television sets, monitors, etc. Also, itis preferable to provide icons on the display screen to allow the userto know at a glance what display mode he/she is in. The above itemssimilarly apply to the following.

The EL display apparatus and the like according to this embodiment canbe applied not only to video cameras, but also to digital cameras suchas the one shown in FIG. 60. The display apparatus is used as a monitor50 attached to a camera body 601. The camera body 601 is equipped with aswitch 594 as well as a shutter 603.

The display panel described above has a relatively small display area.However, with a display area of 30 inches or larger, the display screen50 tends to flex. To deal with this situation, the present inventionputs the display panel in a frame 611 and attaches a fitting 614 so thatthe frame 611 can be suspended as shown in FIG. 61. The display panel ismounted on a wall or the like using the fitting 614.

A large screen size increases the weight of the display panel. As ameasure against this situation, the display panel is mounted on a stand613, to which a plurality of legs 612 are attached to support the weightof the display panel.

The legs 612 can be moved from side to side as indicated by A. Also,they can be contracted as indicated by B. Thus, the display apparatuscan be installed even in a small space.

A television set in FIG. 61 has a surface of its screen covered with aprotective film (or a protective plate). One purpose of the protectivefilm is to prevent the surface of the display panel from breakage byprotecting from being hit by something. An AIR coat is formed on thesurface of the protective film. Also, the surface is embossed to reduceglare caused by extraneous light on the display panel.

A space is formed between the protective film and display panel byspraying beads or the like. Fine projections are formed on the rear faceof the protective film to maintain the space between the protective filmand display panel. The space prevents impacts from being transmittedfrom the protective film to the display panel.

Also, it is useful to inject an optical coupling agent into the spacebetween the protective film and display panel. The optical couplingagent may be a liquid such as alcohol or ethylene glycol, a gel such asacrylic resin, or a solid resin such as epoxy. The optical couplingagent can prevent interfacial reflection and function as a cushioningmaterial.

The protective film may be, for example, a polycarbonate film (plate),polypropylene film (plate), acrylic film (plate), polyester film(plate), PVA film (plate), etc. Besides, it goes without saying that anengineering resin film (ABS, etc.) may be used. Also, it may be made ofan inorganic material such as tempered glass. Instead of using aprotective film, the surface of the display panel may be coated withepoxy resin, phenolic resin, and acrylic resin 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm thick(both inclusive) to produce a similar effect. Also, it is useful toemboss surfaces of the resin.

It is also useful to coat surfaces of the protective film or coatingmaterial with fluorine. This will make it easy to wipe dirt from thesurfaces with a detergent. Also, the protective film may be made thickand used for a front light as well as for the screen surface.

The display panel according to the example of the present invention maybe used in combination with the three-side free configuration. Thethree-side free configuration is useful especially when pixels are builtusing amorphous silicon technology. Also, in the case of panels formedusing amorphous silicon technology, since it is difficult to controlvariations in the characteristics of transistor elements duringproduction processes, it is preferable to use the N-pulse driving, resetdriving, dummy pixel driving, or the like according to the presentinvention. That is, the transistors according to the present inventionare not limited to those produced by polysilicon technology, and theymay be produced by amorphous silicon technology.

Incidentally, the N-fold pulse driving (FIGS. 13, 16, 19, 20, 22, 24,30, etc.) and the like according to the present invention are moreeffective for display panels which contain transistors 11 formed bylow-temperature polysilicon technology than display panels which containtransistors 11 formed by amorphous silicon technology. This is becauseadjacent transistors, when formed by amorphous silicon technology, havealmost equal characteristics. Thus, driving currents for individualtransistors are close to a target value even if the transistors aredriven by current obtained by addition (the N-fold pulse driving inFIGS. 22, 24, and 30, in particular, are effective for pixelconfigurations containing amorphous silicon transistors).

The technical idea described in the example of the present invention canbe applied to video cameras, projectors, 3D television sets, projectiontelevision sets, etc. It can also be applied to viewfinders, cell phonemonitors, PHS, personal digital assistants and their monitors, anddigital cameras and their monitors.

Also, the technical idea is applicable to electrophotographic systems,head-mounted displays, direct view monitors, notebook personalcomputers, video cameras, electronic still cameras. Also, it isapplicable to ATM monitors, public phones, videophones, personalcomputers, and wristwatches and its displays.

Furthermore, it goes without saying that the technical idea can beapplied to display monitors of household appliances, pocket gamemachines and their monitors, backlights for display panels, orilluminating devices for home or commercial use. Preferably,illuminating devices are configured such that color temperature can bevaried. Color temperature can be changed by forming RGB pixels instripes or in dot matrix and adjusting currents passed through them.Also, the technical idea can be applied to display apparatus foradvertisements or posters, RGB traffic lights, alarm lights, etc.

Also, organic EL display panels are useful as light sources forscanners. An image is read with light directed to an object using an RGBdot matrix as a light source. Needless to say, the light may bemonochromatic. Besides, the matrix is not limited to an active matrixand may be a simple matrix. The use of adjustable color temperature willimprove imaging accuracy.

Also, organic EL display panels are useful as backlights of liquidcrystal display panels. Color temperature can be changed and brightnesscan be adjusted easily by forming RGB pixels of an EL display panel(backlight) in stripes or in dot matrix and adjusting currents passedthrough them. Besides, the organic EL display panel, which provides asurface light source, makes it easy to generate Gaussian distributionthat makes the center of the screen brighter and perimeter of the screendarker. Also, organic EL display panels are useful as backlights offield-sequential liquid crystal display panels which scan with R, G, andB lights in turns. Also, they can be used as backlights of liquidcrystal display panels for movie display by inserting black even if thebacklights are turned on and off.

Industrial Applicability

According to the present invention, the display panels, displayapparatus, etc. offer distinctive effects, including high quality, highmovie display performance, low power consumption, low costs, highbrightness, etc., according to their respective configurations.

Incidentally, the present invention does not consume much power becauseit can provide power-saving information display apparatus. Also, it doesnot waste resources because it can reduce size and weight. Furthermore,it can adequately support high-resolution display panels. Thus, thepresent invention is friendly to both global environmental and spaceenvironment.

1. A drive method for an EL display panel, the EL display panelcomprising: EL elements arranged in a matrix; driver transistors whichsupply current to be passed through the EL elements; first switchingelements placed in current paths of the EL elements; a gate drivercircuit which turns on and off the first switching elements for control;and a source driver circuit which supplies programming current to thedriver transistors, wherein the driver transistors are p-channeltransistors, unit transistors which generate the programming current inthe source driver circuit are n-channel transistors, and the gate drivercircuit turns off the first switching elements at least two or moretimes during one frame period or one field period.
 2. The drive methodfor an EL display panel according to claim 1, wherein the firstswitching elements are turned off periodically during one frame periodor one field period.
 3. A drive method for an EL display panel, the ELdisplay panel comprising: EL elements arranged in a matrix; drivertransistors which supply current to be passed through the EL elements;first switching elements placed in current paths of the EL elements; agate driver circuit which turns on and off the first switching elementsfor control; and a source driver circuit which supplies programmingcurrent to the driver transistors, wherein the driver transistors arep-channel transistors, unit transistors which generate the programmingcurrent in the source driver circuit are n-channel transistors, a periodduring which a pixel row is selected and programmed with current isconstructed from a first period and second period, a first current isapplied during the first period, a second current is applied during thesecond period, the first current is larger than the second current, andthe source driver circuit outputs the first current during the firstperiod and outputs the second current during the second period whichcomes after the first period.
 4. The drive method for the EL displaypanel according to claim 1, wherein the first switching elements areturned off periodically during one frame period or one field period. 5.An EL display panel, comprising: a source driver circuit which outputsprogramming current; EL elements arranged in a matrix; drivertransistors which supply current to be passed through the EL elements;first switching elements placed in current paths of the EL elements;second switching elements which constitute paths used to transmitprogramming current to the driver transistors; a first gate drivercircuit which turns on and off the first switching elements for control;a second gate driver circuit which turns on and off the second switchingelements for control; a source driver circuit which supplies programmingcurrent to the driver transistors, wherein the driver transistors arep-channel transistors, unit transistors which generate the programmingcurrent in the source driver circuit are n-channel transistors, thefirst gate driver circuit turns off the first switching elements anumber of times during one frame period or one field period, the firstgate driver circuit is placed or formed on one side of the displaypanel, and the second gate driver circuit is placed or formed on anotherside of the display panel.
 6. The EL display panel according to claim 5,wherein the gate driver circuits are formed in a same process as thedriver transistors and the source driver circuit is made of asemiconductor chip.
 7. An EL display panel, comprising: gate signallines; source signal lines; a source driver circuit which outputsprogramming current; a gate driver circuit; EL elements arranged in amatrix; driver transistors which supply current to be passed through theEL elements; first transistors placed in current paths of the ELelements; second transistors which constitute paths used to transmitprogramming current to the driver transistors; and a source drivercircuit which supplies programming current to the driver transistors,wherein the driver transistors are p-channel transistors, unittransistors which generate the programming current in the source drivercircuit are n-channel transistors, the source driver circuit outputsprogramming current to the source signal lines, the gate driver circuitis connected to the gate signal lines, gate terminals of the secondtransistors are connected to the gate signal lines, source terminals ofthe second transistors are connected to the source signal lines, drainterminals of the second transistors are connected to drain terminals ofthe driver transistors, and the gate driver circuit selects a pluralityof gate signal lines and supplies the programming current to the drivertransistors of a plurality of pixels.
 8. An EL display panel,comprising: a display area of I pixel rows (I is an integer largerthan 1) and J pixel columns (J is an integer larger than 1); a sourcedriver circuit which applies an image signal to source signal lines inthe display area; a gate driver circuit which applies a turn-on voltageor turn-off voltage to gate signal lines in the display area; and adummy pixel row formed outside the display area, wherein EL elements arearranged in a matrix in the display area and emit light based on theimage signal from the source driver circuit, and the dummy pixel roweither does not to emit light or emits light not visible to the eye. 9.The EL display panel according to claim 7, wherein the gate drivercircuit selects a plurality of pixel rows at a time and applies theimage signal from the source driver circuit to the plurality of pixelrows; and a dummy pixel row is selected when the first pixel row or I-thpixel rows is selected.
 10. The EL display panel according to claim 7,wherein the gate driver circuit is constructed of p-channel transistors.11. An EL display panel, comprising: EL elements arranged in a matrix;driver transistors which supply current to be passed through the ELelements; first switching elements placed in current paths of the ELelements; a gate driver circuit which turns on and off the firstswitching elements for control; and a source driver circuit whichsupplies programming current to the driver transistors, wherein thedriver transistors and the first switching elements are p-channeltransistors, unit transistors which generate the programming current inthe source driver circuit are n-channel transistors, and unittransistors which generate the programming current in the source drivercircuit are n-channel transistors.
 12. A drive method for an EL displaypanel, comprising: supplying EL elements with a current which makes theEL elements emit light brighter than a predetermined brightness; andmaking the EL elements emit light for a period equal to 1/N of one frameperiod or one field period (N is larger than 1).
 13. The drive methodfor the EL display panel according to claim 12, wherein the period equalto 1/N of a frame is divided into a plurality of periods.
 14. A drivemethod for an EL display panel which uses a current to program currentsto be passed through EL elements, comprising: making the EL elementsemit light brighter than a predetermined brightness; displaying adisplay area equal to 1/N(N>1) of an entire screen; and shifting thedisplay area of 1/N of the entire screen in sequence to display theentire screen.
 15. An EL display apparatus comprising: an EL displaypanel comprising EL elements arranged in a matrix; driver transistorswhich supply current to be passed through the EL elements; firstswitching elements placed in current paths of the EL elements; and agate driver circuit which turns on and off the first switching elements,and a receiver.